Home

Manual hybird 120 Gigaset Edition

1. 0 206 10 4 Access Rules a 213 10 4 1 Access Filter 214 10 4 2 Rule Chainss s y a ir Bay Bee ee E ce Y 217 10 4 3 Interface Assignment 2 en 219 10 5 Drop io ec e e o a na e ra a eo a aa 220 10 5 1 Drop lN Groups a sietu adian a Je EE ke 220 hybird 120 Gigaset Edition V Chapter 11 MulticasE eii eta wed Bee a e ote doe 223 11 1 Contralor al e Rs SET VE Lapeer ee ch th adn JE 224 11 1 1 General aio bh as Le da Sad he te Al Be i eB se 225 11 2 IGMP eee de cee a ete ee ee pt Bd eee dee Ge 225 11 2 1 IGMP Att NLS ca UE Eta oh td ieee HE ated ee oo th oe petted oe 225 11 2 2 Options Ri 4 22 3 ah ete wee ots eee ty Ak oS ated A tol onl ot ede ak 227 11 3 Forwarding da oe nie Ay nee ee tact ae ae Ee he os Bie 228 11 3 1 Forwarding gio 440 e a eS A do ee ie ew Dt A 228 Chapter 12 WAN AMS See ut cere aid SAE an ln cues Bats dt he 230 12 1 Internet DIalUp i a atenn FS Seat ee a we tds De 230 12 1 1 PPPOE 2 3 5 wag AR ee SA ea OE ae O Se 232 12 1 2 PEIRA 24 A Bet teak st aut IA Ede ed ot 237 12 1 3 ISDN c pe we BRR ER E amp Se ee Gok GS e Gd 241 12 1 4 IP POOIS wick 0 eed ahd oh Pt le ick fe en deo et tee BS 248 12 2 Real Time Jitter Control 2 2 ee ee 249 12 2 1 Controlled Interfaces 2 ee 249 Chapter 13 MPN a Sottero ar Sanh ot SEE bo ky or at oe OB ee 251 13 1 AAA vee seen Pes aces Meee ete Pia in wee on a nt Se PO c 25
2. sions Active IPSec Tunnels Displays the number of currently active IPSec tunnels in rela tion to the number of configured IPSec tunnels Fields in the Modules menu DSP Module Shows the type of plugged DSP module if any An acquired fax licence if any can be displayed Fields in the Physical Interfaces menu Field Value Interface Connection The physical interfaces are listed here and their most important Information Link settings are shown The system also displays whether the in terface is connected or active Interface specifics for Ethernet interfaces e IP address e Netmask e Not configured 2 System Management Gigaset Communications GmbH Field Value Interface specifics for ISDN interfaces e Configured Not configured Interface specifics for xDSL interfaces Downstream Upstream Line Speed Fields in the WAN Interfaces menu Field Value Description Connec All the WAN interfaces are listed here and their most important tion Information Link settings are shown The system also displays whether the in terface is active 2 2 Global Settings The basic system parameters are managed in the Global Settings menu 2 2 1 System The System Management gt Global Settings gt System menu is used for entering your system s basic data The System Management gt Global Settings gt System menu consists of the following fields Fields in the menu Basic Settings Field Value System Name En
3. e Linear All assigned terminals are called in the sequence of their entry in configuration If a terminal is engaged the next free terminal is called The call is signalled ca 15 seconds per subscriber The period can be set between 1 and 99 seconds per bell in the configuration If subscribers are on the phone or logged out there is not forwarding time for these e Rotating This call is a special case of the linear call After all terminals are called call signalling begins again with the first entered terminal The call is signalled until the caller re places the receiver or the call is ended by the intercom ad apter after ca 2 minutes e Adding The terminals are called in the sequence of their entry in the configuration subscriber list Every terminal that has already been called is called again until all entered ter minals are called In the configuration you can define when each next terminal is called e Linear Simultaneous on No Reply You have set lin ear for the door intercom call After the defined time has run out you can also set in the configuration that all team sub scribers are then called in parallel simultaneously e Rotating Simultaneous on No Reply You have set rotating for the door intercom call After the defined time has run out you can also set in the configuration that all intercom subscribers are then called in parallel simultaneously Gigaset Communications GmbH 8 Applications 8 8 A
4. hybird 120 Gigaset Edition Gigaset Communications GmbH 13 VPN Chapter 13 VPN A connection that uses the Internet as a transport medium but is not publicly accessible is referred to as a VPN Virtual Private Network Only authorised users have access to such a VPN which is seemingly also referred to as a VPN tunnel Normally the data transported over a VPN is encrypted A VPN allows field staff or staff working from home offices to access data on the com pany s network Subsidiaries can also connect to head office over VPN Various protocols are available for creating a VPN tunnel e g IPSec or PPTP The connection partner is authenticated with a password using preshared keys or certific ates With IPSec the data is encrypted using AES or 3DES for example with PPTP you can use MPPE 13 1 IPSec IPSec enables secure connections to be set up between two locations VPN This en ables sensitive business data to be transferred via an unsecure medium such as the Inter net The devices used function here as the endpoints of the VPN tunnel IPSec involves a number of Internet Engineering Task Force IETF standards which specify mechanisms for the protection and authentication of IP packets IPSec offers mechanisms for encrypt ing and decrypting the data transferred in the IP packets The IPSec implementation can also be smoothly integrated in a Public Key Infrastructure PKI see Certificates on page 41 IPSec implementatio
5. Additional Info for Ex Select what should be displayed for an exchange call tern Call Possible values e Trunk and Number Name The display shows the ex change connection and the assigned name alternatively e Trunk Name Only Only the name assigned to the ex change connection is displayed e Number Name Only default value The display shows the name assigned to the external number only e None Display is blank 5 2 2 2 Features Additional functions are configured in the Numbering gt User Settings gt Class of Ser vices gt Features menu Call pickup A call is signalled to a co worker who is presently absent from his work station You now have two options to respond to the caller You could walk over to your colleague s tele phone or transfer your colleague s call to your phone Assignment is done by the option Pick up Group in the menu Features the group is then assigned to a user If the values are identical a call pickup is possible Call pickup is not possible for open inquiry System telephones can pick up calls via programmed function keys You can set up line keys connection keys and team keys on system telephones e Line key An ISDN connection or a VoIP provider is set up under a connection key The LED assigned to the line key indicates the connection status The LED lights up if both B channels of a connection are in use or when the maximum number of simultaneous connections over a VoIP provider is rea
6. Index Address Mode 180 Address Range 310 Address Type 310 Address List 309 Address Subnet 310 Addresses 69 309 Admin Password 118 122 Administration 185 Administrative Status 253 318 Administrative Access 24 ADSL Logic 370 Agents 163 Agents assigned 160 Agents in Wrap up 160 Agents loggedon 160 Alarm Signalling Period 170 Alarm Calls 169 Alarm Input 9 Alert Service 383 Alert Service 384 Alert Recipient 383 Alert Settings 384 Alert Service 383 Alive Check 32 270 275 Alive Check 391 All Multicast Groups 229 Allow manual trunk group selection 91 Allowed HotSpot Client 360 Always on 233 237 241 286 291 Analogue 127 Analogue Ports 57 Announcement 146 Answer to client request 356 Answered of Calls Today 160 Application 142 Applications 103 141 Apply QoS 304 ARP Lifetime 220 ARS 137 As DHCP Server 317 As IPCP Server 317 Assign project codes 20 Assigned Users 390 Index Assignment 108 113 150 167 Assistants 1 Authentication 235 239 244 288 294 Authentication ID 61 Authentication Method 253 266 Authentication Type 31 35 Authentication Method 391 Authentication for PPP Dialin 37 Authorization 114 Authorizations 89 Auto Attendant with DISA 148 Automatic Call Pick up with 110 162 Automatic Call Pick up 388 389 Automatic Outside Line 91 Automatic Route Selection ARS 93 Automatic Route Selection 137 Autosave Mode 48 340 B
7. None default value MPP encryption is not used e Enabled MPP encryption V2 with 128 bit is used to RFC 3078 e Windows compatible MPP encryption V2 with 128 bit is used as compatible with Microsoft and Cisco Callback Mode Select the Callback Mode function Possible values e None default value Your device does not call back e Active Select one of the following options e No PPP negotiation Your device calls the connection partner to request a callback e Windows Client Mode Your device calls the connec tion partner to request a callback via CBCP Callback Con trol Protocol Needed for Windows clients e Passive Select one of the following options e PPP Negotiation or CLID Your device calls back im mediately when requested to do so by the connection part ner 12 WAN Gigaset Communications GmbH Field Description e Windows Server Mode Your device calls back after a period of time suggested by the Microsoft client NT 10 seconds new systems 12 seconds It uses the call num ber Entries gt Call Number with the Mode Outgoing or Both entered for the connection partner If no number is entered the required number can be reported by the caller in a PPP negotiation This setting should be avoided where possible for security reasons At present this cannot be avoided when connecting mobile Microsoft clients via a DCN e Delayed CLID only Your device calls back after ap prox four seconds if yo
8. Speed Dial Enter the new code for performance feature Speed Dial Trunk Group Selection Create the new access numbers for the Trunk Group Selec tion feature Gigaset Communications GmbH 2 System Management Field Description To do this first click Add to create a bundle selection select the bundle and enter the access number you require for the bundle System Parking Open Create the new access numbers for the System Parking Enquiry Open Enquiry feature To do this first click Add to create a queue in which the caller is to be held and enter the access number you require for the queue You can create a maximum of 10 entries 2 4 Interface Mode Bridge Groups In this menu you define the operation mode for your device s interfaces Routing versus bridging Bridging connects networks of the same type In contrast to routing bridges operate at layer 2 of the OSI model data link layer are independent of higher level protocols and transmit data packets using MAC addresses Data transmission is transparent which means the information contained in the data packets is not interpreted With routing different networks are connected at layer 3 network layer of the OSI model and information is routed from one network to the other Conventions for port interface names If your device has a radio port it receives the interface name WLAN If there are several radio modules the names of wireless ports in the user interface
9. The function is disabled by default Transfer Mode Only for Transfer own IP address over ISDN GSM enabled Select the mode in which your device is to attempt to transfer its IP address to the peer Possible values e Autodetect best mode Your device automatically de termines the most favourable mode It first tries all D channel modes before switching to the B channel Costs are incurred for using the B channel e Autodetect only D Channel Modes Your device auto matically determines the most favourable D channel mode The use of the B channel is excluded e Use specific D Channel Mode Your device tries to transfer the IP address in the mode set in the Mode field e Try specific D Channel Mode fall back to B Channel Your device tries to transfer the IP address in the mode set in the Mode field If this does not succeed the IP address is transferred in the B channel This incurs costs e Use only B Channel Mode Your device transfers the IP address in the B channel This incurs costs D Channel Mode Only for Transfer Mode Use specific D Channel Mode or Try specific D Channel Mode fall back to B Channel Select the D channel mode in which your device tries to trans fer the IP address Possible values e LLC default value The IP address is transferred in the LLC information elements of the D channel e SUBADDR The IP address is transferred in the subaddress information elements of the D channel
10. e so Interface for ISDN SO connection Default MSN Shows whether a standard MSN is assigned for an internal SO bus You can use a standard MSN to access unconfigured SO ter minals As a standard MSN you can dial the internal numbers con figured in the Numbering gt User Settings gt Users menu and assigned to a terminal in the Terminals menu Status Displays the status of the interface 3 2 2 1 Edit Choose the pl button to edit an entry The menu Physical Interfaces gt ISDN Ports gt ISDN Internal gt consists of the follow ing fields Fields in the Basic Settings menu Gigaset Communications GmbH 3 Physical Interfaces Field Description Default MSN Dial the number you want You can dial any number that you have configured in the Numbering gt User Settings gt Users gt Numbers menu Possible values e Not configured e lt Subscriber Number gt 3 3 Analogue Ports 3 3 1 Analogue External FXO The Analogue External FXO menu displays all of your system s available analogue ex ternal connections The Physical Interfaces gt Analogue Ports gt Analogue External FXO menu consists of the following fields Values in the Analogue External FXO list Field Description Name Shows the name of the analogue interface Possible values e FXO Name for the analogue connection Description Shows the user defined description of the analogue interface Dialling Method Displays the dialling method
11. played within 10 seconds in the Last seen column C Note If you wish to change the language currently used with a DECT single cell system the system has to be connected to the provisioning server of the el meg hybird You required an installed SD card All the languages used need to be stored on the SD card Single cell systems load the language re quired from the SD card when necessary 6 1 2 1 General In the menu Terminals gt Gigaset Phones gt Gigaset DECT you make the basic settings for base stations The Terminals gt Gigaset Phones gt Gigaset DECT gt General menu consists of the fol lowing fields Fields in the menu Basic Settings Field Description Description To clearly identify the base station in the system enter a de scription for the telephone Phone Type Displays the type of base station Possible values o WSLO IP IRO N720 DM PRO Location Select the location of the base station You define locations in the VoIP gt Settings gt Locations menu Depending on the set ting in this menu default behaviour for registration of VoIP sub scribers for which no location should be defined is displayed for selection Gigaset Communications GmbH 6 Terminals Field Description Possible values e Not defined Unrestricted Registration No loc ation is defined According to set default behaviour the sub criber is nevertheless registered e Not defined No Registration No location is defined
12. 0 29 2 6 1 RADIUS s coo we ee e a a e ee E a 29 2 6 2 TACACS 34 2 6 3 OPTIONS g so bob o a GOR A e SR 2k A dd 37 2 7 Configuration Access oa oa o 37 2 7 1 Access Profiles a 38 2 72 USOS hata a GEA ates et ta e ey AE A ete BOR Re 40 2 8 Certificates hur n a BRS eee BM eee we ee ae eS 41 2 8 1 Certificate List 2 oc sv ao a a ae i a 42 hybird 120 Gigaset Edition i 2 8 2 2 8 3 Chapter 3 3 1 3 1 1 3 2 3 2 1 3 2 2 3 3 3 3 1 3 3 2 Chapter 4 4 1 4 1 1 4 1 2 4 1 3 4 1 4 Chapter 5 5 1 5 1 1 5 1 2 5 1 3 5 1 4 5 2 5 2 1 5 2 2 5 2 3 CRUS ince ot dd wigs a Ta tk do 49 Certificate Servers oo a a a 50 Physical Interfaces ooa 51 Ethernet Ports 2 iiy t fa Beye bE ae ae SG Bete Be hee ss 51 Port Configuration ocaso a oe Be a de Bee Qed der de a 52 ISDN Ports ai a sasl o 53 ISDN External 2 2 e eo 54 ISDNIMternal su e o eee PA Re Goel a 55 Analogue Ports victor a as 57 Analogue External FXO 2 2 0 eo o 57 Analogue Internal FXS 2 2 ee 59 NOIR Se et dt datar de aliada a E 61 A A E A 61 SIP Provider 2 4 add cr a A he cad ic 61 Locations gt sa sumone crauma dond 2 6 ee a a 69 Codec Profiles 0 0 o 71 Options ou Ba a a A a Bd 74 Numbering 2 20 4406 40s ede eae ede A 76 Trun
13. Fields in the Basic Settings menu Field Description Description Enter a description for the entry Fields in the Line Access Authorization menu Field Description Line Access Authoriz Select line access authorisation for the authorisation class ation Line access authorisation determines which calls internal ex ternal are allowed The system distinguishes several au thorisation levels Possible values e International The telephones have unrestricted dialling authorisations and can initiate all connections e National The telephones can initiate all calls except inter national calls If a number starts with the code for internation al dialling the number cannot be dialled e Incoming The telephones can receive incoming external calls but cannot initiate any external calls Internal calls are possible Region The telephones cannot make any national or inter national calls For this dial permission 10 exception numbers allowing national or international dialling can be configured An exception number can consist of complete call numbers or sections thereof e g the first numerals e Local The telephones can make local calls National and international calls are not possible e Internal The telephones do not have authorisation for in coming or outgoing external calls Only internal telephone calls are possible Automatic Outside This setting defines whether automatic outside line is set up f
14. Manual hybird 120 Gigaset Edition Copyright Version 1 0 2013 Gigaset Communications GmbH hybird 120 Gigaset Edition 1 Legal Notice This publication is subject to change Gigaset GmbH offers no warranty whatsoever for in formation contained in this manual Gigaset GmbH is not liable for any direct indirect col lateral consequential or any other damage connected to the delivery supply or use of this manual Copyright Gigaset GmbH All rights to the data included in particular the right to copy and propagate are resevered by Gigaset GmbH 2 hybird 120 Gigaset Edition Table of Contents Chapter 1 Assistants e css ie wd Ps ke we as i el Oe aw 8 1 Chapter 2 System Management 0 0000 eee 2 2 1 Stalin o Sw Rae oe e e da din eS 2 2 2 Global Settings s s s sos sack e toag ha drsd 2 4 2 2 1 System e e s o a E ha e a Boe a eR a 4 2 2 2 Passwords ooa a a a a 10 2 2 3 Date and Time a 12 2 2 4 TIMET a ak a aa oe ae ede he wah a a tee aE E E te ok ae wh 16 2 2 5 System Licences 2 aaa a 19 2 3 Access Codes os ek we a a ER ee RR a a 19 2 3 1 Alternative Access Codes 2 ee ee es 20 2 4 Interface Mode Bridge Groups o 21 2 4 1 IMOrTACES oos sra SA He EPS See Le EO a we ee a 23 2 5 Administrative Access 6 1 1 ee a 24 2 5 1 ACCESS em ck ae ede Be ed a ad a at 24 2 5 2 A AE 25 2 5 3 SNMP s aries ek cs a a a 28 2 6 Remote Authentication a a
15. No system time indicated e Time System time without date e Date amp Time System time with date Protocol Select the protocol for the transfer of syslog messages Note that the syslog server must support the protocol Possible values e UDP default value O TNC Type of Messages Select the message type Possible values e System Accounting default value e System e Accounting 17 2 IP Accounting In modern networks information about the type and number of data packets sent and re ceived over the network connections is often collected for commercial reasons This in formation is extremely important for Internet Service Providers that bill their customers by data volume However there are also non commercial reasons for detailed network accounting If for example you manage a server that provides different kinds of network services it is use ful for you to know how much data is generated by the individual services Your device contains the IP Accounting function which enables you to collect a lot of use ful information about the IP network traffic each individual IP session 17 2 1 Interfaces In this menu you can configure the IP Accounting function individually for each interface 17 External Reporting Gigaset Communications GmbH In the External Reporting gt IP Accounting gt Interfaces menu a list of all interfaces con figured on your device is shown For each entry you can activate IP Acco
16. mote IP Address 13 3 3 IP Pools The IP Pools menu displays a list of all IP pools for PPTP connections Your device can operate as a dynamic IP address server for PPTP connections You can use this function by providing one or more pools of IP addresses These IP addresses can be assigned to dialling in connection partners for the duration of the connection Any host routes entered always have priority over IP addresses from the address pools This means if an incoming call has been authenticated your device first checks whether a host route is entered in the routing table for this caller If not your device can allocate an IP address from an address pool if available If address pools have more than one IP ad dress you cannot specify which connection partner receives which address The ad dresses are initially assigned in order If a new dial in takes place within an interval of one hour an attempt is made to allocate the same IP address assigned to this partner the last time Choose the Add button to set up new IP pools 13 3 3 1 Edit or New Choose the New button to set up new IP address pools Choose the Fay icon to edit exist ing entries Fields in the menu Basic Parameters Gigaset Communications GmbH 13 VPN Field Description IP Pool Name Enter any description to uniquely identify the IP pool IP Address Range Enter the first first field and last second field IP address of the IP address pool DNS Server Pr
17. name is answered with the related IP Address e None A DNS request is ignored no answer is given IP Address Only if Response Positive Enter the IP address assigned to DNS Hostname TTL Enter the validity period of the assignment from DNS Host name to IP Address in seconds only relevant for Response Positive transmitted to requesting hosts The default value is 86400 24 h 15 1 4 Domain Forwarding In the Local Services gt DNS gt Domain Forwarding menu a list of all configured forward ings for defined domains is displayed 15 1 4 1 New Choose the New button to set up additional forwardings Gigaset Communications GmbH 15 Local Services The menu Local Services gt DNS gt Domain Forwarding gt New consists of the following fields Fields in the Forwarding Parameters menu Field Description Forward Select whether a host or domain is to be forwarded Possible values e Host default value e Domain Host Only for Forwarding Host Enter the name of the host to be forwarded The entry can also start with the wildcard e g bintec elmeg com If a name is entered without a full stop you complete with OK lt Default Domain gt is added Domain Only for Forwarding Domain Enter the name of the domain to be forwarded The entry can also start with the wildcard e g bintec elmeg com If a name is entered without a full stop you complete with OK lt Default Domain gt is added F
18. sions between certain hosts Access filters in the gateway are based on the combination of filters and actions for filter rules rules and the linking of these rules to form rule chains They act on the incoming data packets to allow or deny access to the gateway for certain data A filter describes a certain part of the IP data traffic based on the source and or destina tion IP address netmask protocol and source and or destination port You use the rules that you set up in the access lists to tell the gateway what to do with the filtered data packets i e whether it should allow or deny them You can also define sever al rules which you arrange in the form of a chain to obtain a certain sequence There are various approaches for the definition of rules and rule chains Allow all packets that are not explicitly denied i e e Deny all packets that match Filter 1 e Deny all packets that match Filter 2 e Allow the rest or Allow all packets that are explicitly allowed i e e Allow all packets that match Filter 1 e Allow all packets that match Filter 2 10 Networking Gigaset Communications GmbH e Deny the rest or Combination of the two possibilities described above A number of separate rule chains can be created The same filter can also be used in dif ferent rule chains You can also assign a rule chain individually to each interface N Caution Make sure you don t lock yourself out when configuring f
19. 18 4 Interfaces 18 4 1 Statistics In the Monitoring gt Interfaces gt Statistics menu current values and activities of all device interfaces are displayed With the filter bar you can select whether to display Transfer Totals or Transfer Throughput The values per second are shown on the Transfer Throughput display Change the status of the interface by clicking the e or the button in the Action column Values in the Statistics list Field Description No Shows the serial number of the interface 18 Monitoring Gigaset Communications GmbH Field Description Description Displays the name of the interface Type Displays the interface text Tx Packets Shows the total number of packets sent Tx Bytes Displays the total number of octets sent Tx Errors Shows the total number of errors sent Rx Packets Shows the total number of packets received Rx Bytes Displays the total number of bytes received Rx Errors Shows the total number of errors received Status Shows the operating status of the selected interface Unchanged for Shows the length of time for which the operating status of the interface has not changed Action Enables you to change the status of the interface as displayed Press the P button to display the statistical data for the individual interfaces in detail Values in the Statistics list Field Description Description Displays the name of the interface MAC Address Displays the interfac
20. According to set default behaviour the subscriber is not registered e Not defined Registration for Private Net works Only No location is defined According to set de fault behaviour the subscriber is only registered if located in a private network e Location A defined location is selected The subscriber is only registered if at this location MAC Address Shows the MAC address of the base station IP MAC Binding Displays the IP address automatically assigned by DHCP Here you have the option of permanently assigning the dis played IP address to the base station with the displayed MAC address This option should be activated to enable quick re login after a functional fault The menu Advanced Settings consists of the following fields Fields in the menu Further Settings Field Description No Hold and Retrieve The performance features hold a call and retrieve a held call are not available on certain telephones The function is activated by selecting Enabled The function is disabled by default Fields in the menu Codec Settings Field Description Codec Profile Select the Codec profile to be used Codec profiles are con figured in the VoIP gt Settings gt Codec Profiles menu 6 Terminals Gigaset Communications GmbH 6 1 2 2 Numbers In the menu Terminals gt Gigaset Phones gt Gigaset DECT gt Numbers you assign In ternal Numbers to the mobile parts You can select from the numbers that you have cre ate
21. Enter if required the source IP address and netmask of the Netmask data packets Possible values e Any e Host Enter the IP address of the host e Network default value Enter the network address and the related netmask Source Port Only for Protocol TCP or UDP Enter the source port of the data packets The default setting A11 1 means that the port remains unspecified Destination IP Ad Enter the destination IP address and corresponding netmask of dress Netmask the data packets Destination Port Only for Protocol TCP or UDP Enter the destination port of the data packets The default set ting Al1 1 means that the port remains unspecified The menu Advanced Settings consists of the following fields Fields in the menu Advanced IPSec Options Field Description Phase 1 Profile Select a profile for Phase 1 Besides user defined profiles pre defined profiles are available Possible values Gigaset Communications GmbH 13 VPN Field Description e None use default profile Uses the profile marked as standard in VPN gt IPSec gt Phase 1 Profiles e Multi Proposal Uses a special profile which contains the proposals for Phase 1 3DES MD5 AES MD5 and Blowfish MD5 regardless of the proposal selection in menu VPN gt IPSec gt Phase 1 Profiles e lt Profilname gt Uses a profile configured in menu VPN gt IPSec gt Phase 1 Profiles for Phase 1 Phase 2 Profile Select a profile for Phase 2 Besid
22. Enter the start and end IP address of the range 14 3 2 Groups A list of all configured address groups is displayed in the Firewall gt Addresses gt Groups menu You can group together addresses This makes it easier to configure firewall rules 14 3 2 1 New Choose the New button to set up additional address groups The menu Firewall gt Addresses gt Groups gt New consists of the following fields Fields in the Basic Parameters menu Gigaset Communications GmbH 14 Firewall Field Description Description Enter the desired description of the address group Selection Select the members of the group from the available Ad dresses To do this activate the Fields in the Selection column 14 4 Services 14 4 1 Service List In the Firewall gt Services gt Service List menu a list of all available services is displayed 14 4 1 1 New Choose the New button to set up additional services The menu Firewall gt Services gt Service List gt New consists of the following fields Fields in the Basic Parameters menu Field Description Description Enter an alias for the service you want to configure Protocol Select the protocol on which the service is to be based The most important protocols are available for selection Destination Port Only for Protocol TCP UDP TCP or UDP Range In the first field enter the destination port via which the service is to run If a port number range is specified in the second fie
23. Follow me Room Monitoring 11 Remote File Name 340 Remote GRE IP Address 299 Remote ID 391 Remote IP 391 Remote IP Address 284 Remote IP Address 391 Remote PPTP IP Address 239 291 Remote PPTP IP AddressHost Name 291 Remote User for Dialin only 241 Repeat after 170 Reporting Method 219 Rerouting 145 Rerouting Application 88 113 Index Rerouting Function 162 Rerouting Applications 149 Rerouting Functions 145 Rerouting of Incoming Distribution 9 Rerouting on no response 111 162 Rerouting on no response 389 Rerouting to Number 115 Rerouting to Number 6 Response 320 Restore Default Settings 24 Retries 32 Return Address 178 Robustness 226 Role 277 Room Monitoring 388 Route 138 Route Class 186 Route Entries 234 238 242 255 287 293 299 Route and Charge Assignment 108 Route Type 186 192 Routes 186 Routing 139 Routing Mode 138 Routing Stage 137 Routing Stage 1 140 Routing Stage 2 140 RSA Key Status 26 RTP Port 74 RTT Mode Realtime Traffic Mode 209 Rule Chain 218 219 367 Rule Chains 217 Rx Bytes 393 394 Rx Errors 393 Rx Packets 393 394 S Save configuration 38 Save call data records 103 Save incoming calls 158 Save outgoing calls 158 SCEP URL 44 Schedule Interval 350 Index Scheduling 335 SD Card Vers 375 Second Timeserver 14 Second External Number 171 Secondary DHCP Server 332 Secondary DNS Server 318 Security Algorithm 391 Select f
24. Priority 31 35 209 304 318 Priority Number 136 Priority Numbers 136 Priority Queueing 209 Privacy Number Truncation 158 Project Code 157 157 Propagate PMTU 275 Proposals 266 273 Protocol 196 201 214 258 311 326 340 362 380 Protocol Header Size below Layer 3 206 Provider 324 Provider Name 326 Provider Status 61 Provider without Registration 65 Provisioning Server code 3 331 Proxy 64 Proxy Interface 227 Proxy Port 64 Proxy ARP 181 260 Proxy ARP Mode 247 289 295 Public Source IP Address 260 PVID 184 Q QoS 200 306 395 QoS Classification 203 QoS Interfaces Policies 206 QoS Filter 200 QoS Queue 395 Query Interval 226 Queued 395 Queues Policies 206 R RA Encrypt Certificate 44 Gigaset Communications GmbH RA Sign Certificate 44 RADIUS 29 RADIUS Dialout 32 RADIUS Secret 31 RADIUS Server Group ID 277 Real Time Jitter Control 206 Real Time Jitter Control 249 Reboot 378 Reboot after execution 340 Reboot device after 340 Receive Announcement Calls 102 Receive charges 58 Receive Announcement Calls 388 Receive Intercom Calls 388 Receive MWI Information 102 Receive System Intercom Call 102 Received DNS Packets 322 Recipient 383 Registrar 63 Registrar Port 63 Registration Timer 64 Relay Contact 170 Remaining Validity 336 Remote Hostname 283 Remote Address 394 Remote Networks 391 Remote Port 391 394 Remote Authentication 29 Remote Access e g
25. Route Type Displays the route type Extended Route Displays whether a route has been configured with advanced parameters Delete You can delete entries with the symbol 10 1 3 Options Back Route Verify The term Back Route Verify describes a very simple but powerful function If a check is activated for an interface incoming data packets are only accepted over this interface if outgoing response packets are routed over the same interface You can therefore prevent the acceptance of packets with false IP addresses even without using filters The Networking gt Routes gt Options menu consists of the following fields Fields in the Back Route Verify menu Field Description Mode Select how the interfaces to be activated for Back Route Verify are to be specified Possible values e Enable for all interfaces Back Route Verify is ac tivated for all interfaces e Enable for specific interfaces default value A Gigaset Communications GmbH 10 Networking Field Description list of all interfaces is displayed in which Back Route Verify is only enabled for specific interfaces e Disable for all interfaces Back route verify is dis abled for all interfaces No Only for Mode Enable for specific interfaces Displays the serial number of the list entry Interface Only for Mode Enable for specific interfaces Displays the name of the interface Back Route Verify Only for Mode Enable for specific interfaces Selec
26. Timer be signalled The default value is 40 seconds Team Speed Timer Here enter the Team Speed Timer following which call for warding after time shall be performed The default value is 15 seconds Simultaneous on no It is possible for all numbers assigned to this door intercom sig response nalling to be called simultaneously after a specified time The default value is 60 seconds 8 7 2 2 Doorcom Signalling Variant 1 and 2 In the Doorcom Signalling Variant area you configure both intercom call options for this signalling profile The Applications gt Doorcom Units gt Doorcom Signalling gt Intercom call variant con sists of the following fields Fields in the Basic Settings menu Field Description Assignment Select where pressing of the bell button shall be signalled Possible values e Internal Signalling occurs on an internal number e External Signalling occurs to an external number Internal Assignment Select the internal numbers on which pressing of the door bell 8 Applications Gigaset Communications GmbH Field Description shall be signalled With Add you add an internal number External Assignment Enter the external telephone number to which pressing the door bell shall be signalled Signalling You can call the internal number with a broadcast call Possible values e Simultaneous default value All assigned terminals are called simultaneously If a telephone is busy call waiting can be used
27. e LLC and SUBADDR The IP address is transferred in both 13 VPN Gigaset Communications GmbH Field Description the LLC and subaddress information elements 13 1 2 Phase 1 Profiles A list of all configured tunnel profiles is displayed in the VPN gt IPSec gt Phase 1 Profiles menu In the Default column you can mark the profile to be used as the default profile 13 1 2 1 New Choose the New at Create new IKEv1 Profile or Create new IKEv2 Profile button to create additional profiles The menu VPN gt IPSec gt Phase 1 Profiles gt New consists of the following fields Fields in the Phase 1 IKE Parameters menu Field Description Description Enter a description that uniquely defines the type of rule Proposals In this field you can select any combination of encryption and message hash algorithms for IKE phase 1 on your device The combination of six encryption algorithms and four message hash algorithms gives 24 possible values in this field At least one proposal must exist Therefore the first line of the table cannot be deactivated Encryption algorithms Encryption e 3DES default value 3DES is an extension of the DES al gorithm with an effective key length of 112 bits which is rated as secure It is the slowest algorithm currently suppor ted e Twofish Twofish was a final candidate for the AES Advanced Encryption Standard It is rated as just as secure as Rijndael AES but is slower e Blow
28. e Static Static channel bundling e Dynamic Dynamic channel bundling Fields in the Dial Numbers menu Field Description Entries Add new entries with Add Fields in menu Dial Number Configuration appears only for Entries Add Field Description Mode Only if Entries Add The calling party number of the call is compared with the num ber entered under Call Number Defines whether Call Num ber should be used for incoming or outgoing calls or for both Possible values Both default value For incoming and outgoing calls e Incoming For incoming calls where your connection part ner dials in to your device e Outgoing For outgoing calls where you dial your connec tion partner The calling party number of the incoming call is compared with the number entered under Call Number Call Number Enter the connection partner s numbers Number of Used Ports Select which port is used Fields in the IP Options menu Field Description OSPF Mode Select whether and how routes are propagated via the inter face and or OSPF protocol packets are sent Possible values e Passive default value OSPF is not activated for this inter face i e no routes are propagated or OSPF protocol packets sent over this interface Networks reachable over this inter face are however included when calculating the routing in formation and propagated over active interfaces 12 WAN Gigaset Communications GmbH Field Description e Act
29. e User LAN protection theft protection e Realtime video audio conferences Messenger services universal plug amp play e Provision of public Internet accesses hotspot e Use of a redundant gateway BRRP 15 1 DNS Each device in a TCP IP network is usually located by its IP address Because host names are often used in networks to reach different devices it is necessary for the asso ciated IP address to be known This task can be performed by a DNS server which re solves the host names into IP addresses Alternatively name resolution can also take place over the HOSTS file which is available on all PCs Your device offers the following options for name resolution DNS Proxy for forwarding DNS requests sent to your device to a suitable DNS server This also includes specific forwarding of defined domains Forwarded Domains e DNS cache for saving the positive and negative results of DNS requests e Static entries static hosts to manually define or prevent assignments of IP addresses to names e DNS monitoring statistics to provide an overview of DNS requests on your device Name server Gigaset Communications GmbH 15 Local Services Under Local Services gt DNS gt Global Settings gt Basic Parameters you enter the IP ad dresses of name servers that are queried if your device cannot answer requests itself or by forwarding entries Global name servers and name servers that are attached to an in terface can bot
30. entered statically or by PPP negotiation DNS NetBIOS name server WINS and default gateway 15 4 1 IP Pool Configuration The Local Services gt DHCP Server gt IP Pool Configuration menu displays a list of all the configured IP pools This list is global and also displays pools configured in other menus 15 Local Services Gigaset Communications GmbH 15 4 1 1 Edit or New Choose the New button to set up new IP address pools Choose the Fay icon to edit exist ing entries The Local Services gt DHCP Server gt IP Pool Configuration gt New menu consists of the following fields Fields in the menu Basic Parameters Field Description IP Pool Name Enter any description to uniquely identify the IP pool IP Address Range Enter the first first field and last second field IP address of the IP address pool DNS Server Primary Enter the IP address of the DNS server that is to be used preferably by clients who draw an address from this pool Secondary Optionally enter the IP address of an alternative DNS server 15 4 2 DHCP Configuration To activate your device as a DHCP server you must first define IP address pools from which the IP addresses are distributed to the requesting clients A list of all configured IP address pools is displayed in the Local Services gt DHCP Server gt DHCP Configuration menu In the list for each entry you have the possibility under Status of enabling or disabling the configured
31. for example be signalled simultaneously to all or first to one telephone then also to a second etc In one team an swering machines or voice systems can also be used Four team call options are assigned to each team Switching between call options can oc cur manually or via one of the calendars 5 Numbering Gigaset Communications GmbH Choose the E icon to edit existing entries Select the New button to create a new team 5 3 1 1 General In the Numbering gt Groups amp Teams gt Teams gt General basic conditions in the team are configured Among these are the team name and the internal team number For internal team calls a team number and team name can be assigned to the team in the configuration If a team number is dialled the caller sees the team name until a team subscriber accepts the call The name of the team subscriber is then displayed The Numbering gt Groups amp Teams gt Teams gt General menu consists of the following fields Fields in the Basic Settings menu Field Description Description Enter a description for the team Internal Number Enter the internal number of the team Fields in the Further Settings menu Field Description Switch call signalling Define whether the call option configured for the team shall be enabled manually over the telephone or via the calendar For this calendar and switching times must first have been con figured You can create up to four call variants for each tea
32. gt Administrative Access gt SSH menu consists of the follow ing fields Fields in the menu SSH Secure Shell Parameters Field Value SSH service active Select whether the SSH Daemon is to be enabled for the inter face The function is activated by selecting Enabled The function is enabled by default SSH Port Here you can enter the port via which the SSH connection is to be established The default value is 22 2 System Management Gigaset Communications GmbH Field Value Maximum number of concurrent connec tions Enter the maximum number of simultaneously active SSH con nections The default value is 1 Fields in the menu Authentication and Encryption Parameters Field Value Encryption Algorithms Select the algorithms that are to be used to encrypt the SSH connection Possible options O SIDES e Blowfish e AES 128 PARES 2010 By default 3DES Blowfish and AES 128 are enabled Hashing Algorithms Select the algorithms that are to be available for message au thentication of the SSH connection Possible options MDS e SHA e RipeMD 160 By default MD5 SHA 1 and RipeMD 160 are enabled Fields in the menu Key Status Field Value RSA Key Status Shows the status of the RSA key If an RSA key has not been generated yet Not generatedis displayed in red and a link Generate is provided If you se lect the link the generation process is triggered and the view is updated The Gen
33. icon to edit existing entries As soon as a Description is entered for the telephone and saved with OK the entry for that device is moved to the upper part of the overview To continue with configuring click the 3 symbol again Select the New button to manually set up a new IP end device Select the j button to go to the Gigaset telephone user interface administrator page This is described in the telephone user guide 6 1 1 1 General In the menu Terminals gt Gigaset Phones gt Gigaset Phones gt General you make the basic settings for an IP telephone The Terminals gt Gigaset Phones gt Gigaset Phones gt General menu consists of the fol lowing fields Fields in the menu Basic Settings Field Description Description To clearly identify the telephone in the system enter a descrip Gigaset Communications GmbH 6 Terminals Field Description tion for the telephone Phone Type Displays the type of your IP telephone Possible values O IDES IEP RIO e DE410 IP PRO e DE700 IP PRO O IDE INP RIO Location Select the location of the telephone You define locations in the VoIP gt Settings gt Locations menu Depending on the setting in this menu default behaviour for registration of VoIP sub scribers for which no location should be defined is displayed for selection Possible values e Not defined Unrestricted Registration No loc ation is defined According to set default behaviour the sub criber is
34. is set up at both sites Once these connections are available a tunnel is set up to the PPTP partner over the Internet using PPTP The PPTP subsystem sets up a control connection between the endpoints of the tunnel This is used to send control data to set up keep alive and terminate the connection between the two PPTP tunnel end points As soon as this control connection is set up the PPTP transfers the traffic data packed in GRE packets GRE Generic Routing Encapsu lation 13 3 1 PPTP Tunnels A list of all PPTP tunnels is displayed in the PPTP Tunnels menu 13 3 1 1 New Click on New to set up further PPTP partners The VPN gt PPTP gt PPTP Tunnels gt New menu consists of the following fields Fields in the PPTP Partner Parameters menu 13 VPN Gigaset Communications GmbH Field Description Description Enter a unique name for the tunnel The first character in this field must not be a number No special characters or umlauts must be used PPTP Mode Enter the role to be assigned to the PPTP interface Possible values e PNS default value this assigns the PPTP interface the role of PPTP server e Windows Client Mode This assigns the PPTP interface the role of PPTP client User Name Enter the user name Password Enter the password Always on Select whether the interface should always be activated The function is enabled with Enabled The function is disabled by default Connection Idle Timeout Only if
35. tion Only for Action Import configuration Export con figuration Export configuration with state in formation Define whether the data of the selected Action are to be encrypted The function is activated by selecting Enabled The function is disabled by default If the function is enabled you can enter the Password in the text field Filename Only for Action Import configuration Import lan guage Update system software Enter the path and name of the file or select the file with Browse via the explorer finder Source Location Only for Action Update system software Select the source of the update Possible values e Local File default value The system software file is stored locally on your PC e HTTP Server The file is stored on a remote server spe cified in the URL e Current Software from Update Server The file is 16 Maintenance Gigaset Communications GmbH Field Description on the official update server URL Only for Source Location HTTP Server Enter the URL of the update server from which the system soft ware file is loaded Current File Name in Flash For Action Export configuration Select the configuration file to be exported Include certificates and keys For Action Export configuration Export config uration with state information Define whether the selected Action should also be applied for certificates and keys The function is activated by selecting Enable
36. 5S f Ka O 4 1 4 Options In the VoIP gt Settings gt Options menu you ll find general VoIP settings The VoIP gt Settings gt Options menu consists of the following fields Fields in the Basic Settings menu Field Description RTP Port Enter the port via which the RTP data is to be transported The default value is 10000 Client Registration Here enter a default value for the time in seconds within which Timer the SIP clients must re register to prevent the connection from disconnecting automatically The default value is 60 The menu Advanced Settings consists of the following fields Fields in the Advanced Settings menu Field Description DSCP Settings for sip Select the Type of Service TOS for SIP data Traffic Field Description Possible values e DSCP Binary Value default value Differentiated Ser vices Code Point according to RFC 3260 is used to signal the priority of IP packets indicated in binary format 6 bit The default value is 101110 DSCP Decimal Value Differentiated Services Code Point according to RFC 3260 is used to signal the priority of IP packets indicated in decimal format DSCP Hexadecimal Value Differentiated Services Code Point according to RFC 3260 is used to signal the priority of IP packets indicated in hexadecimal format e TOS Binary Value The TOS value is specified in binary format e g 00111111 e TOS Decimal Value The TOS value is specified in decim a
37. Advanced Settings Field Description Gateway Select which IP address is to be transferred to the DHCP client as gateway Possible values e Use router as gateway default value Here the IP ad 15 Local Services Gigaset Communications GmbH Field Description dress defined for the Interface is transferred e No gateway No IP address is sent e Specify Enter the corresponding IP address Lease Time Enter the length of time in minutes for which an address from the pool is to be assigned to a host After the Lease Time expires the address can be reassigned by the server The default value is 120 DHCP Options Specify which additional data is forwarded to the DHCP client Possible values for Option e Time Server default value Enter the IP address of the time server to be sent to the client e DNS Server Enter the IP address of the DNS server to be sent to the client DNS Domain Name Enter the DNS domain to be sent to the client WINS NBNS Server Enter the IP address of the WINS NBNS server to be sent to the client WINS NBT Node Type Select the type of the WINS NBT node to be sent to the client e TFTP Server Enter the IP address of the TFTP server to be sent to the client e CAPWAP Controller Enter the IP address of the CAP WAP controller to be sent to the client e URL provisioning server This option enables you to send a client any URL Use this option to send querying IP1x0
38. Advanced Settings consists of the following fields Fields in the Advanced Settings menu Field Description Type of Number Select the number type for outgoing calls Possible values e System Setting The standard system setting country setting is used e Unknown Select this setting if the number type unknown is to be signalled e Subscriber This is an extension number e National This is a national number area code extension number Call Hold inside the Select whether a telephone call is to be put on hold in the sys PBX system tem without losing the connection The function is activated by selecting Enabled The function is disabled by default 5 1 2 Trunk Numbers In the menu Numbering gt Trunk Settings gt Trunk Numbers you assign the external numbers and the name indicated in a system telephone display to the external connec tions you ve defined An external connection can be configured as a point to multipoint or point to point con nection in the process the connection description is defined The intended port name is then assigned to this connection The port name Description can be defined under Physical Interfaces gt ISDN Ports gt ISDN External for the module connection Gigaset Communications GmbH 5 Numbering External numbers at the point to point connection For a point to point connection you receive a PBX number together with a 1 2 3 or 4 character extension number range This exten
39. Alive Check Select whether and how IPSec heartbeats are used A bintec elmeg IPSec heartbeat is implemented to determine whether or not a Security Association SA is still valid This function sends and receives signals every 5 seconds depend ing on the configuration If these signals are not received after 20 seconds the SA is discarded as invalid Possible values e Autodetect default value Automatic detection of whether the remote terminal is a bintec elmeg device If it is Heart beats Send amp Expect for a remote terminal with bintec elmeg or Inactive for a remote terminal without bintec el meg is set e Inactive Your device sends and expects no heartbeat Set this option if you use devices from other manufacturers e Heartbeats Expect only Your device expects a heartbeat from the peer but does not send one itself e Send Your device expects no heartbeat from the peer but sends one itself e Heartbeats Send amp Expect Your device expects a heartbeat from the peer and sends one itself Propagate PMTU Select whether the PMTU Path Maximum Transfer Unit is to be propagated during phase 2 The function is enabled with Enabled The function is enabled by default Gigaset Communications GmbH 13 VPN 13 1 4 XAUTH Profiles In the XAUTH Profiles menu a list of all XAUTH profiles is displayed Extended Authentication for IPSec XAuth is an additional authentication method for IPSec tunnel users T
40. Always on is disabled Enter the idle interval in seconds This determines how many seconds should pass between sending the last traffic data packet and clearing the connection Possible values are 0 to 3600 seconds 0 deactivates the timeout The default value is 300 Example 10 for FTP transmission 20 for LAN to LAN trans mission 90 for Internet connections Remote PPTP IP Ad dress Only for PPTP Mode PNS Enter the IP address of the PPTP partner Remote PPTP IP Ad dressHost Name Only for PPTP Mode Windows Client Mode Enter the IP address of the PPTP partner Gigaset Communications GmbH 13 VPN Fields in the IP Mode and Routes menu Field Description IP Address Mode Select whether your device is to be assigned a static IP ad dress or whether it should be assigned this dynamically Possible values e Static default value You enter a static IP address e Provide IP Address Only for PPTP Mode PNS Your device dynamically assigns an IP address to the remote ter minal e Get IP Address Only for PPTP Mode Windows Cli ent Mode Your device is dynamically assigned an IP ad dress Default Route Only if IP Address Mode Static Select whether the route to this connection partner is to be defined as the default route The function is enabled with Enabled The function is disabled by default Create NAT Policy Only if IP Address Mode Static When you configure an PPTP connection speci
41. Automatic Refresh Interval do not enter a value of less than 5 seconds otherwise the refresh interval of the screen will be too short to make further changes The menu System Management gt Status consists of the following fields Fields in the System Information menu Field Value Uptime Displays the time past since the device was rebooted System Date Displays the current system date and system time Serial Number Displays the device serial number BOSS Version Displays the currently loaded version of the system software Back up of configura Indicates whether a backup configuration is available on the Gigaset Communications GmbH 2 System Management Field Value tion on SD card SD card or not Last configuration stored Displays day date and time of the last saved configuration boot configuration in flash Night Mode Status Indicates whether your device is in the normal mode Off or in night mode On Fields in the Resource Information menu Field Value CPU Usage Displays the CPU usage as a percentage Memory Usage Displays the usage of the working memory in MByte in relation to the available total working memory in MByte The usage is also displayed in brackets as a percentage Memory Card Shows the status of any optional external memory card that has been inserted and the size of the memory in GBytes or MBytes Active Sessions SIF Displays the total of all SIF TDRC and IP load balancing ses RTP etc
42. Behavior 69 Default MSN 56 Default Idle Timeout 360 Default User Password 31 Delete 192 Delete SIP bindings after Restart 65 Delete Phonebook 156 Delete call data records 159 Delete complete IPSec configuration 279 Description 38 42 50 54 57 61 69 72 76 81 83 91 106 116 120 123 126 127 130 131 133 136 138 139 142 144 145 149 151 153 161 166 169 177 189 195 201 203 209 214 218 233 237 241 253 258 266 273 277 283 286 291 299 309 310 Index 310 311 313 318 332 336 340 362 365 375 391 391 393 394 Description Connection Information Link 4 Destination 304 Destination Interface 229 Destination Port 189 258 Destination Port Range 196 201 214 362 Destination File Name 370 Destination IP Address 336 340 354 Destination IP Address Netmask 188 196 201 214 258 362 Destination IP Address 192 Destination Port Range 311 Details 391 DH Group 266 DHCP Hostname 181 DHCP Options 329 DHCP Configuration 328 DHCP Broadcast Flag 181 DHCP Client on Interface 220 DHCP MAC Address 181 DHCP Relay Settings 332 DHCP Server 327 Diagnostics 368 Dial Control 93 Dial Control 135 Dial End Monitoring Time 65 Dial Tone Detection 59 Dial Tone Pause 59 Dialling Authorization 91 Dialling Method 58 Dialling Method 57 Direct Call 16 388 Direct Call 132 Direct Call Number 133 Direction
43. Communications GmbH Field Description The function is enabled with Enabled The function is disabled by default Send Certificate Re Select whether certificate requests are to be sent during IKE quest Payloads phase 1 The function is enabled with Enabled The function is enabled by default Send Certificate Select whether complete certificate chains are to be sent dur Chains ing IKE phase 1 The function is enabled with Enabled The function is enabled by default Deactivate this function if you do not wish to send the peer the certificates of all levels from your level to the CA level Send CRLs Select whether CRLs are to be sent during IKE phase 1 The function is enabled with Enabled The function is disabled by default Send Key Hash Pay Select whether key hash payloads are to be sent during IKE loads phase 1 In the default setting the public key hash of the remote end is sent together with the other authentication data Only applies for RSA encryption Activate this function with Enabled to sup press this behaviour 13 2 L2TP The layer 2 tunnel protocol L2TP enables PPP connections to be tunnelled via a UDP connection Your bintec elmeg device supports the following two modes e L2TP LNS Mode L2TP Network Server for incoming connections only e L2TP LAC Mode L2TP Access Concentrator for outgoing connections only Gigaset Communications GmbH 13 VPN Note the following when configuri
44. Communications GmbH Field Description bers configured in the Numbering gt User Settings gt User menu Voice Mail Language Select the desired language for the voicemail box announce ments Possible values e Deutsch The voicemail box uses German texts e Dutch The voicemail box uses Dutch texts e English The voicemail boxe uses English texts e Italian The voicemail box uses Italian texts e French The voicemail box uses French texts e Default default value The voicemail box uses the lan guage centrally defined for the entire voicemail system in the Applications gt Voice Mail gt General menu C Note You ll only require a setting that departs from De fault if you wish to operate voicemail boxes with various languages within your voicemail sys tem E Mail Address from Here is displayed the user e mail address to which a notifica User Settings tion shall be sent if a message has been left on the voicemail box The e mail address in saved in the Numbering gt User Settings gt User gt Basic Settings menu E Mail Notification Once a message has been left on the voicemail box the sub scriber can be notified Possible values None default value The subscriber is not notified e E Mail The subscriber is informed of a present message via e mail e E Mail with Attachment Once a caller has left a mes sage the subscriber receives an e mail with a recording of the message in the attachment G
45. Deutsch default value e Dutch e English O iealalara e French Diverging from the language set here a language can be indi vidually set for each voice mail box in the Applications gt Voice Mail gt Voice Mail Boxes gt New menu Fields in the menu Mail Settings Field Description SMTP Server Enter the address IP address or valid DNS name of the e mail server to be used for sending the e mails SMTP Server Port Enter the port to be used for sending e mails The default value is 25 Return Address Enter any address to be used as sender when sending e mails This address merely serves to identify e mails in the inbox SMTP User Name Enter the user name for the SMTP server SMTP Password Enter the password for the SNMP server user The menu Advanced Settings consists of the following fields Fields in the menu Advanced Settings Field Description Lifetime Voicemail messages are deleted after an adjustable period of time Possible values are 10 to 60 days The default value is 60 Gigaset Communications GmbH 9 LAN Chapter 9 LAN In this menu you configure the addresses in your LAN and can structure your local net work using VLANs 9 1 IP Configuration In this menu you can edit the IP configuration of the LAN and Ethernet interfaces of your device 9 1 1 Interfaces The existing IP interfaces are listed in the LAN gt IP Configuration gt Interfaces menu You can edit the IP configuration of
46. Entry of client port numbers 32768 65535 e Not privileged Entry of unprivileged port numbers 1024 65535 Enter the appropriate values for the individual port or start port of a range in Port and for a range the end port in to Port DSCP TOS Value Select the Type of Service TOS Possible values e Ignore default value The type of service is ignored DSCP Binary Value Differentiated Services Code Point according to RFC 3260 is used to signal the priority of IP packets indicated in binary format e DSCP Decimal Value Differentiated Services Code Point according to RFC 3260 is used to signal the priority of IP packets indicated in decimal format Gigaset Communications GmbH 10 Networking Field Description DSCP Hexadecimal Value Differentiated Services Code Point according to RFC 3260 is used to signal the priority of IP packets indicated in hexadecimal format e TOS Binary Value The TOS value is specified in binary format e g 00111111 e TOS Decimal Value The TOS value is specified in decim al format e g 63 e TOS Hexadecimal Value The TOS value is specified in hexadecimal format e g 3F Enter the relevant value for DSCP Binary Value DSCP Decimal Value DSCP Hexadecimal Value TOS Bin ary Value TOS Decimal Value and TOS Hexadecimal Value Mode Select when the interface defined in Route Parameters gt In terface is to be used Possible values e Dialup and wait def
47. For every subscriber who has ended a call a Post processing time is configured during which he receives no more calls Calls received by the subscriber on his number rather than via the team and self initiated calls are not included in the time cal culation The default value is 60 seconds the range 0 999 seconds 5 3 1 2 Variant 1 4 In the Numbering gt Groups Teams gt Teams gt Variant 1 4 you configure a team s four call variants You can create up to four different call options for each team For this as sign either an internal or external number to the call option and define how an incoming call should be signalled within the team Internal numbers of a team Under Internal Assignment select the internal subscribers who are to belong to this 5 Numbering Gigaset Communications GmbH team If you wish to temporarily exclude a team subscribers from call signalling e g team subscriber is on holiday you can Logout the subscriber Team calls are not signalled to logged out subscribers Every team subscriber can also control login and logout himself via a system code For internal team calls a team number and team name can be assigned to the team in the configuration If a team number is dialled the caller sees the team name until a team subscriber accepts the call The name of the team subscriber is then displayed A call to a team can be simultaneous linear rotating setting up or parallel after time With linea
48. ISDN i e with every existing external connection the date and time are taken from the ISDN The date and time can also be entered manually e g if time and date are not sent in the ISDN or no time server is provided The time re mains for approx 3 hours after the system s power supply is switched off Gigaset Communications GmbH 2 System Management The clock switches from summer to winter time and back automatically This is inde pendent of the exchange time or the ntp server time Summer time starts on the last Sunday in March by switching from 2 a m to 3 a m The calendar related or schedule re lated switches that are scheduled for the missing hour are then carried out Winter time starts on the last Sunday in October by switching from 3 a m to 2 a m The calendar re lated or schedule related switches that are scheduled for the additional hour are then car ried out Time server You can obtain the system time automatically e g using various time servers To ensure that the device uses the desired current time you should configure one or more time serv ers S Note If a method for automatically deriving the time is defined on the device the values obtained in this way automatically have higher priority A manually entered system time is therefore overwritten The menu System Management gt Global Settings gt Date and Time consists of the fol lowing fields Fields in the Basic Settings menu Field Description Time Z
49. Interface Mode Bridge Groups 21 Interface Selection 220 Interfaces 23 51 69 179 203 309 353 355 381 393 Interfaces Provider 138 Internal Assignment 82 108 167 171 Internal Number 86 88 105 106 113 118 122 127 134 161 163 165 169 173 Internal Numbers 86 124 126 131 Internal Number 173 177 377 Internal Numbers 131 Internal Log 390 Internal Number and Rerouting Settings 114 Internal Time Server 14 International Prefix Country Code 7 Gigaset Communications GmbH Internet Dialup 230 Internet Key Exchange 253 Interval 336 340 351 354 Invalid DNS Packets 322 IP Compression 275 IP Accounting 381 IP Configuration 179 IP Address 320 332 380 387 395 IP Address Assignment 255 IP Address Mode 234 238 242 287 293 IP Address Range 249 279 293 298 328 IP Address Netmask 180 IP Address Netmask 394 IP Assignment Pool 242 255 IP Assignment Pool IPCP 287 293 IP Pool Name 249 279 298 328 329 IP Pool Configuration 327 IP Pools 248 278 298 IP MAC Binding 120 IP MAC Binding 331 IPSec 251 390 IPSec Phase 2 393 IPSec Tunnels 392 IPSec Statistics 392 IPSec Tunnels 391 IPSec Phase 2 SAs 391 IPSec Debug Level 279 IPSec over TCP 280 IPSec Peers 252 IPv4 Route Configuration 186 IPv4 Routing Table 191 ISDN 126 241 ISDN Synchronisation 55 ISDN External 54 ISDN Internal 55 ISDN Login 24 ISDN Ports 53 K K
50. Protocol Header Offset 0 Select the encryption method used for the IPSec connection The encryption algorithm determines the length of the block cipher which is taken into account during bandwidth calcula tion Possible values ODES SIS Bileyntisia Case eljplnar DIOC size 64 Bit e AES128 AES192 AES256 Twofish cipher block size 128 Bit Real Time Jitter Con Only for Traffic shaping enabled trol Real Time Jitter Control optimises latency when forwarding real time datagrams The function ensures that large data packets are fragmented according to the available upload bandwidth Real Time Jitter Control is useful for small upload bandwidths lt 800 kbps Activate or deactivate Real Time Jitter Control Gigaset Communications GmbH 10 Networking Field Description The function is enabled with Enabled The function is disabled by default Control Mode Only for Real Time Jitter Control enabled Select the mode for optimising voice transmission Possible values e All RTP Streams All RTP streams are optimised The function activates the RTP stream detection mechanism for the automatic detection of RTP streams In this mode the Real Time Jitter Control is activated as soon as an RTP stream has been detected e Inactive Voice data transmission is not optimised e Controlled RTP Streams only This mode is used if either the VoIP Application Layer Gateway ALG or the VoIP Media Gateway MGW
51. Protocol Unreachable e Port Unreachable e Fragmentation Needed e Communication with Destination Network is Ad ministratively Prohibited e Communication with Destination Host is Admin istratively Prohibited 14 4 2 Groups A list of all configured service groups is displayed in the Firewall gt Services gt Groups menu You can group together services This makes it easier to configure firewall rules 14 4 2 1 New Choose the New button to set up additional service groups The menu Firewall gt Services gt Groups gt New consists of the following fields Fields in the Basic Parameters menu Field Description Description Enter the desired description of the service group Members Select the members of the group from the available service ali ases To do this activate the Fields in the Selection column hybird 120 Gigaset Edition 15 Local Services Gigaset Communications GmbH Chapter 15 Local Services This menu offers services for the following application areas e Name resolution DNS e Configuration via web browser HTTPS e Locating of dynamic IP addresses using a DynDNS provider e Configuration of gateway as a DHCP server assignment of IP addresses e Access restriction on the Internet web filter e Assignment of incoming and outgoing data and voice calls to authorised users CAPI server e Automation of tasks according to schedule scheduling e Alive checks for hosts or interfaces ping tests
52. Pulses 129 Transport Protocol 63 64 124 Trials 336 354 Trigger 335 353 Trigger Status 340 Trunk 79 113 115 Trunk Numbers 78 Trunk Settings 76 Trunk Group Selection 20 Trunk Groups 81 Trunk Line Selection with Line Access Number 91 Trunks 76 TTL 320 Tunnel Profile 286 Tunnel Profiles 283 Tx Bytes 393 394 Tx Errors 393 Gigaset Communications GmbH Tx Packets 393 394 Type 69 201 214 311 362 393 Type of Messages 380 Type of Number 78 79 Type of Rerouting Application 149 Type of traffic 195 Type of Call Forwarding 134 Type of Rerouting Function 145 U UDP Inactivity 308 UDP Destination Port 284 UDP Destination Port 291 UDP Port 32 UDP Source Port 284 UDP Source Port Selection 291 Unchanged for 393 Unsuccessful Trials 351 Update Interval 326 Update Path 326 Update enabled 375 Update immediately 375 UPnP 355 UPnP Status 356 UPnP TCP Port 356 Upstream Bandwidth Limitation 69 Upstreaming Device with NAT 65 Uptime 2 URL 370 URL SCEP Server URL 340 Usage 56 59 Usage Type 244 Use CRL 340 Use global rerouting 96 Use PFS Group 273 Use settings from 142 143 Use Zero Cookies 280 User 40 118 122 157 157 163 173 176 333 User Settings 83 User must change password 40 User Name 61 89 233 237 241 286 291 324 333 385 395 Users 40 83 277 286 388 Users assigned Users logged on Vv Variant 107 149 171 Variant1 4 161 Vendor Mode 31 V
53. RFC 3260 is used to signal the priority of IP packets indicated in hexadecimal format e TOS Binary Value The TOS value is specified in binary format e g 00111111 e TOS Decimal Value The TOS value is specified in decim al format e g 63 e TOS Hexadecimal Value The TOS value is specified in hexadecimal format e g 3F Set COS value 802 1p Layer 2 Here you can set change the service class Layer 2 priority in the VLAN Ethernet header of the IP packets based on the class Class ID that has been defined Possible values are whole numbers between 0 and 7 The default value is Preserve Interfaces Only for Class map New 10 Networking Gigaset Communications GmbH Field Description When creating a new class plan select the interfaces to which you want to link the class plan A class plan can be assigned to multiple interfaces 10 3 3 QoS Interfaces Policies In the Networking gt QoS gt QoS Interfaces Policies menu you set prioritisation of data C Note Data can only be prioritized in the outgoing direction Packets in the high priority class always take priority over data with class IDs 1 254 It is possible to assign or guarantee each queue and thus each data class a certain part of the total bandwidth of the interface In addition you can optimise the transmission of voice data real time data Depending on the respective interface a queue is created automatically for each class but only
54. SOA Baas Po a AL 309 Groups 23 Ep A y hates Oe CoP Ba aCe Bae a DH 309 Addresses ceia 2 ep eR ag ee sch a o ee ee Gow 309 Address Listo 3 6 ot ae tee ack woke es Gum wee et a ws 309 GIOUDS cece hace SORE Bb ad ip ee ay OS Ae gory See e 310 SERVIGES 2 S428 2 ate diy a is TA a DOA hi 311 Se rviceList 3 5 2 2 04 oS ek do de e ts be ia Ad 311 Group Se dior o er he ew ene ah Se to oh Gere Be ie Gn Be 313 Local Services 314 DNS sr Bye A ts A oe A 314 Global Settings o o 316 DNSS8rvers ia a a ae ah ae 318 Static HOStS E nat A A A E ere Th E 319 Domain Forwarding 2 a a 320 Cache 2 002 ye Sis Ge RT A A oe EI A o 322 15 1 6 Statistics si doen o Sern bela dt A oe 322 15 2 HTTPS 2k e a ete eee the Wee Bl Ae ee hag eee a da 323 15 2 1 HTTPS SENER oe hee does a a Sh Se A ee ee 323 15 3 DynDNS Clients 22 00 Ge he ge GE Re RM EG Ee 324 15 3 1 DynDNS Update 2 2 a 324 15 3 2 DynDNS Provider o o o 326 15 4 DHCP Server 2 2 a 327 15 4 1 IP Pool Configuration 2 o e 327 15 4 2 DHCP Configuration 2 2 0 e o 328 15 4 3 IP MAG Binding se us GF A a ee e a E 331 15 4 4 DHCP Relay Settings a 0 332 15 5 CAPI Server o 2 ia soia e dr o pda e eee 333 15 5 1 TI A A AA goss aa oe 333 15 5 2 Options e A da aa do wae AL ar den se 334 15 6 Sehed ling
55. Save incoming calls Select which incoming connections should be saved Possible values e None default value o All e With Project Code only Privacy Number Trun Select whether to save the number in abbreviated form cation If for data privacy reasons the number is to be only partially Gigaset Communications GmbH 8 Applications Field Description displayed you can select the number of positions not to be dis played here For Outgoing Calls and for Incoming Calls you can separately enter the number of hidden digits The hiding of digits occurs from right to left Possible values e No default value o All SAO Transfer call data re Select whether to export call data records over the serial inter cords via Serial 2 face Serial 2 after each call which enables you to connect an external charge metering software solution hotel application The function is activated by selecting Enabled The function is disabled by default Fields in the Actions menu Field Description Export call data re If you wish to save the current connection data record in an ex cords ternal file click Export and save the file under the desired stor age location and file name Delete call data re If you wish to delete the current connection data record from cords the system storage click Delete 8 6 Mini Call Center The mini call centre is an integrated call centre solution for up to 16 agents It provides the ideal solution
56. Scheduling gt Trigger menu displays all the event lists that have been configured Every event list contains at least one event which is intended to be the initiator for an action 15 Local Services 15 6 1 1 New Gigaset Communications GmbH Choose the New button to create more event lists The menu Local Services gt Scheduling gt Trigger gt New consists of the following fields Fields in the menu Basic Parameters Field Description Event List Description Event Type You can create a new event list with New default value You give this list a name with Description You use the remaining parameters to create the first event in the list If you want to add to an existing event list select the event list you want and add at least one more event to it You can use event lists to create complex conditions for initiat ing an action The events are processed in the same order in which they are created in the list Only for Event List New Enter your chosen designation for the event list Select the type of event Possible values e Time default value The operations configured and as signed in Actions are initiated at specific points in time e MIB SNMP The actions configured and assigned in Actions are initiated when the defined MIB variables assumes the as signed values e Interface Status Operations configured and assigned in Actions are initiated when the defined interfaces take on a specified sta
57. Settings 2 a a 377 16 4 Reboot aou a od Ea ol a oe A e aE 378 16 4 1 System Reboot ooa a 378 Chapter 17 External Reporting a 379 17 1 Syslog e le e Se a and ag ge a a we ee e 379 17 1 1 Syslog Servers cs ge y ei Pa E a E te A 379 17 2 IP ACCOUNTING vo tec Vee e a ee ee a he 381 17 2 1 Interfaces n on t ee cr e pan Beane 4 381 17 2 2 Options p sios ss we ee a ee d ee ha oe Seg 382 17 3 Alert S Ivicess s ne wks SRO a ae oe a Dar oe ae N 383 17 3 1 AlertRecipient 2 383 173 2 Alert Settings d 384 174 SNMP iaa aa A oe a ee A 386 17 4 1 SNMP Trap Options 2 o eo o 386 17 4 2 SNMP Trap Hosts 2 2 o 387 hybird 120 Gigaset Edition Chapter 18 Monitoring o o ee e 388 18 1 Status Information 2 0 eo o 388 18 1 1 USCIS as se Bir A egos es BBs by pa 25 TAME pee Me aha a 388 18 1 2 Teams A Geo eRe ate he A lt b REE ee SR ESS i 389 18 2 Internalilog e ao de ala e ta ety arash alee cat oa die tan Stal ety arash bd 390 18 2 1 System Messages e e 390 18 3 PSEcU koe ie a a A Ee hie Eee 390 18 3 1 IPSec Tunnels a a o Bele ee a ee wie 391 18 3 2 IPSec Statistics o vee oe YO Ss a Oe 392 18 4 Interfaces paeo 62 tee a a ae ge OP ee A ee 393 18 4 1 A a ae E A 393 18 5 HotSpot Gateway 2 o 395 18 5 1 HotSpot Gateway 2 o o 395 18 6 QOS Stated fen
58. Settings menu consists of the following fields Fields in the menu Time Settings for System Phone Firmware Update Field Description Internal Number For ISDN system telephones only Enter the number of the hybird update server that you wish to call from the telephone if the system software update fails In this case you can perform the update from the telephone This number is automatically sent to the system telephone when the telephone logs into the hybird Field Description When it has been sent the number is displayed on the tele phone under Menu gt Service gt Software Updaie If you press the OK button the number is available in redial Firmware Update Set a period for updating the system software To do this se lect the Start Time and the Stop Time 16 4 Reboot 16 4 1 System Reboot In this menu you can trigger an immediate reboot of your device Once your system has restarted you must call the GUI again and log in Pay attention to the LEDs on your device For information on the meaning of the LEDs see the Technical Data chapter of the manual C Note Before a reboot make sure you confirm your configuration changes by click ing the Save configuration button so that these are not lost when you re boot If you wish to restart your device click the OK button The device will reboot hybird 120 Gigaset Edition Gigaset Communications GmbH 17 External Reporting Chapter 17 External Reporting In th
59. The new SAs are negotiated shortly before expiry of the cur rent SAs As for RFC 2407 the default value is eight hours which means the key must be renewed once eight hours have elapsed The following options are available for defining the Lifetime e Input in Seconds Enter the lifetime for phase 2 key in seconds The value can be a whole number from 0 to 2147483647 The default value is 7200 e Input in kBytes Enter the lifetime for phase 2 keys as amount of data processed in Kbytes The value can be a whole number from 0 to 2147483647 The default value is 0 Rekey after Specify the percentage in the course of the life time at which the phase 2 keys are to be regenerated The percentage entered is applied to both the lifetime in seconds and the lifetime in Kbytes The default value is 80 The menu Advanced Settings consists of the following fields Fields in the Advanced Settings menu 13 VPN Gigaset Communications GmbH Field Description IP Compression Select whether compression is to be activated before data en cryption If data is compressed effectively this can result in higher performance and a lower volume of data to be trans ferred In the case of fast lines or data that cannot be com pressed you are advised against using this option as the per formance can be significantly affected by the increased effort during compression The function is enabled with Enabled The function is disabled by default
60. Type Ping Test Enter the IP address whose accessibility is to be checked Source IP Address Only if Command Type Ping Test Enter an IP address to be used as sender address for the ping test Possible values e Automatic default value The IP address of the interface over which the ping is sent is automatically entered as sender address e Specific Enter the desired IP address in the input field Interval Only if Command Type Ping Test Enter the time in Seconds after which a ping must be resent The default value is 1 second Count Only if Command Type Ping Test Enter the number of ping tests to be performed until Destina tion IP Address is considered unreachable The default value is 3 Server Address Only where Command Type Certificate Management and Action Import certificate Enter the URL of the server from which a certificate file is to be retrieved Local Certificate De scription Where Command Type Certificate Management and Action Import certificate Enter a description for the certificate under which to save it on 15 Local Services Gigaset Communications GmbH Field Description the device Where Command Type Certificate Management and Action Delete certificate Select the certificate to be deleted Password for protec ted Certificate Only where Command Type Certificate Management and Action Import certificate Select whether to use a secure certificate req
61. VLANs gt Administration menu consists of the following fields Fields in the Bridge Group br lt ID gt VLAN Options menu Field Description Enable VLAN Enable or disable the specified bridge group for VLAN The function is enabled with Enabled The function is not activated by default Management VID Select the VLAN ID of the VLAN in which your device is to op erate hybird 120 Gigaset Edition 10 Networking Gigaset Communications GmbH Chapter 10 Networking 10 1 Routes Default Route With a default route all data is automatically forwarded to one connection if no other suit able route is available If you set up access to the Internet you must configure the route to your Internet Service Provider ISP as a default route If for example you configure a corporate network connection only enter the route to the head office or branch office as a default route if you do not configure Internet access over your device If for example you configure both Internet access and a corporate network connection enter a default route to the ISP and a network route to the head office You can enter several default routes on your device but only one default route can be active at any one time If you enter several default routes you should thus note differing values for Metric 10 1 1 IPv4 Route Configuration A list of all configured routes is displayed in the Network gt Routes gt IPv4 Route Config uration menu 10 1 1 1 E
62. account Possible values hybird 120 Gigaset Edition 10 Networking Gigaset Communications GmbH Field Description e Any default value All TCP packets match the filter e Established All TCP packets that would not open any new TCP connection on routing over the gateway match the filter Destination IP Ad dress Netmask Enter the destination IP address and netmask of the data pack ets Possible values e Any default value e Host Enter the IP address of the host e Network Enter the network address and the related net mask Destination Port Range Only if Protocol TCP UDP Enter a destination port number or a range of destination port numbers that matches the filter Possible values e A11 default value The filter is valid for all port numbers e Specify port Enables the entry of a port number e Specify port range Enables the entry of a range of port numbers Source IP Address Enter the source IP address and netmask of the data packets Netmask Source Port Range Only if Protocol TCP UDP Enter a source port number or the range of source port num bers Possible values e A11 default value The filter is valid for all port numbers e Specify port Enables the entry of a port number e Specify port range Enables the entry of a range of port numbers DSCP TOS Filter Layer 3 Select the Type of Service TOS Gigaset Communications GmbH 10 Networking Field Descri
63. and saved but not executed by the system 8 2 Rerouting In the Applications gt Rerouting menu you configure how incoming calls should be handled by default in the system 8 2 1 Rerouting Functions In the Applications gt Rerouting gt Rerouting Functions menu you can set up various re direct options for Immediately On Busy On No Reply or On Busy and On No Reply You then assign these redirect options to the external connections in the Numbering gt Call Distribution gt Incoming Distribution menu 8 2 1 1 Edit or New Choose the E icon to edit existing entries Select the New button to create new redirect options The Applications gt Rerouting gt Rerouting Functions gt New menu consists of the fol lowing fields Fields in the Basic Settings menu Field Description Description Enter a description for the redirect function Type of Rerouting Select the desired exchange function Function Possible values Immediately default value O Ora Ibis e On No Reply e On Busy and On No Reply 8 Applications Gigaset Communications GmbH Fields in the On Busy Settings menu Field Description Size of Queue Only for Type of Rerouting Function On Busy or On Busy and On No Reply In this field you can configure the maximum number of sub scribers on hold The queue may include up to 10 subscribers Additional callers get a busy tone Possible values are 0 no queue to 10 The default value is 0 Take Wa
64. as source interface and source IP address as well as protocol source and des tination port type of service TOS and the status of the device interface Fields in the menu Route Parameters Field Description Local IP Address Only for Route Type Default Route via Interface Host Route via Interfaceor Network Route via Interface Enter the IP address of the host to which your device is to for ward the IP packets Destination IP Ad Only for Route Type Host Route via Interface or Net dress Netmask work Route via Interface Enter the IP address of the destination host or destination net work When Route Type Network Route via Interface Also enter the relevant netmask in the second field Gigaset Communications GmbH 10 Networking Field Description Gateway IP Address Only for Route Type Default Route via Gateway Host Route via Gateway or Network Route via Gateway Enter the IP address of the gateway to which your device is to forward the IP packets Metric Select the priority of the route The lower the value the higher the priority of the route Value range from 0 to 15 The default value is 1 Fields in the menu Extended Route Parameters Field Description Description Enter a description for the IP route Source Interface Select the interface over which the data packets are to reach the device The default value is None Source IP Address Enter the IP address and netmask of the source host or
65. at your head office If the data you entered on your device is the same as the caller s data the call is accepted The call is rejected if the data is not the same Callback The callback mechanism can be used for every connection over an ISDN or over an AUX interface to obtain additional security regarding the connection partner or to clearly alloc ate the costs of connections A connection is not set up until the calling party has been clearly identified by calling back Your device can answer an incoming call with a callback or request a callback from a connection partner Identification can be based on the calling party number or PAP CHAP MS CHAP authentication Identification is made in the former case without call acceptance as the calling party number is transferred over the ISDN D channel and in the latter case with call acceptance Channel Bundling Your device supports dynamic and static channel bundling for dialup connections Chan nel bundling can only be used for ISDN connections for a bandwidth increase or as a backup Only one B channel is initially opened when a connection is set up Dynamic Dynamic channel bundling means that your device connects other ISDN B channels to in crease the throughput for connections if this is required e g for large data rates If the amount of data traffic drops the additional B channels are closed again If devices from other manufacturers are to be used at the far end ensure that thes
66. automatically sent Source IP Address Enter the source IP address of the outgoing ICMP echo re quest packets Possible values e Automatic The IP address is determined automatically e Specific default value Enter the IP address in the adja cent input field e g to test a particular extended route Interval Enter the interval in seconds during which the ping is sent to the address specified in Remote IP Address Possible values are 1 to 65536 The default value is 10 Gigaset Communications GmbH 15 Local Services Field Description Trials Enter the number of ping tests to be performed until Destina tion IP Address as Unreacheable applies The default value is 3 15 8 UPnP Universal Plug and Play UPnP makes it possible to use current messenger services e g real time video audio conferencing as peer to peer communication where one of the peers lies behind a NAT enabled gateway UPnP enables mostly Windows based operating systems to take control of other devices with UPnP functionality on the local network These include gateways access points and print servers No special device drivers are needed as known common proto cols are used such as TCP IP HTTP and XML Your gateway makes it possible to use the subsystem of the Internet Gateway Device IGD from the UPnP function range In a network behind a NAT enabled gateway the UPnP configured computers act as LAN UPnP clients To do this the UPnP function
67. book with all of its entries enable the option Delete You will then be asked for confirmation Do you really want to delete all entries of the phonebook Confirm your entry by clicking OK 8 5 Call Data Records In the Applications gt Call Data Records menu you configure the recording of incoming and outgoing calls The capture of call data records provides an overview of the telephone usage in your company All external calls can be saved in the device in the form of call data records These data records contain important information about the individual calls You must enable recording of connection data in the Numbering gt User Settings gt Class of Services gt Applications menu The function is not activated in the ex works state 8 5 1 Outgoing The Applications gt Call Data Records gt Outgoing menu contains information that per mits the monitoring of outgoing activities The Applications gt Call Data Records gt Outgoing menu consists of the following fields Gigaset Communications GmbH 8 Applications Fields in the Outgoing menu Field Description Date Displays the connection date Time Displays the time at call start Duration Displays the duration of the connection User Displays the user who called Int No Displays the user s internal number Called Number Displays the dialled number Project Code Displays the call project number if any Interface Displays the interface over which the external conne
68. caller s number can be displayed if an entry exists in the sys tem telephone book The function is activated by selecting Enabled The function is enabled by default Show incoming wait Only for Show incoming Number CLIP Enabled ing Number CLIP off Hook Select whether the number of a caller waiting during an exist ing call shall be displayed The function is activated by selecting Enabled The function is enabled by default Fields in the Further Settings menu Field Description Show new Messages Only for Show incoming Number CLIP Enabled MWI Select whether new messages shall be signalled on a voice mail system The function is activated by selecting Enabled The function is enabled by default 6 Terminals Gigaset Communications GmbH Field Description Transmit Charges Select whether the system shall generate charge pulses for the Pulses terminal from the ISDN network charge information For this purpose you can define the charge impulse at 12 kHz or 16 kHz Possible values e off Charge information from the ISDN network is not trans mitted e 12 kHz o 16 l FXS Ringing Fre Call signalling in analogue terminals occurs by configuring a quency call switching voltage at the called analogue connections This call switching voltage is converted into a specific ring tone by the analogue terminal In the system for the analogue connec tions you can set a call switching voltage with a frequency of ZS
69. can be reached via Ethernet If in doubt carry out the configuration using a serial connection via the Serial 1 interface ETH1 ETH4 The interfaces can be used separately They are logically separated from each other each separated port is assigned the desired logical Ethernet interface in the Ethernet In terface Selection field of the Port Configuration menu For each assigned Ethernet in terface another interface is displayed in the list in the LAN gt IP Configuration menu and the interface can be confugred completely independently ETH5 By default the logical Ethernet interface en 1 4 is assigned to the ETH5 port The config uration options are the same as those for the ports ETH1 ETH4 VLANs for Routing Interfaces Configure VLANs to separate individual network segments from each other for example e g individual departments of a company or to reserve bandwidth for individual VLANs 3 Physical Interfaces Gigaset Communications GmbH when managed switches are used with the QoS function 3 1 1 Port Configuration Port Separation Your device makes it possible to run the switch ports as one interface or to logically sep arate these from each other and to configure them as independent Ethernet interfaces During configuration please note the following The splitting of the switch ports into sever al Ethernet interfaces merely logically separates these from each other The available total bandwidth of max 1000 mbps
70. can configure VLANs on your device The wireless ports of an access point in particular are able to re move the VLAN tag of a frame sent to the clients and to tag received frames with a pre defined VLAN ID This functionality makes an access point nothing less than a VLAN compliant switch with the enhancement of grouping clients into VLAN groups In general VLAN segmenting can be configured with all interfaces VLAN for Bridging and VLAN for Routing In the LAN gt VLAN menu VLANs virtual LANs are configured with interfaces that oper ate in Bridging mode Using the VLAN menu you can make all the settings needed for this and query their status fl Caution For interfaces that operate in Routing mode you only assign a VLAN ID to the interface You define this via the parameters Interface Mode Tagged VLAN and field VLAN ID in menu LAN gt IP Configuration gt Interfaces gt New 9 2 1 VLANs In this menu you can display all the VLANs already configured edit your settings and cre ate new VLANs By default the Management VLAN is available to which all interfaces are assigned 9 2 1 1 Edit or New Choose the E icon to edit existing entries Select the New button in order to create new VLANs The LAN gt VLAN gt VLANs gt New menu consists of the following fields Fields in the Configure VLAN menu Field Description VLAN Identifier Enter the number that identifies the VLAN In the y menu you 9 LAN Gigaset Communi
71. can configure up to 99 bundles 01 99 The code number for bundle assignment can be modified menu Alternative Access Codes When initiating an external call through the bundle code number the bundle cleared for the subscriber is used in connection setup 5 1 3 1 Edit or New Choose the 3 icon to edit existing entries Select the New button to create a new bundle The Numbering gt Trunk Settings gt Trunk Group gt New menu consists of the following fields Fields in the Basic Settings menu Field Description Description Enter a description for the entry Sequence of Trunk Select the desired external connections for a bundle The order Lines in Group when dialling to the outside matches the sequence of external connections in this list You wish to assign specific external connections for outgoing connections to the internal subscribers of your system You can group external connections into bundles and provide these to subscribers for the outgoing dialling In this way all sub scribers initiate the external dialling with same bundle access code but can only set up a connection over the bundles for which they have been cleared 5 Numbering Gigaset Communications GmbH 5 1 4 X 31 Packet switched data transmission X 31 To improve customer service you wish to allow cashless payment methods such as debit or credit card or record purchase data for a customer card For this purpose you connect a data device to your
72. cepted i e a request is not sent to another TACACS serv er The device s internal user administration is not turned off by TACACS It is checked after all TACACS servers have been queried TCP Port Shows the default TCP port 49 used for the TACACS pro tocol The value cannot be changed Timeout Enter time in seconds for which the NAS is to wait for a re sponse from TACACS If a response is not received during the wait time the next con figured TACACS server is queried only if Policy Non authoritative and the status of the current server is set to Blocked The possible values are 7 to 60 the default value is 3 Block Time Enter the time in seconds for which the status of the current server shall remain blocked When the block has ended the server is set to the status spe cified in the Entry active field The possible values are 0 to 3600 the default value is 60 The value 0 means that the server is never set to Blocked status and thus no other servers are queried Encryption Select whether data exchange between the TACACS server and the NAS is to be encrypted with MD5 Gigaset Communications GmbH 2 System Management Field Description The function is activated by selecting Enabled The function is enabled by default If the function is not enabled the packets and all related in formation are transferred unencrypted Unencrypted transfer is not recommended as a default setting and should only be
73. default The default value is 600 seconds 15 Local Services Gigaset Communications GmbH 15 9 2 Options In the Local Services gt HotSpot Gateway gt Options menu general settings are per formed for the hotspot The Local Services gt HotSpot Gateway gt Options menu consists of the following fields Fields in the Basic Parameters menu Field Description Host for multiple loca If several locations branches are set up on the Hotspot serv tions er enter the value of the NAS identifier RADIUS server para meter that has been registered for this location on the Hotspot server 15 10 Wake On LAN With the function Wake On LAN WOL you can start network devices that are switched off via an integrated network card The network card also needs a power supply even when the computer is switched off You can use filters and rule chains to define the condi tions that need to be met to send the so called magic packet and select the interfaces that are to be monitored for the defined rule chains Configuring the filters and rule chains is largely like configuring filters and rule chains in the menu Access Rules 15 10 1 Wake On LAN Filter The menu Local Services gt Wake On LAN gt Wake On LAN Filter displays a list of all the WOL filters that have been configured 15 10 1 1 Edit or New Choose the ray icon to edit existing entries Choose the New button to enter additional fil ters The Local Services gt Wake On LAN
74. disabled If a simplex operation connection is not ended by both subscribers the con nection is automatically ended by the system after ca 2 minutes Message Do you wish to call your co workers to a meeting or to a meal You could call each of them individually or simply use the announcement function With just one call you reach all the announcement enabled telephones without subscribers having to pick up the re ceiver N Caution Although you can be heard with the announcement you cannot hear any comments your colleagues or family members make The announcement function allows you to set up a connection to another telephone Gigaset Communications GmbH 5 Numbering without this connection having to be actively accepted by the latter pick up receiver or switch on loudspeaker hands free As soon as a telephone has accepted the announce ment the connection is active The announcer and the called subscriber initially hear a positive acknowledge tone Announcement duration is unlimited Announcements are possible to ISDN and analogue telephones if these support the an nouncement performance feature Please refer to the user s guide for your telephones to determine whether the performance feature is supported Announcements can be allowed or denied to telephones via a code number System telephones Announcement to and from system telephones is possible System telephones can initiate an announcement via the system telephone m
75. e Auto default value Multicast is activated automatically for hosts if the hosts open applications that use multicast e Up Multicast is always on e Down Multicast is always off Mode Only for IGMP Status Up or Auto Select Multicast Mode Possible values e Compatibility Mode default value The router uses IG MP version 3 If it notices a lower version in the network it uses the lowest version it could detect e Version 3 only Only IGMP version 3 is used Maximum Groups Enter the maximum number of groups to be permitted both in ternally and in reports Maximum Sources Enter the maximum number of sources that are specified in version 3 reports and the maximum number of internally man aged sources per group IGMP State Limit Enter the maximum permitted total number of incoming queries and messages per second The default value is 0 i e the number of IGMP status mes sages is not limited 11 3 Forwarding 11 3 1 Forwarding In this menu you specify which multicast groups are always passed between the inter faces of your device Gigaset Communications GmbH 11 Multicast 11 3 1 1 New Choose the New button to create forwarding rules for new multicast groups The Multicast gt Forwarding gt Forwarding gt New menu consists of the following fields Fields in the Basic Parameters menu Field Description All Multicast Groups Select whether all multicast groups i e the complete multicast address ran
76. e Dialin only The interface is used for incoming dialup connections and callbacks initiated externally e Multi User Dialin only The interface is defined as multi user connection partner i e several clients dial in with the same user name and password Authentication Select the authentication protocol for this PPTP partner Possible values PAP default value Only run PAP PPP Password Authentic ation Protocol the password is transferred unencrypted e CHAP Only run CHAP PPP Challenge Handshake Authen tication Protocol as per RFC 1994 password is transferred encrypted Gigaset Communications GmbH 12 WAN Field Description e PAP CHAP Primarily run CHAP otherwise PAP e MS CHAPv1 Only run MS CHAP version 1 PPP Microsoft Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol PAP CHAP MS CHAP Primarily run CHAP on denial then the authentication protocol required by the connection part ner MSCHAP version 1 or 2 possible e MS CHAPv2 Run MS CHAP version 2 only e None Some providers use no authentication In this case select this option Encryption Only for Authentication MS CHAPV2 If necessary select the type of encryption that should be used for data traffic to the connection partner This is only possible if STAC or MS STAC compression is not activated for the con nection If Encryption is set the remote terminal must also support it otherwise a connection cannot be set up Possible values
77. following fields Fields in the menu Basic Settings Field Description Description Enter a description for the calendar Application Select the application for which the calendar shall be used Please note that this field cannot be edited with pre existing entries If another application is to be configured you must cre ate another entry and delete the existing one Possible values e Team Signalling default value Here several calendars can be set up e Doorline Signalling Here several calendars can be set up e Night Mode Here only one calendar can be set up e Class of Service Here only one calendar can be set up e Rerouting for internal external Number Here several calendars can be set up e Voice Mail System Here several calendars can be set up e Alarm Input Here several calendars can be set up 8 1 1 2 Mon Sun In the Mon Sun area you set up the switching days and times for this calendar The Applications gt Calendar gt Calendar gt Monmenu consists of the following fields Fields in the lt Weekday gt menu Field Description Switching Points Enter the desired switching times For this under Time for each weekday select the desired switching points to which switching shall occur from any diver gent active switching option in the desired switching options Gigaset Communications GmbH 8 Applications Field Description selected under Action Depending on the application the foll
78. for small groups with high dynamic telecommunication volumes e g insides sales support order acceptance processing customer service Here a specific solution with its own administrator has been integrated The mini call centre is characterised by e Flexible allocation of agents and lines e Dynamic adaptation according to call volume e Call allocation with off time for the agent e Statistical data for agents and lines 8 Applications Gigaset Communications GmbH 8 6 1 Status In the Applications gt Mini Call Center gt Status menu you can view the current status of lines and logged in agents in a block along with the subscribers assigned to lines The menu Applications gt Mini Call Center gt Status consists of the following fields Values in the Status list Field Description View View allows you to select which call centre to display Line Displays the mini call centre line Agents assigned Displays the number of agents assigned to this line Agents logged on Displays the number of agents logged in on this line Agents in Wrap up Displays the number of agents in post processing time Active Calls Displays the number of active connections Waiting Calls Displays the number of waiting incoming calls Answered of Calls Displays the current number of accepted calls for this day Today Lost Calls Today Displays the current number of missed calls for this day 8 6 2 Lines In the Applications gt Mini Call Center gt Lines
79. g the internal subscriber has the num ber 16 If this subscriber is called from outside on 1234567 16 the call is signalled at his telephone However if with direct dial 16 a subscriber with the number 888 is to be called enter 888 as the exception number In Incoming Dis tribution you then assign the exception number to the sub scriber with the number 1 6 You can subsequently perform ad ditional settings in Incoming Distribution P P Additional MSN Here enter an additional MSN for a point to point connection With some providers it s possible to also transmit a point to multipoint number on a point to point connection in parallel to the direct dial number e g a fax number pre existing setup of a point to point connection or the old point to multipoint number Gigaset Communications GmbH 5 Numbering 5 1 3 Trunk Groups In the Numbering gt Trunk Settings gt Trunk Groups menu you can group the various external connections and individually provide these to the users You wish to assign specific external connections to internal subscribers for outgoing con nections You can join these external connections together to create bundles and supply these to extensions for outgoing calls In this way all extensions start external dialling with the same dialling code but can only establish a connection using the bundle released for the extension in question The external connections of your system can be grouped into bundles You
80. global DNS server is created with the setting None For Interface Mode Static A DNS server is configured for all interfaces with the Any setting Primary DNS Server Only if Interface Mode Manual Enter the IP address of the first name server for Internet ad dress name resolution Secondary DNS Server Only if Interface Mode Manual Optionally enter the IP address of an alternative name server 15 1 3 Static Hosts A list of all configured static hosts is displayed in the Local Services gt DNS gt Static Hosts menu 15 1 3 1 New Choose the New button to set up new static hosts The menu Local Services gt DNS gt Static Hosts gt New consists of the following fields 15 Local Services Gigaset Communications GmbH Fields in the Basic Parameters menu Field Description DNS Hostname Enter the host name to which the IP Address defined in this menu is to be assigned if a positive response is received to a DNS request If a negative response is received to a DNS re quest no address is specified The entry can also start with the wildcard e g bintec elmeg com If aname is entered without a dot this is completed with OK lt Name gt after confirmation Entries with spaces are not allowed Response In this entry select the type of response to DNS requests Possible values e Negative A DNS request for DNS Hostname gets a negat ive response e Positive default value A DNS request for DNS Host
81. gt Users gt Optional Rerouting menu to each dis played subscriber internal number you can assign a Redirect application and a Active Variant Day Here for example you can define to which co worker calls shall be forwarded when you re in a conference or whether the head office is responsible for taking calls during lunch Fields in the Optional Rerouting menu Field Description Internal Number Displays the internal numbers configured for the user Displayed Description Displays for each internal number the description configured for the system telephone display Rerouting Application Select from the dropdown list the desired redirect application that you wish to assign to the internal number You may choose from the redirect applications that you ve configured in the Applications gt Rerouting gt Rerouting Applications gt New menu with Type of redirect application Internal Subscriber Possible values None e lt Redirect application gt Active Variant Day Select the redirect application variant to be currently enabled If a variant switch is set up via the calendar this setting will be switched back again at the appropriate time Possible values e Variant e Variant 2 e Variant 3 e Variant 4 Gigaset Communications GmbH 5 Numbering 5 2 1 5 Authorizations In the menu Numbering gt User Settings gt Users gt Authorizations you can allow this user to make certain settings himself via HTML configurati
82. gt Wake On LAN Filter gt New menu consists of the following fields Fields in the menu Basic Parameters Field Description Description Enter the name of the filter Gigaset Communications GmbH 15 Local Services Field Description Service Select one of the preconfigured services The extensive range of services configured ex works includes the following CETV EV e apple qt O E e charge o elleme 1 e daytime e dhcp e discard The default value is Any Protocol Select a protocol The option Any default value matches any protocol Type Only for Protocol TCMP Select the type Possible values Any Echo reply Destination un reachable Source quench Redirect Echo Time ex ceeded Timestamp Timestamp reply See RFC 792 The default value is Any Connection State With Protocol TCP you can define a filter that takes the status of the TCP connections into account Possible values e Established All TCP packets that would not open any new TCP connection on routing over the gateway match the filter e Any default value All TCP packets match the filter Destination IP Ad Enter the destination IP address of the data packets and the dress Netmask corresponding netmask 15 Local Services Gigaset Communications GmbH Field Description Destination Port Only for Protocol TCP or UDP Range Enter a destination port number or a range of destination port numbers Possible valu
83. hear no music on hold e lt MoH Wave file gt A caller on hold should hear the selec 5 Numbering Gigaset Communications GmbH Field Description ted Wave file as music on hold e MOH Internal 1 e MOH Internal 2 e MoH Wave 1 to 8 Doorcom Access Select whether this authorisation class may connect to the door intercom The function is activated by selecting Enabled The function is disabled by default TAPI Select whether this authorisation class may use the system s TAPI functionalities The function is activated by selecting Enabled The function is disabled by default Save call data records Define whether the connection data of this authorisation class shall be saved The function is activated by selecting Enabled The function is enabled by default Transmit charge in Select whether the transferred charge information shall be formation transmitted to terminals of this authorisation class The function is activated by selecting Enabled The function is enabled by default 5 2 3 Parallel Ringing In the Numbering gt User Settings gt Parallel Ringing you configure whether in case of incoming calls to an internal number there shall be parallel signalling to another external number 5 2 3 1 Edit or New Choose the 3 icon to edit existing entries Choose the New button to create other entries Gigaset Communications GmbH 5 Numbering The Numbering gt User Settings gt Parallel Ringing gt New men
84. hexadecimal format e g 3F COS Filter Enter the service class of the IP packets Class of Service 802 1p Layer 2 CoS Possible values are whole numbers between 0 and 7 Value range 0 to 7 The default value is Ignore 15 10 2 WOL Rules The menu Local Services gt Wake On LAN gt WOL Rules displays a list of all the WOL rules that have been configured 15 10 2 1 Edit or New Choose the rz icon to edit existing entries Choose the New button to enter additional rules The Local Services gt Wake On LAN gt WOL Rules gt New menu consists of the following fields Fields in the menu Basic Parameters Field Description Wake On LAN Rule Chain Select whether to create a new rule chain or to edit an existing one Possible values e New default value You can create a new rule chain with this setting e lt Name of the rule chain gt Shows a rule chain that has already been created which you can select and edit Description Only where Wake On LAN Rule Chain New Enter the name of the rule chain Wake On LAN Filter Select a WOL filter 15 Local Services Gigaset Communications GmbH Field Description If the rule chain is new select the filter to be set at the first point of the rule chain If the rule chain already exists select the filter to be attached to the rule chain To select a filter at least one filter must be configured in the Wake On LAN gt WOL Rules menu Action Define the action
85. host to be regarded as accessible You can use this setting to specify for example when a host is deemed to be accessible once more and used again instead of a backup device Possible values are 7 to 65536 The default value is 3 Unsuccessful Trials Specify how many pings need to be unanswered for the host to be regarded as inaccessible You can use this setting to specify for example when a host is deemed to be inaccessible and that a backup device should be used Possible values are 7 to 65536 The default value is 3 Action to be per Select which Action should be run For most actions you se formed lect an Interface to which the Action relates All physical and virtual interfaces can be selected Gigaset Communications GmbH 15 Local Services Field Description For each interface select whether it is to be enabled Enable disabled Disable default value reset Reset or the connection restablished Redial With Action Monitor you can monitor the IP address that is specified under Monitored IP Address This information can be used for other functions such as the Tracking IP Address 15 7 2 Interfaces A list of all monitored hosts is displayed in the Local Services gt Surveillance gt Inter faces menu 15 7 2 1 Edit or New Choose the 3 icon to edit existing entries Choose the New button to set up monitoring for other interfaces The menu Local Services gt Surveillance gt Interfac
86. is active Real Time Jitter Control is activated by the control instances ALG or MGW e Always Real Time Jitter Control is always active even if no real time data is routed Queues Policies Configure the desired QoS queues For each class created from the class plan which is associated with the selected interface a queue is generated automatically and displayed here only for data traffic classified as outgoing and for data traffic classified as moving in both directions Add new entries with Add The Edit Queue Policy menu opens By creating a QoS policy a DEFAULT entry with the lowest pri ority 255 is automatically created The menu Edit Queue Policy consists of the following fields Fields in the Edit Queue Policy menu Field Description Description Enter the name of the queue policy 10 Networking Gigaset Communications GmbH Field Description Outbound Interface Shows the interface for which the QoS queues are being con figured Prioritisation queue Select the queue priority type Possible values e Class Based default value Queue for data classified as normal e High Priority Queue for data classified as high prior ity e Default Queue for data that has not been classified or data of a class for which no queue has been configured Class ID Only for Prioritisation queue Class Based Select the QoS packet class to which this queue is to apply To do this at least one class ID must be giv
87. isle Olt DO Isle The default value is 50 Hz Flash Time for DTMF When operating analogue terminals with the multifrequency Dialling code dialling method you can set the flashtime that the system detects as maximum flash length If the terminal flash is longer than the defined period replaced receiver is detected Values from 100 ms standard value to 1000 ms are pos sible 6 2 4 CAPI If your device supports CAPI you configure the connected CAPI terminals in the menu Terminals gt Other phones gt CAPI For example you perform assignment of a configured internal number 6 2 4 1 Edit or New Choose the Fay icon to edit existing entries Select the New button to add CAPI terminals The Terminals gt Other phones gt CAPI gt New menu consists of the following fields Fields in the menu Basic Settings Gigaset Communications GmbH 6 Terminals Field Description Description Enter a description for the CAPI telephone Fields in the menu Basic Phone Settings Field Description Internal Numbers Use Add to select the internal number for this terminal You can define several internal numbers Possible values e No free Extension Available All configured internal numbers are already in use First configure another user with additional numbers e lt Internal Number gt Select one of the existing numbers of the configured users 6 3 Overview 6 3 1 Overview In the Terminals gt Overview gt Overview menu you ge
88. key of the recipient and is not a forgery a so called digital certificate is required This confirms the authenticity and the owner of a public key It is similar to an official pass port in that it confirms that the holder of the passport has certain characteristics such as gender and age and that the signature on the passport is authentic As there is more than one certificate issuer e g the passport office for a passport and as such certificates can 2 System Management Gigaset Communications GmbH be issued by several different issuers and in varying qualities the trustworthiness of the issuer is extremely important The quality of a certificate is regulated by the German Sig nature Act or respective EU Directives Certification authorities that issue so called qualified certificates are organised in a hier archy with the Federal Network Agency as the higher certifying authority The structure and content of a certificate are stipulated by the standard used X 509 is the most import ant and the most commonly use standard for digital certificates Qualified certificates are personal and extremely trustworthy Digital certificates are part of a so called Public Key Infrastructure PKI PKI refers to a system that can issue distribute and check digital certificates Certificates are issued for a specific period usually one year i e they have a limited valid ity period Your device is designed to use certificates for VPN connec
89. longer to be used e g because it has fallen into the wrong hands or has been lost the corresponding certificate is declared invalid The certification authority re vokes the certificate and publishes it on a certificate blacklist so called CRL Certificate users should always check against these lists to ensure that the certificate used is cur rently valid This check can be automated via a browser The Simple Certificate Enrollment Protocol SCEP supports the issue and revocation of certificates in networks 2 8 2 1 Import Choose the Import button to import CRLs The System Management gt Certificates gt CRLs gt Import menu consists of the following fields Fields in the CRL Import menu Field Description External Filename Enter the file path and name of the CRL to be imported or use Browse to select it from the file browser Enter a unique description for the CRL Local Certificate De scription File Encoding Select the type of encoding so that your device can decode the CRL Possible values e Auto default value Activates automatic code recognition If 2 System Management Gigaset Communications GmbH Field Description downloading the CRL in auto mode fails try with a certain type of encoding e Base64 e Binary Password Enter the password required for the import 2 8 3 Certificate Servers A list of certificate servers is displayed in the System Management gt Certificates gt Certi ficate S
90. menu lines are assigned to external and internal numbers and the name of the call centre to which the line belongs is displayed Choose the 2 icon to edit existing entries Select the New button to create new entries 8 6 2 1 General In the General area you perform basic settings for a line The menu Applications gt Mini Call Center gt Lines gt General consists of the following Gigaset Communications GmbH 8 Applications fields Fields in the Basic Settings menu Field Description Description Enter a description for the line External Number Select a number configured as mini call centre for the external connection of this call centre line Internal Number Enter the desired internal number for this line Call Center Descrip Select New and enter a name for the new mini call centre tion Or select the name of a mini call centre which has already been generated Fields in the Further Settings menu Field Description Switch call signalling Select whether the call options for this line shall be switched over a configured calendar and if so over which Possible values No calendar only manually e lt Calendar gt Active Variant Select which call option shall be enabled by default after con figuration for this line The menu Advanced Settings consists of the following fields Fields in the Advanced Settings menu Field Description Team Speed Timer Enter the time after which call forwarding to the next fr
91. message from a voicemail system is present a special dialling tone is heard after the receiver is picked up Reception telephone e MWI information can be switched on and off from a reception telephone to a room tele phone via a telephone procedure If MWI information is switched to a room telephone the reception telephone number is entered into the caller list and the special dialling tone is enabled Disabling the MWI announcement e Manual disabling via reception telephone procedure e Call from reception telephone to room telephone The MWI information is automatically deleted in call status e Callback from room telephone to reception telephone deletes the MWI information Ca Note This performance feature must be requested for your ISDN connection from the network operator There you will also be informed of available services The information can only be displayed on the internal ISDN terminal if an ex ternal MSN has been assigned to the terminal in the configuration All MWI data are deleted after a system reset Net Direct keypad Some time ago you purchased the most advanced telephone of the time Since then however a number of new performance features have appeared on the public network 5 Numbering Gigaset Communications GmbH which cannot be used by simply pressing a key You can use the keypad function to em ploy your network operator s current ISDN functions by entering a key sequence from your ISDN
92. multicast func tion The Multicast gt General gt General menu consists of the following fields Fields in the Basic Settings menu Field Description Multicast Routing Select whether Multicast Routing should be used The function is enabled with Enabled The function is disabled by default 11 2 IGMP IGMP Internet Group Management Protocol see RFC 3376 is used to signal the inform ation about group membership in a subnet As a result only the packets explicitly wanted by a host enter the subnet Special mechanisms ensure that the requirements of the individual clients are taken into consideration At the moment there are three versions of IGMP V1 V3 most current systems use V3 and less often V2 Two packet types play a central role in IGMP queries and reports Queries are only transmitted from a router If several IGMP routers exist in a network the router with the lowest IP address is the querier We differentiate here between a general query sent to 224 0 0 1 a group specific query sent to a group address and the group and source specific query sent to a specific group address Reports are only sent by hosts to respond to queries 11 2 1 IGMP In this menu you configure the interfaces on which IGMP is to be enabled 11 2 1 1 Edit or New Choose the 3 icon to edit existing entries Choose the New button to configure IGMP on other interfaces 11 Multicast Gigaset Communications GmbH The Mult
93. num bers The Numbering gt Trunk Settings gt Trunk Numbers gt New menu consists of the follow ing fields Fields in the Basic Settings menu Field Description Trunk Select the connection defined in Numbering gt Trunk Settings gt Trunks for which to perform the number configuration Type of Number Select the call number type to be defined according to connec tion type 5 Numbering Gigaset Communications GmbH Field Description Possible values e Single Number MSN Only for point to multipoint con nections e P P Base Number Only for point to point connections e P P DDI Exception Only for point to point connections e P P Additional MSN Only for point to point connections Displayed Name In general you enter the name to be displayed for this number in the called system telephone s display F r Type of Number P P Base Number this field displays the name of the connection Here enter the MSN for a point to multipoint connection Single Number MSN Here enter the number for the point to point connection P P Base Number without direct dial number P P DDI Exception Here enter the direct dial exception for a point to point connec tion Note Only enter the extension according to your extension number range that should be routed to differing internal sub scriber numbers Direct dial at the point to point connection al ways proceeds to the subscriber whose number was dialled along as extension E
94. occur with receiver replaced e If there s a message from a voicemail system there s a short call Depending on the ter minal a symbol a text generated in the telephone as well as the caller s telephone number can be displayed If MWI information is deleted there is no signalling e For the terminal CLIP must be set up and enabled in the configuration e Callback to the voice mail system or reception telephone is possible the MMI informa tion is deleted in the process ISDN terminals e Switching on the MWI is possible at all times also during the call e If there s a message from a voicemail system there s a short call Depending on the ter minal a symbol a text generated in the telephone as well as the caller s telephone number can be displayed If MWI information is deleted there is no signalling e Callback to the voice mail system or reception telephone is possible the MMI informa Gigaset Communications GmbH 5 Numbering tion is deleted in the process System telephones e Switching on the MWI is possible at all times also during the call The caller s number is entered in the caller list Depending on the type of system telephone e g external voicemail Netbox Heute the name and number of the caller are entered In addition the Caller list LED flashes e Callback to the voice mail system or reception telephone is possible the MMI informa tion is deleted in the process Hotel room telephone e If a
95. of your device are made up of the following parts a WLAN b Number of the physical port 1 or 2 Example WLAN1 The name of the Ethernet port is made up of the following parts a ETH b Number of the port Example ETH1 2 System Management Gigaset Communications GmbH The name of the interface connected to an Ethernet port is made up of the following parts a Abbreviation for interface type whereby en stands for internet b Number of the Ethernet port c Number of the interface Example en1 0 first interface on the first Ethernet port The name of the bridge group is made up of the following parts a Abbreviation for interface type whereby br stands for bridge group b Number of the bridge group Example bro first bridge group The name of the wireless network VSS is made up of the following parts Abbreviation for interface type whereby vss stands for wireless network a Number of the wireless module b Number of the interface Example vss1 0 first wireless network on the first wireless module The name of the WDS link or bridge link is made up of the following parts a Abbreviation for interface type b Number of the wireless module on which the WDS link or bridge link is configured c Number of the WDS link or bridge link Example wds1 0 first WDS link or bridge link on the first wireless module The name of the client link is made up of the following parts a Abbreviation for int
96. off In the Numbering gt Groups amp Teams gt Teams gt Log on Log off individual team mem bers are logged in or out The Numbering gt Groups amp Teams gt Teams gt Log on Log off menu consists of the fol lowing fields Fields in the Basic Settings menu Field Description Numbers Indicates the internal number of assigned team members Status Select whether the team member is logged into the team The team member is logged in by selecting Logged on 5 4 Call Distribution In this menu you configure internal forwarding of all incoming calls 5 4 1 Incoming Distribution In the Numbering gt Call Distribution gt Incoming Distribution menu you configure the assignment of incoming calls to the desired internal numbers In Call Assignment you assign the call numbers entered under External Numbers e g to the teams or to an internal number 5 4 1 1 Edit Choose the E icon to edit existing entries The Numbering gt Call Distribution gt Incoming Distribution gt g menu consists of the following fields Gigaset Communications GmbH 5 Numbering Fields in the Basic Settings menu Field Description lt Name of Number Displays the number configured Entry gt Trunk Displays the external connection for which call assignment is configured Assignment Select the internal number or the desired function to which in coming calls shall be assigned via the line selected in Trunk Possible values e Internal Nu
97. one of your own certificates for authentication It shows the index number of this certificate and the name under which it is saved This field is only shown for authentication settings based on certificates and indicates that a certificate is essential Mode Only for Phase 1 IKE Parameters Select the phase 1 mode Possible values e Aggressive default value The Aggressive Mode is ne cessary if one of the peers does not have a static IP address and preshared keys are used for authentication It requires only three messages to configure a secure channel e Main Mode ID Protect This mode also designated Main Mode requires six messages for a Diffie Hellman key calculation and thus for configuring a secure channel over which the IPSec SAs can be negotiated A condition is that both peers have static IP addresses if preshared keys are used for authentication Also define whether the selected mode is used exclusively Strict or the peer can also propose another mode Local ID Type Only for Phase 1 IKE Parameters Select the local ID type 13 VPN Gigaset Communications GmbH Field Description Possible values e Fully Qualified Domain Name FODN e E mail Address e TPV4 Address e ASN 1 DN Distinguished Name Local ID Value Only for Phase 1 IKE Parameters Enter the ID of your device For Authentication Method DSA Signature RSA Sig nature Or RSA Encryption the Use Subject Name from certificate option is di
98. outgoing calls Here for each configured external connection select one of the numbers configured for this purpose If more than one external connection has been configured you can specify the procedure for outgoing calls When an external line is engaged the order of the entries determines the sequence in which the other lines assigned will be used to dial The configured Outgoing Signalisation can be hidden for each outgoing line to do so put a tick under Hide Number in the relevant row If you wish to move an entry in the list displayed select the a icon in the relevant row A new window opens The selected entry is displayed under External Connection here e g ISDN _ 1 Proceed as follows to move the selected entry 1 Under Move select in the list the entry relative to which you wish to move the selec ted entry here e g 1 SIP Provider 1 2 Select whether you want to insert the entry above or below the selected entry in the list here e g above 3 Select Copy The entries display in the changed order 4 Ifthe list contains more than two entries move other entries if you wish The sequence configured here overwrites the setting that is assigned by the permission 5 Numbering Gigaset Communications GmbH class However the assigned permission class continues to determine whether a user has access to a particular external connection 5 2 1 4 Optional Rerouting In the Numbering gt User Settings
99. period without further entries set in configuration the system automatically dials the configured direct call number If you do not dial within the specified period from picking up the receiver automatic dial ling is initiated The time for the direct call is set under System Management gt Global Settings gt Timer gt Direct Call C Note In the system up to 10 direct call destinations with names and telephone numbers can be set up by the administrator These destinations should then only be assigned to the terminals by the user via the user configuration inter face In the configuration system direct call or a direct call specifically con figured for the terminal can then be set by the user 7 1 1 1 Edit or New Choose the o icon to edit existing entries Select the New button to create new entries Gigaset Communications GmbH 7 Call Routing The Call Routing gt Outgoing Services gt Direct Call gt New menu consists of the follow ing fields Fields in the Basic Settings menu Field Description Description Enter a description for the entry Direct Call Number Enter the number to be automatically dialled if no number is to be dialled for a certain time after the receiver has been picked up 7 1 2 Call Forwarding In the Call Routing gt Outgoing Services gt Call Forwarding menu you configure call for warding of external calls for an internal subscriber You are temporarily away from your office but don
100. point to multipoint connections P MP and point to point connections P P 3 2 1 1 Working with Choose the ry button to edit an entry The menu Physical Interfaces gt ISDN Ports gt ISDN External gt g consists of the follow ing fields Fields in the Basic Settings menu Field Description Description Enter a user defined description of the ISDN interface The default value is ISDN External Name Shows the name of the ISDN interface Possible values e S U 4 wire S e Displays the port on the module to which the ISDN con nection is connected Example S U 1 The interface is in Port 1 and is used as an S connector Access Type Select whether the ISDN interface will be operated as a point to multipoint connection or as a point to point connection Possible values Gigaset Communications GmbH 3 Physical Interfaces Field Description e ISDN P P default value e ISDN P MP The menu Advanced Settings consists of the following fields Fields in the Advanced Settings menu Field Description Permanent Layer 2 Ac This function also known as permanent monitoring constantly tivation monitors the functionality and transmission quality of an extern al ISDN connection For this purpose the system is in perman ent contact with your network operator s exchange If the ex change does not keep the ISDN layer 2 permanently enabled the system can initiate the repeated establishment of layer 2 The f
101. servers is allowed in the WAN gt Internet Dialup menu Interface Mode Dynamic a connection is set up if necessary at extra cost to the first Internet or dialin connection configured to enable DNS server addresses to be requested from DNS servers DNS Negotiation Enabled if this has not been already attempted When the name servers have been negotiated successfully these name servers are then available for more quer ies 6 Otherwise the initial request is answered with a server error If one of the DNS servers answers with non existent domain the initial request is im mediately answered accordingly and a corresponding negative entry is made in the DNS cache of your device 15 Local Services Gigaset Communications GmbH 15 1 1 Global Settings The menu Local Services gt DNS gt Global Settings consists of the following fields Fields in the Basic Parameters menu Field Description Domain Name Enter the standard domain name of your device WINS Server Enter the IP address of the first and if necessary alternative l global Windows Internet Name Server WINS or NetBIOS Primary Name Server NBNS Secondary The menu Advanced Settings consists of the following fields Fields in the Advanced Settings menu Field Description Positive Cache Select whether the positive dynamic cache is to be activated i e successfully resolved names and IP addresses are to be stored in the cache The function is activ
102. successful The default value is Automatic i e a one time connection is set up to the first suitable connection partner configured in the system Fields in the IP address to use for DNS WINS server assignment menu Field Description As DHCP Server Select which name server addresses are sent to the DHCP cli ent if your device is used as DHCP server Possible values None No name server address is sent e Own IP Address default value The address of your device is transferred as the name server address e DNS Setting The addresses of the global name servers entered on your device are sent As IPCP Server Select which name server addresses are to be transmitted by your device in the event of dynamic server name negotiation if your device is used as the IPCP server for PPP connections Possible values None No name server address is sent 15 Local Services Gigaset Communications GmbH Field Description e Own IP Address The address of your device is transferred as the name server address e DNS Setting default value The addresses of the global name servers entered on your device are sent 15 1 2 DNS Servers A list of all configured DNS servers is displayed in the Local Services gt DNS gt DNS Serv ers menu 15 1 2 1 Edit or New Choose the H icon to edit existing entries Select the New button to set up additional DNS servers Here you can configure both global DNS servers and DNS serv
103. the connection ended e lt Extension number gt l a destination number is entered the call is forwarded Transfer with The caller hears the defined announcement or music while her call is being transferred Possible values e Ring tone e MoH Wave 1 t0MoH Wave 8 e MOH internal 1 e MOH internal 2 e lt Wave file gt Announcement before query You have set up a general information call number which customers with various prob lems or requests ring up Naturally no single employee or team can provide information in every subject areas So the caller would need to be transferred to the individual depart ments If you knew beforehand which requests Subject area a caller had you could im mediately transfer him to the competent department Thus your callers don t have to be initially accepted and transferred by an exchange Every caller decides for him herself with which employee he she wishes to be connected With the performance feature Auto Attendant with DISA calls are automatically accepted by the system The caller then hears an announcement with information about which 8 Applications Gigaset Communications GmbH entries are possible during or after the announcement Once the entry is made the an nouncement ends and the caller is transferred to an internal subscriber or team If the caller provides a false or no entry he she is transferred to the defined redirect destination internal subscriber or team While b
104. the duration of the connection Any host routes entered always have priority over IP addresses from the address pools This means that if an incoming call has been authenticated your device first checks whether a host route is entered in the routing table for this caller If not your device can allocate an IP address from an address pool if available If address pools have more than one IP address you cannot specify which connection partner receives which ad Gigaset Communications GmbH 12 WAN dress The addresses are initially assigned in order If a new dial in takes place within an interval of one hour an attempt is made to allocate the same IP address that was as signed to this partner the previous time 12 1 4 1 Edit or New Choose the New button to set up new IP address pools Choose the 3 icon to edit exist ing entries The menu WAN gt Internet Dialup gt IP Pools gt New consists of the following fields Fields in the menu Basic Parameters Field Description IP Pool Name Enter any description to uniquely identify the IP pool IP Address Range Enter the first first field and last second field IP address of the IP address pool DNS Server Primary Enter the IP address of the DNS server that is to be used preferably by clients who draw an address from this pool Secondary Optionally enter the IP address of an alternative DNS server 12 2 Real Time Jitter Control When telephoning over the Internet voic
105. the interfaces or create virtual interfaces for special applications Here is a list of all of the interfaces logical Ethernet interfaces and others created in the subsystems configured in the System Management gt Interface Mode Bridge Groups gt Interfaces menu Use the to edit the settings of an existing interface bridge groups Ethernet interfaces in routing mode You can use the New button to create virtual interfaces However this is only needed in special applications e g BRRP Depending on the option selected different fields and options are available All the config uration options are listed below S Note Please note If your device has obtained an IP address dynamically from a DHCP server operated in your network for the basic configuration the fallback IP address is deleted automatically and your device will no longer function over this ad dress However if you have set up a connection to the device over the fallback IP address or have assigned an IP address with the Dime Manager in the ba sic configuration you will only be able to access your device over this IP ad dress The device will no longer obtain an IP configuration dynamically over DHCP 9 LAN Gigaset Communications GmbH Example of subnets If your device is connected to a LAN that consists of two subnets you should enter a second IP Address Netmask The first subnet has two hosts with the IP addresses 192 168 42 1 and 192 16
106. the required subscriber could not be reached You have passed a caller to another subscriber by brokering or transfer This subscriber cannot be reached or is engaged But you wish to prevent the subscriber terminating the call or being 2 System Management Gigaset Communications GmbH Field Value diverted by the system after a time You achieve this using an automatic callback to your telephone In the case of calls which are transferred with no message special call transfer UbA a callback or call waiting if there is already a new call is made to the initiating subscriber after the time entered here Possible values are 10 to 179 The default value is 30 Transfer to busy ex Enter the time after which a subscriber in the waiting loop is re tension connected with the switchboard The switchboard wishes to pass a call to a particular employee However this person is currently on the phone The call can then be switched to the subscriber s waiting loop If the call is not taken in the time entered here the switchboard is called again Possible values are 10 to 600 The default value is 30 System Parked En Enter the time after which an open hold for enquiry is termin quiry ated and the subscriber called back or given a call waiting You are making a call and want to transfer it to a colleague Unfortunately you do not know where this colleague is Sys tem Parking Open Enquiry holds the caller in the system s que
107. the system If the system pos sesses no ISDN connections or if Call Deflection point to multipoint con nection or Partial Rerouting point to point connection has not been ordered from the network operator call forwarding occurs solely in the sys tem 7 1 2 1 Edit or New Choose the 3 icon to edit existing entries Select the New button to create new entries The Call Routing gt Outgoing Services gt Call Forwarding gt New menu consists of the following fields Fields in the Basic Settings menu Field Description Internal Number Select the internal number to which the incoming calls shall be forwarded Type of Call Forward Select when incoming calls shall be forwarded to the specified ing internal number Possible values e Immediately ROBUSTA Gigaset Communications GmbH 7 Call Routing Field Description e On no reply default value e On busy On no reply Target Number On no Enter the number to which incoming calls shall be forwarded reply after time Target Number On Enter the number to which incoming calls shall be forwarded busy on busy Target Number Imme Enter the number to which incoming calls shall be forwarded diate immediately 7 1 3 Dial Control In the Call Routing gt Outgoing Services gt Dial Control menu you block specific num bers partial numbers or release these You wish to prevent dialling of specific numbers in the system e g the numbers of ex pensive value add
108. the team signalling the door intercom signalling and the rejection functions An advanced switching of the call variants is possible via a code or the calendar that has been configured for night operation You configure a calendar for night operation in the Applications gt Calendar gt Calendar gt New menu Fields in the menu Night Mode Field Value Team Signalling Select the call variants for team signalling in night operation 2 System Management Gigaset Communications GmbH Field Value Doorcom Signalling Select the door intercom variants for door intercom signalling in night operation Rerouting of Incoming Select the call variants for reject to message in night operation Distribution Extension Rerouting Select the call variants for reject to direct dial in in night opera tion Global Rerouting Select the call variants for general rejection in night operation Alarm Input Select the call variants for alarm in night operation 2 2 2 Passwords Setting the passwords is another basic system setting Eg Note All bintec elmeg devices are delivered with the same username and pass word and the same PINs As long as the passwords or PINs remain un changed they are not protected against unauthorised use When you log onto your device for the first time you are prompted to change the password You need to change the system administrator pass word in order to be able to configure your device Make sure you change all pas
109. to SNMP Browser 38 Switching Points 142 143 Sync SAs with ISP interface state 280 Syslog 379 Syslog Servers 379 System 4 System Logic 370 System Name 4 System Licences 19 System Messages 390 System Reboot 378 System Management 2 System Date 2 System Parked Enquiry 17 System Parking Open Enquiry 20 System Phonebook 152 System Phonebook Authorization 103 T T 38 FAX support 65 TACACS 34 TACACS Secret 35 Take Waiting Calls witht 146 TAPI 103 Target Number 146 Target MAC Address 365 Target Number Immediate 134 Target Number On busy 134 Target Number On no reply 134 TCP Inactivity 308 TCP Keepalives 27 TCP Port 36 TCP MSS Clamping 181 Team Signalling 9 Team Speed Timer 107 161 167 Teams 105 389 Telnet 24 Terminal 388 Terminal Type 126 127 Terminal Endpoint Identifier TEI 82 Terminals 116 Index Terms amp Conditions 359 Third Timeserver 14 Ticket Type 360 Time 12 157 157 390 Time Condition 339 Time for Rerouting on No Reply 146 Time Update Interval 14 Time Update Policy 14 Time Zone 13 Timeout 36 Timer 16 Timestamp 380 Total 393 Traceroute Test 368 Traffic Direction 336 Traffic shaping 206 209 306 Transfer Mode 264 Transfer with 146 Transfer Signalling 6 Transfer call data records via Serial 2 158 Transfer own IP address over ISDN GSM 264 Transfer to busy extension 6 17 Transferred Traffic 336 Transmit charge information 103 Transmit Charges
110. to be taken for a filtered data packet Possible values e Invoke WOL if filter matches Run WOL if the filter matches e Invoke if filter does not match Run WOL if the filter does not match e Deny WOL if filter matches Do not run WOL if the filter matches e Deny WOL if filter does not match Do not run WOL if the filter does not match e Ignore rule and skip to next rule This rule is ig nored and the next one in the chain is examined Type Select whether the Wake on LAN magic packet is to be sent as a UDP packet or as an Ethernet frame via the interface spe cified in Send WOL packet via interface Send WOL packet via Select the interface which is to be used to send the Wake on interface LAN magic packet Target MAC Address Only where Action Invoke WOL if filter matches and Invoke if filter does not match Enter the MAC address of the network device that is to be en abled using WOL Password Only where Action Invoke WOL if filter matches and Invoke if filter does not match If the network device that is to be enabled supports the Se cureOn function enter the corresponding password for this device here The device is only enabled if the MAC address and password are correct 15 10 3 Interface Assignment In this menu the configured rule chains are assigned to individual interfaces which are then monitored for these rule chains A list of all configured interface assignments is displayed in the Local Serv
111. used Possible values e Tone Dialling DTMF default value e Pulse Dialling PD Status Displays the status of the interface Action Change the status of the interface by pressing the t button or button in the Action column 3 Physical Interfaces Gigaset Communications GmbH 3 3 1 1 Edit Choose the pl button to edit an entry The menu Physical Interfaces gt Analogue Ports gt Analogue External FXO gt g con sists of the following fields Fields in the Basic Settings menu Field Description Description Enter a user defined description of the analogue interface Name Shows the name of the analogue interface Possible values e FXO Name for the analogue connection Dialling Method Select which dialling method should be used Possible values e Tone Dialling DTMF default value e Pulse Dialling PD CLIP Select whether the CLIP feature is to be used i e whether the caller s number should be displayed to the person called Possible values e off default value The caller s number is not displayed to the person called e FSK The data is sent as DTMF Receive charges Select whether your device is to receive charge information from the network For this purpose you can define the charge impulse at 12 kHz or 16 kHz Possible values e off default value Charge information is not received O 12 PR O O KkHZ Gigaset Communications GmbH 3 Physical Interfaces Fields in the Advan
112. used for debugging 2 6 3 Options This setting possible here causes your device to carry out authentication negotiation for incoming calls if it cannot identify the calling party number e g because the remote ter minal does not signal the calling party number If the data password partner PPP ID obtained by executing the authentication protocol is the same as the data of a listed re mote terminal or RADIUS user your device accepts the incoming call The menu System Management gt Remote Authentication gt Options consists of the fol lowing fields Fields in the Global RADIUS Options menu Field Description Authentication for PPP By default the following authentication sequence is used for in Dialin coming calls with RADIUS First CLID then PPP and then PPP with RADIUS Options e Inband Only inband RADIUS requests PAP CHAP MS CHAP V1 amp V2 i e PPP requests without CLID are sent to the RADIUS server defined in Server IP Address e Outband CLID Only outband RADIUS requests i e re quests for calling line identification CLID are sent to the RADIUS server Inband is enabled by default 2 7 Configuration Access In the Configuration Access menu you can configure user profiles 2 System Management Gigaset Communications GmbH To do so you create access profiles and users and assign each user at least one access profile An access profile makes available that part of the GUI that a user requires fo
113. variable which is flagged with and Index Value Use Index Variables to create more entries with Add Monitored Interface Only for Event Type Interface Status and Interface TREWEL Select the interface whose defined status shall trigger an oper ation Interface Status Only for Event Type Interface Status Select the status that the interface must have in order to initiate the intended operation Possible values Up default value The function is enabled 15 Local Services Gigaset Communications GmbH Field Description e Down The interface is disabled Traffic Direction Only for Event Type Interface Traffic Select the direction of the data traffic whose values should be monitored as initiating an operation Possible values e RX default value Incoming data traffic is monitored e Tx Outgoing data traffic is monitored Interface Traffic Condi tion Only for Event Type Interface Traffic Select whether the value for data traffic must be Greater default value or Less the value specified in Transferred Traffic in order to initiate the operation Transferred Traffic Only for Event Type Interface Traffic Enter the desired value in kBytes for the data traffic to serve as comparison The default value is 0 Destination IP Address Only for Event Type Ping Test Enter the IP address whose accessibility is to be checked Source IP Address Only for Event Type Ping Test Enter an IP address to
114. with TCP port 37 e None This time server is not currently used for the time re quest Ex works the ntp1 sda t online de server is entered here Gigaset Communications GmbH 2 System Management Field Description Second Timeserver Enter the secondary time server by using either a domain name or an IP address In addition select the protocol for the time server request Possible values e SNTP default value This server uses the simple network time protocol via UDP port 123 e Time Service UDP This server uses the Time service with UDP port 37 e Time Service TCP This server uses the Time service with TCP port 37 e None This time server is not currently used for the time re quest Ex works the ntp1 sul t online de server is entered here Third Timeserver Enter the third time server by using either a domain name or an IP address In addition select the protocol for the time server request Possible values e SNTP default value This server uses the simple network time protocol via UDP port 123 e Time Service UDP This server uses the Time service with UDP port 37 e Time Service TCP This server uses the Time service with TCP port 37 e None This time server is not currently used for the time re quest Time Update Interval Enter the time interval in minutes at which the time is automat ically updated The default value is 1440 Time Update Policy Enter the time period aft
115. you select Specify port range for Original Source Port Range you can choose from the follwing options e Use Original Source Port Range The range spe cified for Original Source Port Range is not changed all port numbers are retained e Verwende Port Bereich beginnend bei There is an input field for you to specify the port number with which to start the port range that replaces the original port rannge The count of ports is retained 10 3 QoS QoS Quality of Service makes it possible to distribute the available bandwidths effect ively and intelligently Certain applications can be given preference and bandwidth re served for them This is an advantage especially for time critical applications such as VoIP The QoS configuration consists of three parts e Creating IP filters e Classifying data e Prioritising data 10 3 1 QoS Filter In the Networking gt QoS gt QoS Filter menu IP filters are configured Gigaset Communications GmbH 10 Networking The list also displays any configured entries from Networking gt Access Rules gt Rule Chains 10 3 1 1 New Choose the New button to define more IP filters The Networking gt QoS gt QoS Filter gt New menu consists of the following fields Fields in the Basic Parameters menu Field Description Description Enter the name of the filter Service Select one of the preconfigured services The extensive range of services configured ex works includes the following
116. 1 13 1 1 IRSOG Peels i sac oh ee ed dole Se ee eke eee Sol ae 252 13 1 2 Phase 1 Profiles cs we ae A te eed T Bam hoe 266 13 1 3 Phase 2 Profiles u seare ar ee 273 13 1 4 XAUTH Profiles 2 o e 277 13 1 5 IP Pools ss 4 A a Sr ane A es ne er Ee bea 278 13 1 6 Options ota i Ae ee PoP Pa ee ee Bet a a 279 13 2 O A A ie Det oe 282 13 2 1 Tunnel Profiles 2 20 So DE een oh A ee ee as 283 hybird 120 Gigaset Edition 13 2 2 13 2 3 13 3 13 3 1 13 3 2 13 3 3 13 4 13 4 1 Chapter 14 14 1 14 1 1 14 1 2 14 1 3 14 2 14 2 1 14 3 14 3 1 14 3 2 14 4 14 4 1 14 4 2 Chapter 15 15 1 15 1 1 15 1 2 15 1 3 15 1 4 15 1 5 hybird 120 Gigaset Edition USGI aaa Rae Ge Bee a St tg Dis 286 Options sc aie ai rs Sen Bae bee ot n Wia 290 PPP iat Gate fe a od Wheto Gs acl OT Gate ed ek acess amp 291 PPTP Tunnels e 00 to a2 as eae ek tk ae Ge de AP eee ee GPA 291 Options Ae ee ee A a he hr BM E ae 297 IPE POOIS Y 2000000005 ole BOR Ee Ga cna ee we Ee ke Bote al a 298 GRE tar fe ehh echt atte Ae De rt te 299 GRE Tunnels sanle a ea 2 o Be GAL oe Bl see to 299 Firewalls coca is a Gee 302 Policies s i v 08 4x i oe de Oe fe Se oe a iia 303 Filter RUGS otros is eae ha Sewn oe i ha ies Pol tec de ee bh g 303 QOS gs hbk wheres es A ta A DA od a ge AA A de ad 306 ptions Laca a be thee A A ea i 307 Interfaces ear eek a
117. 15 5 1 1 New Choose the New button to set up new CAPI users The menu Local Services gt CAPI Server gt User gt New consists of the following fields Fields in the Basic Parameters menu Field Description User Name Enter the user name for which access to the CAPI service is to 15 Local Services Gigaset Communications GmbH Field Description be allowed or denied Password Enter the password which the user User Name shall use for identification to gain access to the CAPI service Access Select whether access to the CAPI service is to be permitted or denied for the user The function is activated by selecting Enabled The function is enabled by default 15 5 2 Options The menu Local Services gt CAPI Server gt Options consists of the following fields Fields in the Basic Parameters menu Field Description Enable server Select whether your device is to be enabled as a CAPI server The function is activated by selecting Enabled The function is enabled by default Faxheader Select whether the fax header should be printed at the top of outgoing faxes The function is activated by selecting Enabled The function is disabled by default CAPI Server TCP Port The field can only be edited if Enable server is enabled Enter the TCP port number for remote CAPI connections The default value is 2662 Gigaset Communications GmbH 15 Local Services 15 6 Scheduling Your device has a event scheduler which ena
118. 203 Display Language 7 Displayed Description 86 88 118 122 Displayed Name 79 Gigaset Communications GmbH DNS 314 DNS Hostname 320 DNS Negotiation 235 239 247 289 295 DNS Server 249 279 298 321 328 DNS Requests 322 DNS Servers 318 DNS Test 368 Do not Disturb 128 Do not Disturb 388 Domain 61 321 Domain Forwarding 320 Domain at the HotSpot Server 359 Domain Name 316 Doorcom Access 103 Doorcom Signalling 9 Doorcom Signalling 166 Doorcom Units 164 Doorcom Signalling Variant 1 and 2 167 Downstream Bandwidth Limitation 69 Drop non members 184 Drop In 220 Drop In Groups 220 Drop untagged frames 184 Dropped 393 395 Dropping Algorithm 212 DSA Key Status 26 DSCP TOS Value 189 DSCP Settings for rtp Traffic 71 DSCP Settings for sip Traffic 74 DSCP TOS Filter Layer 3 201 214 362 DSP Module 3 DTMF 72 Duration 157 157 Dynamic RADIUS Authentication 280 DynDNS Provider 326 DynDNS Update 324 DynDNS Client 324 E E mail 46 Gigaset Communications GmbH E mail Address 84 E Mail Notification 173 E Mail Address from User Settings 173 Early media support 65 Enable update 324 Enable IPSec 279 Enable server 334 Enable VLAN 185 Enabled 299 Enabled number 136 Encrypt configuration 340 Encrypted 393 Encryption 36 244 288 294 Encryption Algorithms 26 End of Selection Signal 59 Entries 153 247 Entry active 31 35 Errors 391 393 Ethernet Ports
119. 4096 Please note that a key with a length of 512 bits could be rated as unsecure whereas a key of 4096 bits not only needs a lot of time to create but also occupies a major share of the re sources during IPSec processing A value of 768 or more is however recommended and the default value is 1024 bits SCEP URL Only for Mode SCEP Enter the URL of the SCEP server e g ht tp scep bintec elmeg com 8080 scep scep dll Your CA administrator can provide you with the necessary data CA Certificate Only for Mode SCEP Select the CA certificate e In Download In CA Name enter the name of the CA certificate of the certification authority CA from which you wish to request your certificate e g cawindows Your CA administrator can provide you with the necessary data If no CA certificates are available the device will first down load the CA certificate of the relevant CA It then continues with the enrolment process provided no more important parameters are missing In this case it returns to the Gener ate Certificate Request menu If the CA certificate does not contain a CRL distribution point Certificate Revocation List CRL and a certificate server is not configured on the device the validity of certificates from this CA is not checked e lt name of an existing certificate gt If all the necessary certific ates are already available in the system you select these manually RA Sign Certificate Only f
120. 51 Ethernet Interface Selection 52 Event Type 336 Event List 336 340 Event List Condition 340 Exclude from NAT DMZ 220 Explicit Call Transfer 17 Export call data records 159 Extended Route 192 Extension Rerouting 9 External Assignment 108 167 External Connection Timer 170 External Filename 48 49 External Number 105 161 External Number 157 External Reporting 379 External Door Connections 16 F Facility 380 Fallback interface to get DNS server 316 Faxheader 334 Features 94 File Encoding 48 49 Index File Name 340 File Name in Flash 340 Filename 370 Filter 203 Filter Rules 306 Filter Rules 303 Firewall 302 Firewall Status 307 Firmware Update 377 Firmware Files 376 First Timeserver 14 First External Number 171 Flash Time for DTMF Dialling 129 Force certificate to be trusted 42 Forward 321 Forwardto 321 Forwarded Requests 322 Forwarding 228 From Domain 65 Full Filtering 307 Further Rerouting 111 162 Further Rerouting 389 FXO 57 FXS 59 FXS Ringing Frequency 129 G G 711 aLaw 72 G 711 uLaw 72 G 722 72 G 726 16 kbit s 72 G 726 24 kbit s 72 G 726 32 kbit s 72 G 726 40 kbit s 72 G 726 Codec settings 72 G 729 72 Gateway 192 329 Gateway IP Address 188 General 106 116 120 137 149 156 158 160 164 166 177 224 356 Generate international phone number 65 Generate national subscriber number Index 65 Generate Private Key 44 Gigaset Phone
121. 8 42 2 for example and the second subnet has two hosts with the IP addresses 192 168 46 1 and 192 168 46 2 To be able to exchange data packets with the first subnet your device uses the IP address 192 168 42 3 for example and 192 168 46 3 for the second subnet The netmasks for both subnets must also be indicated 9 1 1 1 Edit or New Choose the 3 icon to edit existing entries Choose the New button to create virtual inter faces The LAN gt IP Configuration gt Interfaces gt New menu consists of the following fields Fields in the Basic Parameters menu Field Description Based on Ethernet In This field is only displayed if you are editing a virtual routing in terface terface Select the Ethernet interface for which the virtual interface is to be configured Address Mode Select how an IP address is assigned to the interface Possible values e Static default value The interface is assigned a static IP address in IP Address Netmask DHCP An IP address is assigned to the interface dynamically via DHCP IP Address Netmask Only for Address Mode Static With Add add a new address entry enter the IP Address and the corresponding Netmask of the virtual interface Interface Mode Only for physical interfaces in routing mode Select the configuration mode of the interface Gigaset Communications GmbH 9 LAN Field Description Possible values e Untagged default value The interface is not assigned
122. ADIUS servers for a group are queried according to Priority and the Policy Possible values e New default value Enter a new group description in the text field e Default Group 0 Select this entry for special applica tions such as Hotspot Server configuration e lt Group Name gt Select a predefined group from the list The Advanced Settings menu consists of the following fields Fields in the Advanced Settings menu Field Value Policy Select how your device is to react if a negative response to a Gigaset Communications GmbH 2 System Management Field Value request is received Possible values e Authoritative default value A negative response to a request is accepted e Non authoritative A negative response to a request is not accepted A request is sent to the next RADIUS server until your device receives a response from a server con figured as authoritative UDP Port Enter the UDP port to be used for RADIUS data RFC 2138 defines the default ports 1812 for authentication 1645 in older RFCs and 1813 for accounting 1646 in older RFCs You can obtain the port to be used from the document ation for your RADIUS server The default value is 1812 Server Timeout Enter the maximum wait time between ACCESS_REQUEST and response in milliseconds After timeout the request is repeated according to Retries or the next configured RADIUS server is requested Possible values are whole numbers between 50
123. Back Route Verify 260 Back Route Verify 192 Back up of configuration on SD card 2 Based on Ethernet Interface 180 Basic Settings 90 BellID 166 BellName 166 Block after connection failure for 235 239 244 288 294 Block Time 36 270 BOSS 370 BOSS Version 2 Burst size 209 Busy on busy 85 110 Busy on busy 389 Busy starting with 111 Busy Tone Detection 59 Busy when 162 Bytes 391 Cc CA Certificate 44 Gigaset Communications GmbH CA Certificates 270 CAName 340 Cache 322 Cache Hitrate 322 Cache Hits 322 Cache Size 316 Calendar 141 Calendar for status Out of Office 173 Call Forwarding extern SIP 302 65 Call Number 247 Call Switching 148 Call Through 90 96 153 Call Waiting 96 128 Call Forwarding 388 389 Call Waiting 388 Call Forwarding 133 Call Distribution 112 Call Center Description 161 Call Data Records 156 Call Forwarding CFNR 16 Call Forwarding to External Numbers 106 Call Hold inside the PBX system 65 78 Call Routing 132 Call Signalisation Timer 167 Call prefix 138 Callback 296 Callback Mode 244 Called Number 157 CAPI 130 CAPI Server 333 CAPI Server TCP Port 334 Certificate Request 44 Certificate List 42 Certificate Servers 50 Certificate is CA Certificate 42 Certificate Request Description 44 340 Certificate Revocation List CRL Checking 42 Certificates 41 Channel Bundling 246 Gigaset Communications GmbH Charge Informatio
124. DHCP pools En Note In the ex works state the DHCP pool is preconfigured with the IP addresses 192 168 0 10 to 192 168 0 49 and is used if there is no other DHCP server available in the network Gigaset Communications GmbH 15 Local Services 15 4 2 1 Edit or New Choose the New button to set up new IP address pools Choose the o icon to edit exist ing entries The Local Services gt DHCP Server gt DHCP Configuration gt New menu consists of the following fields Fields in the menu Basic Parameters Field Description Interface Select the interface over which the addresses defined in IP Ad dress Range are to be assigned to DHCP clients When a DHCP request is received over this Interface one of the addresses from the address pool is assigned IP Pool Name Enter any description to uniquely identify the IP pool Pool Usage Specify whether the IP pool is used for DHCP requests in the same subnet or for DHCP requests that have been forwarded to your device from another subnet In this case it is possible to define IP addresses from another network Possible values e Local default value The DHCP pool is only used for DH CP requests in the same subnet e Relay The DHCP pool is only used for DHCP requests for warded from other subnets e Local Relay The DHCP pool is used for DHCP requests in the same subnet and from other subnets The menu Advanced Settings consists of the following fields Fields in the menu
125. DNS Update In the Local Services gt DynDNS Client gt DynDNS Update menu a list of all configured DynDNS registrations for updating is displayed 15 3 1 1 New Choose the New button to set up further DynDNS registrations to be updated The menu Local Services gt DynDNS Client gt DynDNS Update gt New consists of the fol lowing fields Fields in the Basic Parameters menu Field Description Host Name Enter the complete host name as registered with the DynDNS provider Gigaset Communications GmbH 15 Local Services Field Description Interface Select the WAN interface whose IP address is to be propag ated over the DynDNS service e g the interface of the Internet Service Provider User Name Enter the user name as registered with the DynDNS provider Password Enter the password as registered with the DynDNS provider Provider Select the DynDNS provider with which the above data is re gistered A choice of DynDNS providers is already available in the un configured state and their protocols are supported Other DynDNS providers can be configured in the Local Ser vices gt DynDNS Client gt DynDNS Provider menu The default value is DynDNS Enable update Select whether the DynDNS entry configured here is to be ac tivated The function is activated by selecting Enabled The function is disabled by default The menu Advanced Settings consists of the following fields Fields in the Advanced Settings menu Field De
126. FXO Port Only for Access Type ISDN P MP Select the description for the port via which this external con nection is connected Ports Only for Access Type ISDN P P or FXO Select the description for the port via which this external con nection is connected All free external ISDN interfaces are available Use the Add button to select other ports in order e g to con figure a party line Fields in the Outgoing Signalisation Settings menu Field Description Outgoing Signalisation Select the signal you want for outgoing calls Possible values e Standard default value e Global CLIP no Screening Number e Individual CLIP no Screening Number e Fixed Out DDI Global CLIP no Only for Outgoing Signalisation Global CLIP no Screening Number Screening Number Here you can enter a number to be displayed with the called party for all outbound external calls This number is not checked Signal remote caller Only for Outgoing Signalisation Global CLIP no number Screening Number and Individual CLIP no Screen ing Number You can display the number of an external subscriber if it is signalled 5 Numbering Gigaset Communications GmbH Field Description The function is enabled with Enabled The function is disabled by default Signal fixed out num Only for Outgoing Signalisation Fixed Out DDI ber You can display a fixed number for all outbound external calls e g your head office number The menu
127. Internet access you must set up a connection to your Internet Ser vice Provider ISP For broadband Internet access your device provides the PPP over Ethernet PPPoE PPP over PPTP and PPP over ATM PPPoA protocols You can also configure Internet access over ISDN C Note Note your provider s instructions Dialin connections over ISDN are used to establish a connection to networks or hosts out side your LANs All the entered connections are displayed in a list which contains the Description the User Name the Authentication and the current Status The Status field can have the following values Possible values for Status Field Description connected e not connected dialup connection connection setup possible 4 not connected e g because of an error during setup of an out going connection a renewed attempt is only possible after a Gigaset Communications GmbH 12 WAN Field Description specified number of seconds o administratively set to down deactivated connection setup not possible for leased lines Default Route With a default route all data is automatically forwarded to one connection if no other suit able route is available Access to the Internet should always be set up as the default route to the Internet Service Provider ISP Further information on possible route types can be found under Networking gt Routes Activating NAT With Network Address Translation NAT you conceal your w
128. L2TP connections The function is enabled with Enabled The function is enabled by default Prioritize TCP ACK Select whether the TCP download is to be optimised in the Packets event of intensive TCP upload This function can be specially applied for asymmetrical bandwidths ADSL The function is enabled with Enabled The function is disabled by default Fields in the IP Options menu Field Description OSPF Mode Select whether and how routes are propagated via the inter face and or OSPF protocol packets are sent 13 VPN Gigaset Communications GmbH Field Description Possible values e Passive default value OSPF is not activated for this inter face i e no routes are propagated or OSPF protocol packets sent over this interface Networks reachable over this inter face are however included when calculating the routing in formation and propagated over active interfaces e Active OSPF is activated for this interface i e routes are propagated or OSPF protocol packets sent over this inter face e Inactive OSPF is disabled for this interface Proxy ARP Mode Select whether your device is to respond to ARP requests from its own LAN on behalf of the specific L2TP partner Possible values e Inactive default value Deactivates Proxy ARP for this L2TP partner e Up or Dormant Your device only responds to an ARP re quest if the status of the connection to the L2TP partner is Up active or Dormant In the ca
129. MENTE O MNGi SIERE o 112 O Jes ig I O IES O JUNE Gig JOP SS O IIe e Kryptolan STATE SEOSER e VRRP EAN SUD 0 Gigaset Edition 10 Networking Gigaset Communications GmbH Field Description Source IP Address Only for Type of traffic incoming Destination NAT Netmask or excluding Without NAT Enter the source IP address and corresponding netmask of the original data packets as the case arises Original Destination IP Only for Type of traffic incoming Destination NAT Address Netmask Enter the destination IP address and corresponding netmask of the original data packets as the case arises Original Destination Only for Type of traffic incoming Destination NAT Port Range Service user defined and Protocol TCP UDP TCP UDP Enter the destination port or the destination port range of the original data packets The default setting Al1 means that the port is not specified Original Source IP Ad Only for Type of traffic outgoing Source NAT dress Netmask Enter the source IP address and corresponding netmask of the original data packets as the case arises Original Source Port Only for Type of traffic outgoing Source NAT NAT Range method symmetric Service user defined and Pro tocol TCP UDP TCP UDP Enter the source port of the original data packets The default setting A11 means that the port remains unspecified If you select Specify port you can specify a s
130. Mode Static Assign the IP address from your LAN to the ISDN interface which is to be used as your device s internal source address Route Entries Only if IP Address Mode Static Define other routing entries for this connection partner e Remote IP Address IP address of the destination host or network e Netmask Netmask for Remote IP Address If no entry is made your device uses a default netmask e Metric The lower the value the higher the priority of the route range of values 0 15 The default value is 7 12 WAN Gigaset Communications GmbH Field Description IP Assignment Pool Only if IP Address Mode Provide IP Address Select IP pools configured in the WAN gt Internet Dialup gt IP Pools menu If an IP pool has not been configured here yet the message Not yet defined appears in this field The menu Advanced Settings consists of the following fields Fields in the Advanced Settings menu Field Description Block after connection Enter the wait time in seconds before the device should try failure for again after an attempt to set up a connection has failed The default value is 300 Maximum Number of Enter the number of unsuccessful attempts to setup a connec Dialup Retries tion before the interface is blocked Possible values are 0 to 100 The default value is 5 Usage Type If necessary select a special interface use Possible values e Standard default value No special type is selected
131. Name Shows the name of the analogue interface Possible values e FXS Name for the analogue connection Usage Shows the function of the analogue interface Possible values e Telephone Doorcom Units e Multi Function Device Telefax Modem e Answering Machine e Emergency Phone The function of the analogue terminal is configured in the Ter minals gt Other phones gt analog menu Status Displays the status of the interface hybird 120 Gigaset Edition Chapter 4 VoIP Voice over IP VoIP uses the IP protocol for voice and video transmission The main difference compared with conventional telephony is that the voice information is not transmitted over a switched connection in a telephone network but divided into data packets by the Internet protocol and these packets are then passed to the destination over undefined paths in a network This technology uses the existing network infrastruc ture for voice transmission and shares this with other communication services 4 1 Settings You set up your VoIP connections in the VoIP gt Settings menu You can telephone over the internet using all internally connected telephones The num ber of connections depends on various parameters e The availability of the system s free channels e The available bandwidth of the DSL connection e The configured available SIP providers e The SIP out licenses that have been entered 4 1 1 SIP Provider You configure the SIP prov
132. O CCEE e apple qt O Exrela e charge o clients d e daytime e dhcp O ehisecuad The default value is User defined Protocol Select a protocol The Any option default value matches any protocol Type Only for Protocol TCMP Select the type Possible values Any Echo reply Destination un reachable Source quench Redirect Echo Time ex ceeded Timestamp Timestamp reply See RFC 792 The default value is Any 10 Networking Gigaset Communications GmbH Field Description Connection State With Protocol TCP you can define a filter that takes the status of the TCP connections into account Possible values e Established All TCP packets that would not open any new TCP connection on routing over the gateway match the filter e Any default value All TCP packets match the filter Destination IP Ad Enter the destination IP address of the data packets and the dress Netmask corresponding netmask Destination Port Only for Protocol TCP or UDP Range Enter a destination port number or a range of destination port numbers Possible values e A11 default value The destination port is not specified e Specify port Enter a destination port e Specify port range Enter a destination port range Source IP Address Enter the source IP address of the data packets and the cor Netmask responding netmask Only for Protocol TCP or UDP Source Port Range Enter a source port number or
133. Office default value Select this setting if the subscriber is in the office when the voicemail system is star ted 8 Applications Gigaset Communications GmbH Field Description e Out of Office Select this setting if the subscriber is out of office when the voicemail system is started Check PIN Select whether the currently configured voicemail box should be protected with a PIN The function is enabled with Enabled The function is disabled by default You can change the PIN for the personal voice box in the Numbering gt User Settings gt Users gt Authorizations under PIN for Phone Access Mode for status In the The voicemail box can be operated with two different settings Office during office hours Possible values Announcement and Record default value A caller hears an announcement and can leave a message e Announcement only A caller hears an announcement but cannot leave a message Mode for status Out The voicemail box can be operated with two different settings of Office outside of office hours Possible values Announcement only default value A caller hears an an nouncement but cannot leave a message e Announcement and Record A caller hears an an nouncement and can leave a message 8 9 2 Status In the Applications gt Voice Mail gt Status menu the status of the individual voicemail boxes for specific subscribers is indicated You can see how many calls have gone into which voice
134. Static Define other routing entries for this connection partner Add new entries with Add e Remote IP Address IP address of the destination host or network e Netmask Netmask for Remote IP Address If no entry is made your device uses a default netmask e Metric The lower the value the higher the priority of the route range of values 0 15 The default value is 7 The menu Advanced Settings consists of the following fields Fields in the Advanced Settings menu Field Description Block after connection Enter the wait time in seconds before the device should try failure for again after an attempt to set up a connection has failed The default value is 60 Maximum Number of Enter the number of unsuccessful attempts to setup a connec Dialup Retries tion before the interface is blocked 12 WAN Gigaset Communications GmbH Field Description Possible values are 0 to 100 The default value is 5 Authentication Select the authentication protocol for this connection partner Select the authentication specified by your provider Possible values PAP default value Only run PAP PPP Password Authentic ation Protocol the password is transferred unencrypted e CHAP Only run CHAP PPP Challenge Handshake Authen tication Protocol as per RFC 1994 password is transferred encrypted e PAP CHAP Primarily run CHAP otherwise PAP e MS CHAPv1 Only run MS CHAP version 1 PPP Microsoft Challenge Handshake Authenticat
135. The Monitoring gt IPSec gt IPSec Statistics menu consists of the following fields Fields in the Licences menu Field Description IPSec Tunnels Shows the IPSec licences currently in use In Use and the maximum number of licenses usable Maximum Fields in the Peers menu Field Description Status Displays the number of IPSec tunnels by their current status e Up Currently active IPSec tunnels e Going up IPSec tunnels currently in the tunnel setup phase Blocked IPSec tunnels that are blocked Dormant Currently inactive IPSec tunnels Gigaset Communications GmbH 18 Monitoring Field Description e Configured Configured IPSec tunnels Fields in the SAs menu Field Description IKE Phase 1 Shows the number of active phase 1 SAs Established from the total number of phase 1 SAs Total IPSec Phase 2 Shows the number of active phase 2 SAs Established from the total number of phase 2 SAs Total Fields in the Packet Statistics menu Field Description Total Shows the number of all processed incoming In or outgoing Out packets Passed Shows the number of incoming In or outgoing Out packets forwarded in plain text Dropped Shows the number of all rejected incoming In or outgoing Out packets Encrypted Shows the number of all incoming In or outgoing Out pack ets protected by IPSec Errors Shows the number of incoming In or outgoing Out packets for which processing led to errors
136. The latest software will be downloaded from an HTTPS server that you define in Server URL e TFTP Server The latest software will be downloaded from an TFTP server that you define in Server URL Server URL Where Command Type Software Update if Source Loc 15 Local Services Gigaset Communications GmbH Field Description ation not Current Software from Update Server Enter the URL of the server from which the desired software version is to be retrieved Where Command Type Configuration Management with Action Import configuration Or Ex port configuration Enter the URL of the server from which a configuration file is to be retrieved or on which the configuration file is to be backed up File Name For Command Type Software Update Enter the file name of the software version Where Command Type Certificate Management with Action Import certificate Enter the file name of the certificate file Action For Command Type Configuration Management Select which operation is to be performed on a configuration file Possible values Import configuration default value e Export configuration e Rename configuration e Delete configuration e Copy configuration For Command Type Certificate Management Select which operation you wish to perform on a certificate file Possible values e Import certificate default value e Delete certificate IES CHE Gigaset Communications GmbH 15 Local Services Fiel
137. a lifetime for phase 1 keys As for RFC 2407 the default value is eight hours which means the key must be renewed once eight hours have elapsed The following options are available for defining the Lifetime e Input in Seconds Enter the lifetime for phase 1 key in seconds The value can be a whole number from 0 to 2147483647 The default value is 14400 e Input in kBytes Enter the lifetime for phase 1 keys as amount of data processed in kBytes The value can be a whole number from 0 to 2147483647 The default value is 0 The default value as per RFC is used 0 seconds and 0 Kbytes are entered Authentication Method Only for Phase 1 IKE Parameters Select the authentication method Possible values e Preshared Keys default value If you do not use certific ates for the authentication you can select Preshared Keys These are configured during peer configuration in the Gigaset Communications GmbH 13 VPN Field Description IPSec gt IPSec Peers The preshared key is the shared pass word e DSA Signature Phase 1 key calculations are authentic ated using the DSA algorithm e RSA Signature Phase 1 key calculations are authentic ated using the RSA algorithm e RSA Encryption In RSA encryption the ID payload is also encrypted for additional security Local Certificate Only for Phase 1 IKE Parameters Only for Authentication Method DSA Signature RSA Signature Or RSA Encryption This field enables you to select
138. a range of source port numbers Possible values e A11 default value The destination port is not specified e Specify port Enter a destination port e Specify port range Enter a destination port range DSCP TOS Filter Select the Type of Service TOS Layer 3 Possible values e Ignore default value The type of service is ignored e DSCP Binary Value Differentiated Services Code Point according to RFC 3260 is used to signal the priority of IP Gigaset Communications GmbH 10 Networking Field Description packets indicated in binary format 6 bit DSCP Decimal Value Differentiated Services Code Point according to RFC 3260 is used to signal the priority of IP packets indicated in decimal format DSCP Hexadecimal Value Differentiated Services Code Point according to RFC 3260 is used to signal the priority of IP packets indicated in hexadecimal format e TOS Binary Value The TOS value is specified in binary format e g 00111111 e TOS Decimal Value The TOS value is specified in decim al format e g 63 e TOS Hexadecimal Value The TOS value is specified in hexadecimal format e g 3F COS Filter Enter the service class of the IP packets Class of Service 802 1p Layer 2 CoS Possible values are whole numbers between 0 and 7 Value range 0 to 7 The default value is 0 10 3 2 QoS Classification The data traffic is classified in the Networking gt QoS gt QoS Classification menu
139. acter string of between 0 and 255 characters is pos sible The default value is SNMP Trap 17 4 2 SNMP Trap Hosts In this menu you specify the IP addresses to which your device is to send the SNMP traps In the External Reporting gt SNMP gt SNMP Trap Hosts menu a list of all configured SN MP trap hosts is displayed 17 4 2 1 New Select the Newbutton to create additional SNMP trap hosts The menu External Reporting gt SNMP gt SNMP Trap Hosts gt New consists of the follow ing fields Fields in the Basic Parameters menu Field Description IP Address Enter the IP address of the SNMP trap host 18 Monitoring Gigaset Communications GmbH Chapter 18 Monitoring This menu contains information that enable you to locate problems in your network and monitor activities e g at your device s WAN interface 18 1 Status Information This menu displays current settings for terminals and team subscribers This data is con tinuously read out 18 1 1 Users In the Monitoring gt Status Information gt Users menu current settings for a user s intern al number MSN are displayed By pressing the P button you display detailed statistics on the respective user Values in the Extension Status list Field Description Number Displays the user s internal number Name Displays the name assigned to the user If a voicemail system is active Voice Mail Systemis dis played Current Class of Ser Displays the all
140. ain name or a new IP address for the SIP proxy server If you do not make an entry the entry in the Registrar field is used Note Enter a name or IP address only if this is explicitly spe cified by the provider Fields in the Outgoing Signalisation Settings menu Field Description Outgoing Signalisation Select the signal you want for outgoing calls Possible values e Standard default value e Global CLIP no Screening Number Gigaset Communications GmbH 4 VoIP Field Description e Individual CLIP no Screening Number e Fixed Out DDI Only for Access Type Direct Dial In Global CLIP no Only for Outgoing Signalisation Global CLIP no Screening Number Screening Number Enter the number that is to be displayed to the person called with any outward connection This number is not checked Signal remote caller Only for Outgoing Signalisation Global CLIP no number Screening Number and Individual CLIP no Screen ing Number You can display the number of an external subscriber if it is signalled The function is enabled with Enabled The function is disabled by default Signal fixed out num Only for Outgoing Signalisation Fixed Out DDI ber Enter the number that is to be displayed to the person called with any outward connection Fields in the Registrar menu Field Description Registrar Enter the DNS name or IP address of the SIP server A 26 digit alpha numeric sequence is possible Registrar P
141. al number is already in use First configure another user with additional numbers e lt Internal Number gt Select one of the existing numbers of the configured users Fields in the Phone Settings menu Field Description Call Waiting Select whether call waiting shall be allowed for this device The function is activated by selecting Enabled The function is enabled by default Do not Disturb Select whether you wish to use the call protection do not dis turb performance feature With this performance feature you can enable call signalling to your terminal Analogue terminals use system code numbers for this Possible values e Internal Calls not signaled e External Calls not signaled e No Calls signaled The menu Advanced Settings consists of the following fields Fields in the CLIP Settings menu Gigaset Communications GmbH 6 Terminals Field Description Show incoming Num Select whether the subscriber s number shall be transmitted ber CLIP The function is activated by selecting Enabled The function is enabled by default Show Date and Time Only for Show incoming Number CLIP Enabled Select whether the time and date should be taken from your hybird and displayed on the telephone The function is activated by selecting Enabled The function is enabled by default Show incoming Name Only for Show incoming Number CLIP Enab1ed CNIP Select whether the caller s number shall be displayed The
142. al Control c a e bo oa a a A 135 7 1 4 Priority Numbers aao ee ee 136 7 2 Automatic Route Selection 2 2 en 137 7 2 1 General 25 ada ts a A Ge ee 137 72 2 Interfaces Provider 2 2 o eo o 138 7 2 3 Zones amp ROuULING e i a eo a ae 139 hybird 120 Gigaset Edition Chapter 8 ApplicatiOnS o o e 141 8 1 Calendar fe wore is Re n age i eee e E S dic Ata dde G 141 8 1 1 Calendar sip sis hae is di ee 141 8 1 2 PublicsHoliday arraig kh en hy bo ee aE ce ts Pe 144 8 2 FROMOUTIG Anie e a sat acyl tare Lat ce ge erate tee nel ioe Seb pyle stam Sat ete ESE 145 8 2 1 Rerouting Functions a a a a a 0 145 8 2 2 Rerouting Applications ooa a a a 149 8 3 Voice Applications o o 150 8 3 1 Wave Files Dar A A SG 151 8 4 System Phonebook 2 ee a ae nE aa 152 8 4 1 EMOS 14 2 Sp ees a A it 153 8 4 2 Import EXPOrb is aaa Sa eee Se AS a 154 8 4 3 General ivi 2S a as RGA aa ee a e Sa as es 156 8 5 Call Data Records 0 000022 eee 156 8 5 1 A 156 8 5 2 Incoming 2 a re A a a i 157 8 5 3 Generale a o A A A als 158 8 6 Mini Call Center ee e 159 8 6 1 SUS is to ti ic tino A o be 160 8 6 2 LINCS condal a A ea at te a Ae ord i 160 8 6 3 AJOS E oil nx co rr e ee Hee oe Bee te eh Ow BP Go pil ae 163 8 6 4 General di ia tte Bde Salat Wee a A es 164 8 7 Doorc
143. al the priority of IP packets indicated in hexadecimal format e TOS Binary Value The TOS value is specified in binary format e g 00111111 e TOS Decimal Value The TOS value is specified in decim al format e g 63 e TOS Hexadecimal Value The TOS value is specified in hexadecimal format e g 3F 4 1 3 Codec Profiles In the VoIP gt Settings gt Codec Profiles you can define the various codec profiles to control voice quality and set up specific provider dependent default settings When setting up the codec remember that a good voice quality requires a corresponding bandwidth so that the number of simultaneous calls will be restricted The remote terminal also has to support the relevant codec choice 4 VoIP 4 1 3 1 Edit or New Gigaset Communications GmbH Choose the Fa icon to edit existing entries Select the New button to create new entries The menu VoIP gt Settings gt Codec Profiles gt New consists of the following fields Fields in the Basic Parameters menu Field Description Description Codec Proposal Se quence G 711 uLaw G 711 aLaw Enter a description for the entry Choose the order in which the codecs are offered for use by the system If the first codec cannot be used the second is tried and so on Possible values e Default default value the codec in the first position in the menu will be used if possible e Quality The codecs are sorted by quality The codec with the best
144. all is signalled to the entered team subscribers If a subscriber takes the call the connection to the caller is established If a team is called it can be defined in configuration that the call is automatically accepted and that the caller hears an announcement or music The target subscriber s are called during this time After the receiver is picked up the announcement or music is turned off and the subscribers are connected to each other Possible settings for automatic call acceptance e Simultaneous All assigned terminals are called simultaneously If a terminal is busy call waiting can be used e Linear All assigned terminals are called in the sequence of their entry in configura tion If a terminal is engaged the next free terminal is called The call is signalled ca 15 seconds per subscriber This period can be set between 1 and 99 seconds per team in the configuration If subscribers are on the phone or logged out there is not forwarding time for these e Rotating This call is a special case of the linear call After all terminals are called call signalling begins again with the first entered terminal The call is signaled until the caller replaces the receiver or the call is ended by the exchange after ca 2 minutes e Adding The terminals are called in the order of their entry in the subscriber list Every terminal that has already been called is called again until all entered terminals are called e Linear Sim
145. all put through from the system via another external connection C Note In the connection data records one data record is created for the incoming connection and one for the outgoing connection Fields in the Further Options menu Field Description Call Through Select whether Call Through should be authorised for this user The function is activated by selecting Enabled The function is disabled by default When you enable the function you must select under Use routing and signalisation from number the internal number from which the authorised external lines and call options for Call Through shall be used 5 2 2 Class of Services In the Numbering gt User Settings gt Class of Services CoS the functions and perform ance features for the user settings are defined These authorisation classes can then be assigned to individual users user groups in the user settings Choose the 3 icon to edit existing entries Choose the New button to create additional authorisation classes The authorisation class Default Cos is configured by default 5 2 2 1 Basic Settings In the menu Numbering gt User Settings gt Class of Services gt Basic Settings the basic settings along with the name for the new authorisation class are defined The authorisa tion class can be located via the name The Numbering gt User Settings gt Class of Services gt Basic Settings menu consists of the following fields Gigaset Communications GmbH 5 Numbering
146. and 50000 The default value is 1000 1 second Alive Check Here you can activate a check of the accessibility of a RADIUS server in Status Down An Alive Check is carried out regularly every 20 seconds by sending an ACCESS_REQUEST to the IP address of the RA DIUS server If the server is reachable Status is set to alive again If the RADIUS server is only reachable over a switched line dialup connection this can cause additional costs if the server is down for a long time The function is activated by selecting Enabled The function is enabled by default Retries Enter the number of retries for cases when there is no re 2 System Management Gigaset Communications GmbH Field Value sponse to a request If an response has still not been received after these attempts the Status is set to down In Alive Check Enabled your device attempts to reach the server every 20 seconds If the server responds Status is set back to alive Possible values are whole numbers between 0 and 10 The default value is 7 To prevent Status being set to down set this value to 0 RADIUS Dialout Only for Authentication Type PPP Authentication and IPSec Authentication Select whether your device receives requests from RADIUS server dialout routes This enables temporary interfaces to be configured automatically and your device can initiate outgoing connections that are not configured permanently The function is activated by selectin
147. answers an APR request only if the status of the connection to the PPTP partner is Active i e if a connection to the PPTP partner has already been estab lished DNS Negotiation Select whether your device receives IP addresses for Primary DNS Server and Secondary DNS Server from the PPTP part ner or sends these to the PPTP partner The function is enabled with Enabled The function is enabled by default Fields in the PPTP Callback menu Field Description Callback Enables a PPTP tunnel through the Internet to be set up with a PPTP partner even if the partner is currently inaccessible As a rule the PPTP partner will be requested by means of an ISDN call to go online and set up a PPTP connection The function is enabled with Enabled The function is disabled by default Note that you must activate the relevant option on the gate ways of both partners An ISDN connection is usually required Gigaset Communications GmbH 13 VPN Field Description for this function Without ISDN callback is only to be activated in special applications Incoming ISDN Num Only if Callback is enabled ber Enter the ISDN number from which the remote device calls the local device calling party number Outgoing ISDN Num Only if Callback is enabled ber Enter the ISDN number with which the local device calls the re mote device calls called party number Fields in the Dial Port Selection only if callback activated Fiel
148. ask Interfaces Only for Type Interfaces Indicate the interfaces to which the devices of a SIP location are connected Click Add to select a new interface Under Interface select the interface you want Upstream Bandwidth Determine whether the upstream bandwidth is to be restricted Limitation The bandwidth is reduced with Enabled The function is disabled by default Maximum Upstream Enter the maximum data rate in the send direction in kBits per Bandwidth second Downstream Band Determine whether the downstream bandwidth is to be restric width Limitation ted The bandwidth is reduced with Enabled Gigaset Communications GmbH 4 VoIP Field Description The function is disabled by default Maximum Downstream Enter the maximum data rate in the receive direction in kBits Bandwidth per second The menu Advanced Settings consists of the following fields Fields in the Advanced Settings menu Field Description DSCP Settings for rtp Select the Type of Service TOS for RTP data Traffic Possible values e DSCP Binary Value Differentiated Services Code Point according to RFC 3260 is used to signal the priority of IP packets indicated in binary format 6 bit DSCP Decimal Value Differentiated Services Code Point according to RFC 3260 is used to signal the priority of IP packets indicated in decimal format DSCP Hexadecimal Value Differentiated Services Code Point according to RFC 3260 is used to sign
149. ated by selecting Enabled The function is enabled by default Negative Cache Select whether the negative dynamic cache is to be activated i e whether queried names for which a DNS server has sent a negative response are stored as negative entries in the cache The function is activated by selecting Enabled The function is enabled by default Cache Size Enter the maximum total number of static and dynamic entries Once this value is reached the dynamic entry not requested for the longest period of time is deleted when a new entry is added Cache Size is reduced by the user dynamic entries are deleted if necessary Statistical entries are not deleted Cache Size cannot be set to lower than the current number of static entries Gigaset Communications GmbH 15 Local Services Field Description Possible values 0 1000 The default value is 100 Maximum TTL for Pos Enter the value to which the TTL is to be set for a positive dy itive Cache Entries namic DNS entry in the cache if its TTL is 0 or its TTL exceeds the value for Maximum TTL for Positive Cache Entries The default value is 86400 Maximum TTL for Neg Enter the value set to which the TTL is to be set in the case of ative Cache Entries a negative dynamic entry in the cache The default value is 86400 Fallback interface to Select the interface to which a connection is set up for name get DNS server server negotiation if other name resolution attempts were not
150. ating instructions provided by the manu facturer of the intercom adapter 8 7 2 1 General In the General area you set up the basic features of intercom signalling The menu Applications gt Doorcom Units gt Doorcom Signalling gt General consists of the following fields Fields in the Basic Settings menu Field Description Description Select one of the configured intercom settings previously cre ated in the Applications gt Doorcom Units gt Doorcom Units menu Bell ID Enter an unambiguous four digit code for the bell Pressing a bell button on the intercom adapter initiates a call to the termin als entered in the assigned intercom call option Bell Name Enter a name for the bell Switch signalling Select whether the intercom call options for this bell shall be switched over a configured calendar and if so over which For every ring you can create up to two intercom call variants in the Applications gt Doorcom Units gt Doorcom Signalling gt New gt Variant menu Possible values Gigaset Communications GmbH 8 Applications Field Description No calendar only manually e lt Calendar gt Active Doorcom Vari Select which intercom call option shall be enabled by default ant for this bell after configuration The menu Advanced Settings consists of the following fields Fields in the Advanced Settings menu Field Description Call Signalisation Enter the time in seconds for which the door intercom call shall
151. atures menu consists of the following fields Fields in the Feature Authorization menu Gigaset Communications GmbH 5 Numbering Field Description Pick up Group Enter the number of the group in which calls may be picked up Call Waiting Select whether call waiting shall be allowed for this authorisa tion class The function is activated by selecting Enabled The function is enabled by default Use global rerouting Select whether global redirect shall be allowed for this author isation class The function is activated by selecting Enabled The function is disabled by default Cz Note The redirect target must be in a class of service that does not allow global redirect Switch signalling vari Select whether manual switching of call options shall be al ants manually lowed for this authorisation class The function is activated by selecting Enabled The function is disabled by default Call Through Select whether Call Through shall be allowed for this authorisa tion class The function is activated by selecting Enabled The function is enabled by default Simplex operation The simplex operation function allows you to set up a connection from a system telephone to another system telephone without this connection having to be actively accepted by the called system telephone pick up receiver switch on loudspeaker hands free As soon as the system telephone has accepted the simplex operation connection the conn
152. ault value The route can be used if the interface is up If the interface is dormant then dial and wait until the interface is up e Authoritative The route can always be used e Dialup and continue The route can be used when the interface is up If the interface is dormant then select and use the alternative route rerouting until the interface is up e Never dialup The route can be used when the interface is up e Always dialup The route can be used when the interface is up If the interface is dormant then dial and wait until the interface is up In this case an alternative interface with a poorer metric is used for routing until the interface is up 10 1 2 IPv4 Routing Table A list of all IPv4 routes is displayed in the Network gt Routes gt IPv4 Routing Table menu The routes do not all need to be active but can be activated at any time by relevant data traffic 10 Networking Gigaset Communications GmbH Fields in the menu IPv4 Routing Table Field Description Destination IP Address Displays the IP address of the destination host or destination network Netmask Displays the netmask of the destination host or destination net work Gateway Displays the gateway IP address Nothing is displayed here when routes are received by DHCP Interface Displays the interface used for this route Metric Displays the route s priority The lower the value the higher the priority of the route
153. be used as sender address for the ping test Possible values e Automatic default value The IP address of the interface over which the ping is sent is automatically entered as sender address e Specific Enter the desired IP address in the input field Status Only for Event Type Ping Test Select whether Destination IP Address Reacheable must be default value or Unreacheab e in order to initiate the opera Gigaset Communications GmbH 15 Local Services Field Description tion Interval Only for Event Type Ping Test Enter the time in Seconds after which a ping must be resent The default value is 60 seconds Trials Only for Event Type Ping Test Enter the number of ping tests to be performed until Destina tion IP Address as Unreacheable applies The default value is 3 Monitored Certificate Only for Event Type Certificate Lifetime Select the certificate whose validity should be checked Remaining Validity Only for Event Type Certificate Lifetime Enter the desired value for the remaining validity of the certific ate in percentage Fields in the menu Select time interval Field Description Time Condition For Event Type Time only First select the type of time entry in Condition Type Possible values Weekday Select a weekday in Condition Settings e Periods default value In Condition Settings select a particular period e Day of Month Select a specific day of the month in Con dition Setting
154. ble values e LNS default value If you select this option the L2TP part ner is configured so that it accepts L2TP tunnels and re stores the encapsulated PPP traffic flow e LAC If you select this option the L2TP partner is configured so that it encapsulates a PPP traffic flow in L2TP and sets up a L2TP tunnel to a remote LNS Only for Connection Type LAC Select a profile created in the Tunnel Profile menu for the con nection to this L2TP partner Enter the code of your device Enter the password Select whether the interface should always be activated Gigaset Communications GmbH 13 VPN Field Description The function is enabled with Enabled The function is disabled by default Connection Idle Only if Always on is disabled Timeout Enter the idle time in seconds for static short hold The static short hold setting determines how many seconds should pass between sending the last traffic data packet and clearing the connection Possible values are 0 to 3600 seconds 0 deactivates the short hold The default value is 300 Fields in the IP Mode and Routes menu Field Description IP Address Mode Select whether your device is to be assigned a static IP ad dress or whether it should be assigned this dynamically Possible values e Static default value You enter a static IP address e Provide IP Address Only for Connection Type LNS Your device dynamically assigns an IP address to the remote term
155. bles certain standard actions for example activating and deactivating interfaces to be carried out Moreover every existing MIB variable can be configured with any value You specify the Actions you want and define the Trigger that control when and under which conditions the Actions are to be carried out A Trigger may be a single event or a sequence of events which are combined into an Event List You also create an event list for a single event but it only contains one event Actions can be initiated on a time controlled basis Moreover the status or accessibility of interfaces or their data traffic may lead to execution of the configured actions or also the validity of licences Here also it is possible to set up every MIB variable as initiator with any value To take the event scheduler live enable the Schedule Interval under Options This inter val species the time gap in which the system checks whether at least one event has oc curred This event is used as the initiator for a configured action N Caution The configuration of actions that are not available as defaults requires ex tensive knowledge of the method of operation of bintec elmeg gateways An incorrect configuration can cause considerable disruption during opera tion If applicable save the original configuration on your PC En Note To run the event scheduler the date configured on your device must be 1 1 2000 or later 15 6 1 Trigger The Local Services gt
156. cation where your system is installed With a point to point ISDN ac cess this area code is essential because otherwise e g no automatic external callback is possible National Prefix City Code The menu Advanced Settings consists of the following fields Fields in the menu Charge Settings Gigaset Communications GmbH 2 System Management Field Value Charge Rate Factor Enter the factor for the connection costs The default value is 0 00 Currency Here enter the name of the currency e g EUR max three characters This entry is just a name which is not involved in any calculation of the tariff unit factor Special characters are not permitted Charge Information Select the transmission method for charge information on the SO Upn Extension internal SO bus Possible values Keypad Depending on country and provider the charging information is transmitted so as to allow direct display by the terminal e Functional The charge information is transmitted in bin ary coded form and the terminal first needs to decode it EURO ISDN e Both default value Both protocols are recognised Fields in the menu Day Mode Field Value Global Rerouting Select the call variant in day modus that shall apply to the over all system if no specific redirect has been set up The default value is Variant 1 Night operation You can switch the system to night operation and thus enable particular call variants for
157. cations GmbH Field Description can no longer change this value Possible values are 1 to 4094 VLAN Name Enter a unique name for the VLAN A character string of up to 32 characters is possible VLAN Members Select the ports that are to belong to this VLAN You can use the Add button to add members For each entry also select whether the frames to be transmit ted from this port are to be transmitted Tagged i e with VLAN information or Untagged i e without VLAN information 9 2 2 Port Configuration In this menu you can define and view the rules for receiving frames at the VLAN ports The LAN gt VLANs gt Port Configuration menu consists of the following fields Fields in the Port Configuration menu Field Description Interface Shows the port for which you define the PVID and processing rules PVID Assign the selected port the required PVID Port VLAN Identifi er If a packet without a VLAN tag reaches this port it is assigned this PVID Drop untagged frames If this option is enabled untagged frames are discarded If the option is disabled untagged frames are tagged with the PVID defined in this menu Drop non members If this option is enabled all tagged frames that are tagged with a VLAN ID to which the selected port does not belong are dis carded 9 2 3 Administration In this menu you make general settings for a VLAN The options must be configured sep arately for each bridge group The LAN gt
158. ce of network components e Remote controlling and configuration of network components e Error detection and notification You use this menu to configure the use of SNMP The menu System Management gt Administrative Access gt SNMP consists of the fol lowing fields Fields in the Basic Settings menu Field Value SNMP Version Select the SNMP version your device is to use to listen for ex ternal SNMP access Possible values Gigaset Communications GmbH 2 System Management Field Value e vi SNMP Version 1 e v2c Community Based SNMP Version 2 e v3 SNMP Version 3 By default v1 v2c and v3 are enabled If no option is selected the function is deactivated SNMP Listen UDP Port Shows the UDP port 161 at which the device receives SN MP requests The value cannot be changed o i If your SNMP Manager supports SNMPv3 you should if possible use this version as older versions transfer all data unencrypted 2 6 Remote Authentication This menu contains the settings for user authentication 2 6 1 RADIUS RADIUS Remote Authentication Dial In User Service is a service that enables authentic ation and configuration information to be exchanged between your device and a RADIUS server The RADIUS server administrates a database with information about user authen tication and configuration and for statistical recording of connection data RADIUS can be used for e Authentication e Accounting e Exchan
159. ced Settings menu Field Description Busy Tone Detection Select whether Busy Tone Detection should be used The function is activated by selecting Enabled The function is enabled by default Dial Tone Detection Select whether Dial Tone Detection should be used The function is activated by selecting Enabled The function is enabled by default If the Dial Tone Detection is enabled and the external dial tone has been recognised your hybird 120 immediately starts to dial Dial Tone Pause Only for Dial Tone Detection disabled Enter the value you want which the system is to wait for as a maximum when dialling a telephone number before it begins dialling You can switch on the Dial Tone Pause if the hybird 120 fails to recognise the external dial tone or if no dial tone is being sent You must decide the duration of the Dial Tone Pause Possible values are whole number values between 1 second and 5 seconds End of Selection Sig Enter the time that the system is to wait after dialling a num nal ber before it considers the telephone number to be complete and makes the connection The default value is 5 seconds 3 3 2 Analogue Internal FXS The Analogue Internal FXS menu displays all of your system s available analogue in ternal connections The menu Physical Interfaces gt Analogue Ports gt Analogue Internal FXS consists of the following fields Values in the Analogue Internal FXS list Field Description
160. ch QoS was configured is displayed in the Monitoring gt QoS gt QoS menu Values in the QoS list Field Description Interface Shows the interface for which QoS has been configured QoS Queue Shows the QoS queue which has been configured for this in terface Send Shows the number of sent packets with the corresponding Field Description packet class Dropped Shows the number of rejected packets with the corresponding packet class in case of overloading Queued Shows the number of waiting packets with the corresponding packet class in case of overloading hybird 120 Gigaset Edition Gigaset Communications GmbH Index Description 58 ISDN Timeserver 14 System Admin Password 10 Gigaset DECT 119 1 2 3 47 A Access 333 Access Configuration 61 Access Filter 218 Access Level 40 Access Type 54 76 Access Filter 214 Access Profiles 38 Access Codes 19 Access Rules 213 ACCESS_ACCEPT 30 ACCESS_REJECT 30 ACCESS_REQUEST 30 ACCOUNTING_START 30 ACCOUNTING_STOP 30 Action 57 154 218 304 340 365 370 391 393 Action to be performed 351 Actions 340 Active Variant 161 169 Active Calls 160 Active Variant 173 Active Doorcom Variant 166 Active IPSec Tunnels 3 Active Sessions SIF RTP etc Active Variant Day 88 106 113 Active Variant Day 389 Add 24 Additional Traffic Filter 256 258 Additional freely accessible Domain Names 359 Additional Info for Extern Call 93 3
161. ched If an external call is signalled on another internal telephone you can pick it up by pressing this line key e Line key A system user is set up under a connection key The LED assigned to the connection key indicates the subscriber status call connection If a call is signalled Gigaset Communications GmbH 5 Numbering for this internal subscriber you can pick it up by pressing this connection key e Team key A team key is a normal line key to which the internal number of a team is as signed The LED assigned to the team key indicates the team status call connec tion If a call is signalled for this team you can pick it up by pressing the team key Call waiting As far as possible you want to accept calls from every customer even while you re already on the phone If another call is signalled to your phone by a call waiting tone or display notification you can decide with which of two customers you wish to speak If a currently engaged subscriber is called she gets automatic call waiting Call waiting is possible for internal and external calls The call waiting connection is signalled to the called party visually and or acoustically depending on the terminal The called party can e Decline the call waiting connection and proceed with the current call The caller is then signalled engaged Accept the call waiting connection and hold the current connection Accept the call waiting connection after the cu
162. cket does not match the defined Additional Traffic Filter it is rejected If an IP packet meets the requirements in an Additional Traffic Filter IPSec phase 2 ne gotiation begins and data traffic is transferred over the tunnel En Note The parameter Additional Traffic Filter is exclusively relevant for the initiat or of the IPSec connection it is only used for outgoing traffic Ca Note Please note that the phase 2 policies must be configured identically on both of the IPSec tunnel endpoints 13 1 1 IPSec Peers An endpoint of a communication is defined as peer in a computer network Each peer of fers its services and uses the services of other peers A list of all configured IPSec Peers is displayed in the VPN gt IPSec gt IPSec Peers menu Peer Monitoring The menu for monitoring a peer is called by selecting the O button for the peer in the peer list See Values in the IPSec Tunnels list on page 391 Gigaset Communications GmbH 13 VPN 13 1 1 1 New Choose the New button to set up more IPSec peers The menu VPN gt IPSec gt IPSec Peers gt New consists of the following fields Fields in the menu Peer Parameters Field Description Administrative Status Select the status to which you wish to set the peer after saving the peer configuration Possible values e Up default value The peer is available for setting up a tun nel immediately after saving the configuration e Down The peer is initially not avai
163. configuration Select the file to be renamed Where Command Type Configuration Management and Action Delete configuration Select the file to be deleted Where Command Type Configuration Management and Action Copy configuration Select the file to be copied Configuration contains certificates keys Only where Command Type Configuration Manage ment and Action Import configuration or Export configuration Select whether the certificates and keys contained in the con figuration are to be imported or exported The function is disabled by default Encrypt configuration Only where Command Type Configuration Manage ment and Action Import configuration or Export configuration Define whether the data of the selected Action are to be en crypted The function is disabled by default Reboot after execution Only if Command Type Configuration Management Select whether your device should restart after the intended Action The function is disabled by default Version Check Only where Command Type Configuration Manage ment and Action Import configuration Select whether when importing a configuration file to check on Gigaset Communications GmbH 15 Local Services Field Description the server for the presence of a more current version of the already loaded configuration If not the file import is interrup ted The function is disabled by default Destination IP Address Only if Command
164. created but remains inactive Current Speed Mode Shows the actual mode and actual speed of the admin inter face Possible values o 1000 mbps Full Duplex e 100 mbps Full Duplex e 100 mbps Half Duplex 10 mbps Full Duplex 10 mbps Half Duplex e Down Flow Control Select whether a flow control should be conducted on the cor responding interface Possible values e Disabled default value No flow control is performed e Enabled Flow will be controlled e Auto Flow will be controlled automatically 3 2 ISDN Ports The system s ISDN connections can be configured as either internal or external ISDN connections The external ISDN connections are used for connection to the network oper ator s ISDN network The internal ISDN connections are provided for connecting various ISDN terminals system telephones ISDN telephones 3 Physical Interfaces Gigaset Communications GmbH 3 2 1 ISDN External You configure your system s external ISDN connections in the Physical Interfaces gt ISDN Ports gt ISDN External menu The access configuration for an external ISDN can be set up for point to multipoint P MP and point to point P P The following variants are possible when connecting to more than one ISDN connection e All external ISDN connections are only point to multipoint connections P MP e All external ISDN connections are only point to point connections P P e The external ISDN connections are
165. ct the user s internal number to be used for the call centre 8 Applications Gigaset Communications GmbH Fields in the Assigned Lines menu Field Description Select lines Select the lines for which the agent shall be responsible The name of the corresponding call centre is displayed again when lines are selected in order to improve the overview Under Assign select whether the entry should be enabled Fields in the Wrap up Settings menu Field Description Wrap up Time Enter the time available to this agent for post processing after concluding a call No further call can be assigned to this agent during this period The agent has the option of temporarily ex tending the period with a telephone procedure 8 6 4 General In the Applications gt Mini Call Center gt General menu you can set up an HTML web in terface access for the mini call centre manager The latter can then monitor the status of lines and agents and modify the settings for lines and agents The Applications gt Mini Call Center gt General menu consists of the following fields Fields in the Basic Settings menu Field Description Web Access User Enter a user name for the mini call centre administrator When name a user logs into the user interface under this name he she has access to the user interface with selected parameters for ad ministration of the call centre Web Access Password Enter a password for the mini call centre administrator 8 7 Doo
166. ction is activated by selecting Enabled The function is disabled by default SIP Header Field for Select the position of the user name user ID in the SIP head Gigaset Communications GmbH 4 VoIP Field Description User Name er for outgoing calls Possible values e P Preferred The so called p preferred identity field is added to the SIP header and contains the User Name e P Asserted The so called p asserted identity field is ad ded to the SIP header and contains the User Name None The User Name is not transmitted SIP Header Field s for Select the position of the sender ID e g subscriber number in Caller Address the SIP header for outgoing calls For incoming calls the sub scriber number is taken automatically from the SIP header Possible values e Display The sender ID is placed in the Display field of the SIP header e User Name The sender ID is transferred to the User field of the SIP header e P Preferred The so called p preferred identity field is added to the SIP header to transmit the sender ID there e P Asserted The so called p asserted identity field is ad ded to the SIP header to transmit the sender ID there Substitution of Inter Select whether the prefix e g 00 should be replaced by for national Prefix with international numbers The function is activated by selecting Enabled The function is disabled by default PBX coupling Select whether another PABX can
167. ction is deactivated the sender of the denied IP packet is informed by means of an appropriate ICMP or TCP RST message The function is disabled by default PPTP Passthrough Select whether the setup and operation of several simultan eous outgoing PPTP connections from hosts in the network are also to be permitted if NAT is activated The function is disabled by default If PPTP Passthrough is enabled the device itself cannot be configured as a tunnel endpoint Port Shows the number of portforwarding rules configured in Net working gt NAT gt NAT Configuration 10 2 2 NAT Configuration In the Networking gt NAT gt NAT Configuration menu you can exclude data from NAT simply and conveniently as well as translate addresses and ports For outgoing data traffic you can configure various NAT methods i e you can determine how an external host es tablishes a connection to an internal host 10 2 2 1 New Choose the New button to set up NAT Gigaset Communications GmbH 10 Networking The Networking gt NAT gt NAT Configuration gt New menu consists of the following fields Fields in the menu Basic Parameters Field Description Description Enter a description for the NAT configuration Interface Select the interface for which NAT is to be configured Possible values e Any default value NAT is configured for all interfaces e lt Interface name gt Select one of the interfaces from the list Type of traffic Se
168. ction was routed Costs Displays the connection charge but only if the provider trans mits the corresponding data 8 5 2 Incoming The Applications gt Call Data Records gt Incoming menu contains information that per mits the monitoring of incoming activities The Applications gt Call Data Records gt Incoming menu consists of the following fields Fields in the Incoming menu Field Description Date Displays the connection date Time Displays the time at call start Duration Displays the duration of the connection User Displays the user who was called Int No Displays the user s internal number 8 Applications Gigaset Communications GmbH Field Description External Number Displays the caller s number Project Code Displays the call project number if any Interface Displays the interface over which the connection from outside was routed 8 5 3 General In the Applications gt Call Data Records gt General menu you can define how connec tion data are saved in the system The Applications gt Call Data Records gt General menu consists of the following fields Fields in the Basic Settings menu Field Description Web Access User Enter a user name for the call data administrator name Web Access Password Enter a password for the call data administrator Save outgoing calls Select which outgoing connections should be saved Possible values e None default value o All e With Project Code only
169. d The function is enabled by default Source File Name Only for Action Copy configuration Select the source file to be copied Destination File Name Only for Action Copy configuration Enter the name of the copy Select file Only for Action Rename configuration Delete con figurationor Delete software firmware Select the file or configuration to be renamed or deleted New File Name Only for Action Rename configuration Enter the new name of the configuration file 16 3 Phone Update In the Maintenance gt Phone Update menu you can update your system telephone soft ware Gigaset Communications GmbH 16 Maintenance En Note Before beginning with the software update of your system telephone you must load the software in the Maintenance gt Phone Update gt Firmware Files menu on your SD card 16 3 1 Gigaset Phones In the Maintenance gt Phone Update gt Gigaset Phones menu you will see a list of the connected Gigaset telephones or base stations This view displays both Gigaset tele phones and Gigaset DECT base stations if there are any You can select devices to have their software updated immediately or allow them to download completely new software from the system In the case of immediate updating there is no version control Cz Note Note that immediate software updates for DECT multi cell systems are only available via the system s web configurator and that they cannot be initiated by the el
170. d Description Protocol Only for Command Type Certificate Management and Configuration Management if Action Import con figuration Select the protocol for the data transfer Possible values e HTTP default value HTTPS TFTP CSV File Format Only where Command Type Configuration Manage ment and Action Import configuration or Export configuration Select whether the file is to be sent in the CSV format The CSV format can easily be read and modified In addition you can view the corresponding file clearly using Microsoft Ex cel for example The function is enabled by default Remote File Name Only if Command Type Configuration Management For Action Import configuration Enter the name of the file under which it is saved on the server from which it is to be retrieved For Action Export configuration Enter the file name under which it should be saved on the serv er Local File Name Only where Command Type Configuration Manage ment and Action Import configuration Rename configuration Of Copy configuration At import renaming or copying enter a name for the configura tion file under which to save it locally on the device File Name in Flash Where Command Type Configuration Management and Action Export configuration 15 Local Services Gigaset Communications GmbH Field Description Select the file to be exported Where Command Type Configuration Management and Action Rename
171. d Description Selected Ports Enter the ISDN port over which callback is carried out Possible values e All Ports The callback is routed over an available ISDN port e Specify port In Specific Ports You can select the re quired ISDN port Specific Ports Only for Selected Ports Specify port you can select ad ditional ports with Add 13 3 2 Options In this menu you can make general settings of the global PPTP profile The VPN gt PPTP gt Options menu consists of the following fields Fields in the Global Options menu Field Description GRE Window Adaption Select whether the GRE Window Adaptation is to be enabled This adaptation only becomes necessary if you have installed service pack 1 from Microsoft Windows XP Since in SP 1 Mi crosoft has changed the confirmation algorithm in the GRE pro tocol the automatic window adaptation for GRE must be turned off for bintec elmeg devices 13 VPN Gigaset Communications GmbH Field Description The function is enabled with Enabled The function is enabled by default GRE Window Size Enter the maximum number of GRE packets that can be sent without confirmation Windows XP uses a higher initial reception window in the GRE which is why the maximum send window size must be adjusted here by the GRE Window Size value Possible values are 0 to 2356 The default value is 0 Max incoming control Enter the maximum number of control connections connections per re
172. d for this purpose under Numbering gt User Settings gt Users The system automatically assigns a serial number the Mobile Number to each mobile part so that you can identify the device You can then use Add to assign a Internal Num ber to a mobile part from the list You can delete assigned numbers with ial Values in the list Numbers Field Description Mobile Number Displays the serial number of the mobile part This number is permanently assigned to the mobile part so that it can be uniquely identified Internal Number Displays the assigned internal number Displayed Description Displays the description entered for the internal number In standby mode this description is shown on the mobile part s display User Displays the user s name 6 1 2 3 Settings In the Terminals gt Gigaset Phones gt Gigaset DECT gt Settings menu you can reset the administrator password for the base station The Terminals gt Gigaset Phones gt Gigaset DECT gt Settings menu consists of the fol lowing fields Fields in the menu Basic Settings Field Description Admin Password Select whether the administrator password should be reset The function is activated by selecting Enabled Gigaset Communications GmbH 6 Terminals Field Description The function is disabled by default As soon as you select the OK button the password is reset to the default setting 6 2 Other phones In this menu you perform assignment of configured i
173. d from the LAC A Local Hostname con figured in the LAC must match Remote Hostname con figured for the intended profile in the LNS and vice versa LNS Defines the Local Hostname of the LAC If the Re mote Hostname field remains empty on the LNS the related 13 VPN Gigaset Communications GmbH Field Description profile qualifies as the standard entry and is used for all in coming calls for which a profile with a matching remote host name cannot be found Password Enter the password to be used for tunnel authentication Au thentication between LAC and LNS takes place in both direc tions e the LNS checks the Local Hostname and the Pass word contained in the SCCRQ of the LAC and compares them with those specified in the relevant profile The LAC does the same with the fields of the SCCRP of the LNS If this field remains empty authentication data in the tunnel setup messages are not sent and are ignored Fields in the LAC Mode Parameters menu Field Description Remote IP Address Enter the fixed IP address of the LNS used as the destination address for connections based on this profile The destination must be a device that can behave like an LNS UDP Source Port Enter how the port number to be used as the source port for all outgoing L2TP connections based on this profile is to be de termined By default the Fixed option is disabled which means that ports are dynamically assigned to the connections that use t
174. d redir ect function on engaged Rerouting Function Only for Further Rerouting Immediately or Further Rerouting On Busy Select a configured redirect option for immediate redirect or on busy Busy when Only for Further Rerouting On Busy Gigaset Communications GmbH 8 Applications Field Description Select from how many busy agents the lines shall be con sidered busy 8 6 2 3 Log on Log off In the Log on Log off area select which of the assigned agents shall be logged into the line The menu Applications gt Mini Call Center gt Lines gt Log on Log off consists of the fol lowing fields Fields in the Log on Log off menu Field Description Numbers Displays the internal number and description of the assigned agent Status Select whether the agent is logged into the line The agent is logged in by selecting Logged on 8 6 3 Agents In the Applications gt Mini Call Center gt Agents menu lines are assigned to agents An agent can operate one or more mini call centre lines 8 6 3 1 Edit or New Choose the 3 icon to edit existing entries Select the New button to create new entries The menu Applications gt Mini Call Center gt Agents gt New consists of the following fields Fields in the Basic Settings menu Field Description User Select the configured user who shall serve as a call centre agent You configure required users in the Numbering gt User Settings gt User menu Internal Number Sele
175. ddresses see Firewall gt Ad dresses gt Address List and address groups see Firewall gt Addresses gt Groups The value Any means that neither the destination interface nor the destination address is checked Gigaset Communications GmbH 14 Firewall Field Description Service Select one of the preconfigured services to which the packet to be filtered must be assigned The extensive range of services configured ex works includes the following O EED e telnet smtp 3 clas oe O dalolicio O ateiraeie e Netmeeting Additional services are created in Firewall gt Services gt Ser vice List In addition the service groups configured in Firewall gt Ser vices gt Groups can be selected Action Select the action to be applied to a filtered packet Possible values e Access default value The packets are forwarded on the basis of the entries e Deny The packets are rejected e Reject The packets are rejected An error message is is sued to the sender of the packet Apply QoS Only for Action Access Select whether you want to enable QoS for this policy with the priority selected in Priority The function is enabled with Enabled The option is deactivated by default If QOS is not activated for this policy bear in mind that the data cannot be prioritised on the sender side either 14 Firewall Gigaset Communications GmbH Field Description A policy for which QoS has been enabled is also set
176. der to obtain more band width Each of these DSL connections should use a separate Ethernet connection for this At the moment many providers are still in the process of preparing the PPPoE Multilink func tion For PPPoE Multilink we recommend using your device s Eth ernet switch in Split Port mode and to use a separate Ethernet interface e g en1 1 en1 2 for each PPPoE connection If you also want to use an external modem for PPPoE Multilink you must run your device s Ethernet switch in Split Port mode Only for PPPoE Mode Standard Select the Ethernet interface specified for a standard PPPoE connection If you want to use an external DSL modem select the Ethernet port to which the modem is connected When using the internal DSL modem select here the EthoA in terface configured in WAN gt ATM gt Profiles gt New Only for PPPoE Mode Multilink Select the interfaces you want to use for your Internet connec tion Click the Add button to create new entries 12 WAN 12 WAN Gigaset Communications GmbH Field Description User Name Enter the user name Password Enter the password VLAN Certain Internet service providers require a VLAN ID Activate this function to be able to enter a value under VLAN ID VLAN ID Only if VLAN is enabled Enter the VLAN ID that you received from your provider Always on Select whether the interface should always be activated The function is enabled with Enabled The function i
177. ding LCP echo requests or replies This is re commended for leased lines PPTP and L2TP connections The function is enabled with Enabled The function is enabled by default Fields in the IP Options menu Field Description OSPF Mode Select whether and how routes are propagated via the inter face and or OSPF protocol packets are to be sent Possible values e Passive default value OSPF is not activated for this inter face i e no routes are propagated or OSPF protocol packets sent over this interface Networks reachable over this inter face are however included when calculating the routing in formation and propagated over active interfaces e Active OSPF is activated for this interface i e routes are 13 VPN Gigaset Communications GmbH Field Description propagated or OSPF protocol packets sent over this inter face e Inactive OSPF is disabled for this interface Proxy ARP Mode Select whether your device is to answer APR requests from your LAN on behalf of the specific PPTP partner Possible values e Inactive default value Disables Proxy ARP Address Resolution Protocol for this PPTP partner e Up or Dormant Your device only responds to an ARP re quest if the status of the connection to the PPTP partner is Up active or Dormant In the case of Idle your device only responds to the ARP request the connection is not set up until someone actually wants to use the route Up only Your device
178. distribution point this should be evaluated in addition to the CRLs globally configured in the device e Yes CRLs are always checked e No No checking of CRLs 15 6 3 Options You configure the schedule interval in the Local Services gt Scheduling gt Options The Local Services gt Scheduling gt Options menu consists of the following fields Fields in the Scheduling Options menu Field Description Schedule Interval Select whether the schedule interval is to be enabled for the in terface Enter the period of time in seconds after which the system checks whether configured events have occurred Possible values are 0 to 65535 The value 300 is recommended 5 minute accuracy 15 7 Surveillance In this menu you can configure an automatic availability check for hosts or interfaces and automatic ping tests 3 Note This function cannot be configured on your device for connections that are authenticated via a RADIUS server Gigaset Communications GmbH 15 Local Services 15 7 1 Hosts A list of all monitored hosts is displayed in the Local Services gt Surveillance gt Hosts menu 15 7 1 1 Edit or New Choose the 3 icon to edit existing entries Choose the New button to create additional monitoring tasks The menu Local Services gt Surveillance gt Hosts gt New consists of the following fields Fields in the Host Parameters menu Field Description Group ID If the availability of a group of hosts or the de
179. dit or New Choose the 3 icon to edit existing entries Choose the New button to create additional routes If the Extendedoption is selected for the Route Class an extra configuration section opens The Network gt Routes gt IPv4 Route Configuration gt New menu consists of the following fields Fields in the menu Basic Parameters Field Description Route Type Select the type of route Possible values Gigaset Communications GmbH 10 Networking Field Description e Default Route via Interface Route via a specific in terface which is to be used if no other suitable route is avail able e Default Route via Gateway Route via a specific gate way which is to be used if no other suitable route is available e Host Route via Interface Route to an individual host via a specific interface e Host Route via Gateway Route to an individual host via a specific gateway e Network Route via Interface default value Route to a network via a specific interface e Network Route via Gateway Route to a network via a specific gateway Only for interfaces that are operated in DHCP client mode Even if an interface is configured for DHCP client mode routes can still be configured for data traffic via that interface The set tings received from the DHCP server are then copied along with those configured here to the active routing table This en ables e g in the case of dynamically changing gateway ad dresses particula
180. e Auto Attendant with Only if Call Switching DISA dial code numbers DISA For ever desired DISA code number select the desired internal number to which the caller shall be transferred Gigaset Communications GmbH 8 Applications 8 2 2 Rerouting Applications In the Applications gt Rerouting gt Rerouting Applications menu you can configure when which redirect option is to be enabled You can switch the various options either via calendar or manually Choose the E icon to edit existing entries Select the New button to create new redirect applications 8 2 2 1 General In the General area you perform basic settings for a redirect application The Applications gt Rerouting gt Rerouting Applications gt New menu consists of the fol lowing fields Fields in the Basic Settings menu Field Description Description Enter a description for the redirect application Type of Rerouting Ap Select the destination to which an incoming call shall be redir plication ected Possible values e Trunk Number default value e Extension 3 Global Switch call signalling Select how to switch between options Possible values e No calendar only manually e lt Calendar gt 8 2 2 2 Variant 1 4 In the Variant area you configure the redirect options You can define up to 4 options The menu Applications gt Rerouting gt Rerouting Applications gt Variant consists of the 8 Applications Gigaset Communications GmbH followi
181. e 1 to 8192 The default value is 0 12 1 2 PPTP A list of all PPTP interfaces is displayed in the WAN gt Internet Dialup gt PPTP menu In this menu you configure an Internet connection that uses the Point Tunnelling Protocol PPTP to set up a connection This is required in Austria for example 12 1 2 1 New Choose the New button to set up new PPTP interfaces The menu WAN gt Internet Dialup gt PPTP gt New consists of the following fields Fields in the Basic Parameters menu Field Description Description Enter a name for uniquely identifying the internet connection The first character in this field must not be a number No special characters or umlauts must be used PPTP Ethernet Inter Select the IP interface over which packets are to be transpor face ted to the remote PPTP terminal If you want to use an external DSL modem select the Ethernet 12 WAN Gigaset Communications GmbH Field Description port to which the modem is connected When using the internal DSL modem select here the EthoA in terface configured in Physical Interfaces gt ATM gt Profiles gt New e g ethoa50 0 User Name Enter the user name Password Enter the password Always on Select whether the interface should always be activated The function is enabled with Enabled The function is disabled by default Only activate this option if you have Internet access with a flat rate charge Connection Idle Only if Always on
182. e as signed to the class Class ID that is then to be defined Both Incoming and outgoing data packets are assigned to the class Class ID that is then to be defined High Priority Class Enable or disable the high priority class If the high priority class is active the data packets are associated with the class with the highest priority and priority 0 is set automatically The function is enabled with Enabled The function is disabled by default Class ID Only for High Priority Class not active Choose a number which assigns the data packets to a class Gigaset Communications GmbH 10 Networking Field Description C Note The class ID is a label to assign data packets to specific classes The class ID defines the prior ity Possible values are whole numbers between 7 and 254 Set DSCP TOS value Layer 3 Here you can set or change the DSCP TOS value of the IP data packets based on the class Class ID that has been defined Possible values e Preserve default value The DSCP TOS value of the IP data packets remains unchanged e DSCP Binary Value Differentiated Services Code Point according to RFC 3260 is used to signal the priority of IP packets indicated in binary format DSCP Decimal Value Differentiated Services Code Point according to RFC 3260 is used to signal the priority of IP packets indicated in decimal format DSCP Hexadecimal Value Differentiated Services Code Point according to
183. e data packets normally have the highest priority Nevertheless if the upstream bandwidth is low noticeable delays in voice transmission can occur when other packets are routed at the same time The real time jitter control function solves this problem So that the line is not blocked for too long for the voice data packets the size of the other packets can be reduced if re quired during a telephone call 12 2 1 Controlled Interfaces In the WAN gt Real Time Jitter Control gt Controlled Interfaces a list of functions is dis played for which the Real Time Jitter Control function is configured 12 2 1 1 New Click the New button to optimise voice transmission for other interfaces The menu WAN gt Real Time Jitter Control gt Controlled Interfaces gt New consists of the following fields Fields in the Basic Settings menu Field Description Interface Define for which interfaces voice transmission is to be optim ised Control Mode Select the mode for the optimisation Possible values e Controlled RTP Streams only default value By means of the data routed via the media gateway the system detects voice data traffic and optimises the voice transmis sion e All RTP Streams All RTP streams are optimised e Inactive Voice data transmission is not optimised e Always Voice data transmission is always optimised Maximum Upload Enter the maximum available upstream bandwidth in kbp s for Speed the selected interface
184. e follow ing fields Fields in the Basic Settings menu Field Description Interface Select the interface to which an intercom adapter shall be con nected All free FXS interfaces are available Internal Number Select the configured internal number to be assigned to the in tercom adapter The number is created in the Numbering gt User Settings gt User menu Code for Doorcom Call Pressing a bell button on the intercom sets off a call in the sys Acceptance tem To establish a connection between a called subscriber and the intercom adapter that subscriber must pick up the re ceiver and dial the code number for call acceptance Enter this code for call acceptance If a subscriber accepts a call from the 8 Applications Gigaset Communications GmbH Field Description intercom adapter the PABX automatically dials the code num ber required to set up the connection The subscriber need not make any more entries 8 7 2 Doorcom Signalling In the Applications gt Doorcom Units gt Doorcom Signalling you configure the signalling variant for call acceptance via a intercom adapter Two intercom call options are available The code number for the bell button is the number the intercom adapter dials into the sys tem when the bell button is pressed You can perform an internal call allocation for each bell button Please note that guidelines for connecting the intercom adapter depend on the respective manufacturer For this read the oper
185. e menu Advanced IP Options Field Description Public Interface Specify the public or WAN interface that this peer is to use to connect to its VPN partner If you select Choosen by Rout ing the decision as to via which interface the data traffic is routed is made based on the current routing table If you select an interface the interface is used taking into consideration the setting under Public Interface Mode Public Interface Mode Specify how strictly the setting under Public Interface is handled Possible values e Enforce Only the selected interface is used whatever the priorities in the current routing table e Preferred Depending on the priorities in the current rout ing table the selected interface is used if no more favourable route is available via a different interface Public Source IP Ad dress If you are operating more than one Internet connection in paral lel here you can specify the public IP address that is to be used as the source address for the peer s data traffic Select whether the Public Source IP Address is to be enabled The function is enabled with Enabled In the input field enter the public IP address that is to be used as the sender address The function is disabled by default Back Route Verify Select whether a check on the back route should be activated for the interface to the connection partner The function is enabled with Enabled The function is disabled by default MobIKE On
186. e sup port dynamic channel bundling for a bandwidth increase or as a backup Static In static channel bundling you specify right from the start how many B channels your device is to use for connections regardless of the transferred data rate 12 1 1 PPPoE A list of all PPToE interfaces is displayed in the WAN gt Internet Dialup gt PPPoE menu PPP over Ethernet PPPoE is the use of the Point to Point Protocol PPP network pro tocol over an Ethernet connection Today PPPoE is used for ADSL connections in Ger many In Austria the Point To Point Tunnelling Protocol PPTP was originally used for ADSL access However PPPoE is now offered here too by some providers Gigaset Communications GmbH 12 1 1 1 New Choose the New button to set up new PPPoE interfaces The menu WAN gt Internet Dialup gt PPPoE gt New consists of the following fields Fields in the Basic Parameters menu Field Description Description PPPoE Mode PPPoE Ethernet Inter face PPPoE Interfaces for Multilink Enter a name to uniquely identify the PPPoE partner The first character in this field must not be a number No special charac ters or umlauts must be used Select whether you want to use a standard Internet connection over PPPoE Standard or your Internet access is to be set up over several interfaces Multilink If you choose Mul tilink you can connect several DSL connections from a pro vider over PPP as a static bundle in or
187. e text IP Address Netmask Shows the IP address and the netmask NAT Indicates if NAT is activated for this interface Tx Packets Shows the total number of packets sent Tx Bytes Displays the total number of octets sent Rx Packets Shows the total number of packets received Rx Bytes Displays the total number of bytes received Fields in the TCP Connections menu Field Description Status Displays the status of an active TCP connection Local Address Displays the local IP address of the interface for an active TCP connection Local Port Displays the local port of the IP address for an active TCP con nection Remote Address Displays the IP address to which an active TCP connection ex ists Gigaset Communications GmbH 18 Monitoring Field Description Remote Port Displays the port to which an active TCP connection exists 18 5 HotSpot Gateway 18 5 1 HotSpot Gateway A list of all linked hotspot users is displayed in the Monitoring gt HotSpot Gateway gt Hot Spot Gateway menu Values in the HotSpot Gateway list Field Description User Name Displays the user s name IP Address Shows the IP address of the user Physical Address Shows the physical address of the user Logon Displays the time of the notification Interface Shows the interface used 18 6 QoS In the Monitoring gt QoS menu statistics are displayed for interfaces on which QoS has been configured 18 6 1 QoS A list of all interfaces for whi
188. e via which the GRE partner is reached Remote GRE IP Ad Enter the target IP address of the GRE packets to the GRE dress partner Default Route If you enable the Default Route all data is automatically routed to one connection The function is disabled by default Local IP Address Here enter the LAN side IP address that is to be used as your device s source address for your own packets through the GRE tunnel Route Entries Define other routing entries for this connection partner Add new entries with Add e Remote IP Address IP address of the destination host or network e Netmask Netmask for Remote IP Address If no entry is made your device uses a default netmask e Metric The lower the value the higher the priority of the route range of values 0 15 The default value is 7 MTU Enter the maximum packet size Maximum Transfer Unit MTU in bytes that is allowed for the GRE connection between the partners Possible values are 1 to 8192 The default value is 1500 Use key Enable the key input for the GRE connection which makes it possible to distinguish between several parallel GRE connec tions between two GRE partners see RFC 1701 The identification is enabled with Enabled Field Description The function is disabled by default Key Value Only if Use key is enabled Enter the GRE connection key Possible values are 0 to 2147483647 The default value is 0 hybird 120 Gigaset Editi
189. ection is set up The caller and the called system telephone hear an attention tone at the beginning of the simplex operation Duration of the simplex operation is limited to two minutes If the 5 Numbering Gigaset Communications GmbH receiver of a concerned telephone is picked up during this period the call is translated in to a normal connection System telephones can initiate a simplex operation call via the system telephone menu or a programmed function key If the simplex operation is initiated via a function key notifica tions appear in the system telephone display as with a normal connection and the simplex operation key LED is switched on The simplex operation can be ended by renewed pressing of the function key or by pressing the loudspeaker key The LED switches off again at conclusion of the simplex operation If a telephone or a system telephone is the destination of a simplex operation call the caller s number is indicated in the display The simplex operation call is signalled over the loudspeaker with an attention tone Simplex operation can be terminated with the ESC key A function key can also be configured on a system telephone to deny or allow simplex op eration calls C Note Simplex operation calls are automatically accepted by the called telephone by enabling the hands free function if e the telephone is not in use e simplex operation is allowed and e the Do not disturb function Call Protection is
190. ed services Enter these numbers or partial numbers into the dial ranges list of blocked numbers All subscribers subject to dial ranges cannot dial these numbers However if you should need specific numbers from a blocked sector you can clear these via the dial ranges list of cleared numbers You can block specific numbers or prefixes with the blocked numbers list You can clear the blocked numbers or prefixes with the cleared numbers list If a number entered as a cleared number is longer than one entered as a blocked number this number can be di alled When you dial a number dialling after the blocked digit is terminated and you hear the busy tone You can assign each user individually to the dial ranges in the user set tings Example Blocked number 01 all external numbers that begin with 01 are blocked Cleared number 012345 dialling can proceed All external numbers that begin with 012345 can be dialled If two identical numbers same number sequence and same num ber of digits e g 01234 and 01234 are entered in the list of cleared numbers as well as the list of blocked numbers dialling of the number is prevented En Note Subscribers who enjoy full or partial dialling access no outside line access are authorised for dialling of cleared numbers via the list of cleared num bers 7 Call Routing Gigaset Communications GmbH Please ensure that the area code is entered in the configuration otherwise the block can be circumv
191. ed with Enabled The function is disabled by default Only activate this option if you have Internet access with a flat rate charge Connection Idle Only if Always on is disabled Timeout Enter the idle interval in seconds This determines how many seconds should pass between sending the last traffic data packet and clearing the connection Possible values are 0 to 3600 seconds 0 deactivates the timeout The default value is 20 Fields in the IP Mode and Routes menu Gigaset Communications GmbH 12 WAN Field Description IP Address Mode Select whether your device is to be assigned a static IP ad dress or whether it should be assigned this dynamically Possible values e Static default value You enter a static IP address e Provide IP Address Your device dynamically assigns an IP address to the remote terminal e Get IP Address Your device is dynamically assigned an IP address Default Route Only for IP Address Mode Staticand Get IP Address Select whether the route to this connection partner is to be defined as the default route The function is enabled with Enabled The function is disabled by default Create NAT Policy Only for IP Address Mode Staticand Get IP Address When you configure an ISDN Internet connection specify whether Network Address Translation NAT is to be activated The function is enabled with Enabled The function is disabled by default Local IP Address Only if IP Address
192. ed with the corresponding speeddial index The entries in the Descrip tion column are sorted alphabetically Click the column title of any column to sort entries in ascending or descending order 8 4 1 1 Edit or New Choose the E icon to edit existing entries Select the New button to create new entries The menu Applications gt System Phonebook gt Entries gt New consists of the following fields Fields in the Phonebook Entry menu Field Description Description Enter a description for the entry Subsequent sorting in the phone book follows the initial letters of the entry Phone Number Enter the telephone number internal or external Speed Dial Number Enter a speed dial code If a speed dial code is entered count ing is automatic i e speed dial is automatically assigned 8 Applications Gigaset Communications GmbH Field Description Numbers from 0 to 999 are possible Call Through Select whether the telephone number for the Call Through function has been activated If a telephone number is approved for this and the caller uses this number for the Call Through functions the caller s authorisation to use the function is checked against the phonebook record The function is activated by selecting Enabled The function is disabled by default 8 4 2 Import Export You can import and export phone book data in the Applications gt System Phonebook gt Import Export menu You can import data exported from Microsoft O
193. ee agent assigned to this line shall occur 8 6 2 2 Variant 1 4 In the area Variant you set up call options for the mini call centre The menu Applications gt Mini Call Center gt Lines gt Variant consists of the following 8 Applications Gigaset Communications GmbH fields Fields in the Settings menu Field Description Automatic Call Pick up Select whether an incoming call shall be automatically accep with ted and if so with which announcement or melody The function is activated by selecting Enabled The function is disabled by default Select the Wave file to be used for the call acceptance All pre set and additionally loaded Wave files in the system can be se lected Fields in the Rerouting Functions menu Field Description Rerouting on no re Select whether and if so with which option an incoming call sponse shall be redirected after the entered time Possible values e None There shall be no redirect on no reply e lt Team gt The incoming call is forwarded to the selected team after the time specified in Time until rerouting Further Rerouting Select additional redirect functions You must first configure these in Applications gt Rerouting gt Rerouting Functions Then the following values may be selected e off No additional redirect functions e Immediately Immediately transfers the call according to a configured redirect function e On Busy Transfers the call according to a configure
194. eer Detection DPD the proprietary Heartbeat method is implemented This sends and receives signals every 5 seconds depending on the con figuration If these signals are not received after 20 seconds the SA is discarded as invalid Possible values e Autodetect default value Your device detects and uses the mode supported by the remote terminal e Inactive Your device sends and expects no heartbeat Set this option if you use devices from other manufacturers e Heartbeats Expect only Your device expects a heartbeat from the peer but does not send one itself e Heartbeats Send only Your device expects no heart beat from the peer but sends one itself e Heartbeats Send amp Expect Your device expects a heartbeat from the peer and sends one itself Dead Peer Detection Use DPD dead peer detection in accordance with RFC 3706 DPD uses a request reply pro tocol to check the availability of the remote terminal and can be configured independently on both sides This option only checks the availability of the peer if data is to be sent to it e Dead Peer Detection Idle Use DPD dead peer detection in accordance with RFC 3706 DPD uses a re quest reply protocol to check the availability of the remote terminal and can be configured independently on both sides This option is used to carry out a check at certain intervals depending on forthcoming data transfers Only for Phase 1 IKEv2 Parameters Enable or d
195. egins external dialling Call Hold inside the Select whether a telephone call in the system can be switched PBX system to hold without losing the connection inquiry calls brokering If this function is not enabled the call is held at the SIP provider if he supports this performance feature The function is activated by selecting Enabled The function is enabled by default Call Forwarding extern Select whether calls are to be redirected externally with the SIP SIP 302 provider The call is forwarded using SIP status code 302 The function is activated by selecting Enabled The function is disabled by default Generate international If you have enabled this function and entered 43 for Austria phone number underGlobal SettingsCouniry Profile the 0043 before a number dialled with area code is generated automatically The function is activated by selecting Enabled The function is disabled by default Generate national sub If you have enabled this function and entered the National scriber number Prefix City Code e g for Abfaltersbach 4846 under Global Settings the 4846 before a number dialled with area code is generated automatically The function is activated by selecting Enabled The function is disabled by default Deactivate number If you enable this function the number is always sent inde suppression pendently of whether you have switched Suppress outgoing CLIP CLIR on or off for an extension The fun
196. eing transferred the caller hears a ring tone or the system s music on hold Es Note DISA Direct Inward System Access Once a call is received by the system the caller is automatically transferred after a code number is entered This code is assigned to an internal number in the system Entry of a number or code must occur during the announcement Once the announcement Wave file ends no more entries are accepted There follows redirect to a defined redirect destination The performance feature Auto Attendant with DISA is an integral part of the system and can accept up to 28 calls simultaneously Fields in the Announcemeni Auto Attendant Settings menu Field Description Call Switching Select how incoming calls are to be transferred Possible values e Announcement without DISA default value The con figured announcement is played There follows either transfer to the configured internal number or the connection is inter rupted and the caller hears the busy tone e DISA dial internal numbers The caller is prompted to enter an internal number The call is forwarded to the num ber e DISA dial code numbers The caller is prompted to enter a code number from 0 to 9 The desired internal num bers are assigned to the codes The caller is then transferred to the configured internal number Number of playbacks Select how many times the announcement shall be continu ously repeated At conclusion the caller hears the busy ton
197. eld Description Restore Default Set Only when you make changes to the administrative access tings configuration are relevant access rules set up and activated You can restore the default settings with the icon 2 5 1 1 Add Select the Add button to configure administrative access for additional interfaces The System Management gt Administrative Access gt Access gt Add menu consists of the following fields Fields in the menu Access Gigaset Communications GmbH 2 System Management Field Description Interface Select the interface for which administrative access is to be configured 2 5 2 SSH Your devices offers encrypted access to the shell You can enable or disable this access in the System Management gt Administrative Access gt SSH Enabled menu standard value You can also access the options for configuring the SSH login You need an SSH client application e g PUTTY to be able to reach the SSH Daemon If you wish to use SSH Login together with the PuTTY client you may need to comply with some special configuration requirements for which we have prepared FAQs You will find these in the Service Support section at www gigastepro com To be able to reach the shell of your device via an SSH client make sure the settings for the SSH Daemon and SSH client are the same S Note If configuration of an SSH connection is not possible restart the device to initialise the SSH Daemon correctly The System Management
198. elect the outgoing numbers for the user For an outgoing call if the remote subscriber should not see the number assigned to your own connection one of the existing numbers can be selected here for display If no num ber is defined the system transmits no number to the provider Fields in the list Outgoing Signalisation Field Description Internal Number Displays the internal numbers configured for the user Displayed Description Displays for each internal number the description configured for the system telephone display Outgoing Signalisation Select the signal you want for outgoing calls Possible values Gigaset Communications GmbH 5 Numbering Field Description e Default own DDI Signalling The user s own exten sion is used as the Outgoing Signalisation This option is available when there is a point to point configuration or a SIP provider with direct dialling e Standard No Outgoing Signalisation is sent In this case the switchboard uses the port s main number e lt Fixed phone number gt For a FXO port the phone num ber configured is already assigned as the Outgoing Signal isation and is displayed e lt Phone number gt When more than one number has been configured you can select a number that you wish to use as the Outgoing Signalisation Select the pl icon to specify for each internal number indicated in the table by Internal Number and Displayed Description which number shall be displayed for
199. em However other codes are set for these features in the basic setting No problem you can change the codes for different features So you can use your usual codes for these features in the future 2 System Management Gigaset Communications GmbH 2 3 1 Alternative Access Codes You use the Alternative Access Codes menu to configure the system s access number plan The access number can be set individually for some performance features in the system configuration The access number preset in the system is supplemented with a call num ber from the system s internal number plan For performance features Open inquiry and Bundles several access codes can be assigned The performance feature with modified access number is operated as described for the corresponding performance feature You can use the modified access number internal number or the access number described in the user guide excluding dialling code The System Management gt Access Codes gt Alternative Access Codes menu consists of the following fields Fields in the Basic Settings menu Field Description Line Access Digit Select the exchange code Possible values e None e 0 default value o 5 o 7 8 9 Pick up Group Enter the new code for performance feature Pick up group Pick up Extension Enter the new code for performance feature Pick up internal subscriber Assign project codes Enter the new code for performance feature Assign project codes
200. emergency alert critical error warning and notice priority are recorded e Information default value Messages with emergency alert critical error warning notice and information priority are recorded e Debug All messages are recorded Maximum Number of Enter the maximum number of login process entries that are Accounting Log stored internally in the device Entries 2 System Management Gigaset Communications GmbH Field Value Possible values are 0 to 1000 The default value is 20 Transfer to busy subscriber You can define in the configuration whether a call can be transferred to a busy subscriber or if it is off that the caller will hear the engaged tone so that the call is terminated Other wise the caller is held and hears the ringing tone or the on hold music If the destination subscriber hangs up the held subscriber hears the ringing tone The destination sub scriber is called and can take the held call Fields in the menu System Settings Field Value Transfer Signalling Specify how the call is to be transferred to an internal exten sion Possible values e With the ringing tone the default value Caller hears the ringing tone while being transferred e With music on hold MoH The caller hears the sys tem s on hold music while being transferred Transfer to busy ex Set whether a caller may be transferred to a busy subscriber tension The function is activated with Enabled The function
201. en in the Network ing gt QoS gt QoS Classification menu Priority Only for Prioritisation queue Class Based Choose the priority of the queue Possible values are 1 high priority to 254 low priority The default value is 1 Weight Only for Prioritisation Algorithm Weighted Round Robin or Weighted Fair Queueing Choose the priority of the queue Possible values are 1 to 254 The default value is 1 RTT Mode Realtime Active or deactivate the real time transmission of the data Traffic Mode The function is enabled with Enabled The function is disabled by default RTT mode should be activated for QoS classes in which real time data has priority This mode improves latency when for warding real time datagrams Gigaset Communications GmbH 10 Networking Field Description It is possible to configure multiple queues when RTT mode is enabled Queues with enabled RTT mode must always have a higher priority than queues with disabled RTT mode Traffic Shaping Activate or deactivate data rate Traffic Shaping limiting in the send direction The data rate limit applies to the selected queue This is not the limit that can be defined on the interface The function is enabled with Enabled The function is disabled by default Maximum Upload Only for Traffic Shaping enabled Speed Enter a maximum data rate for the queue in kbits Possible values are 0 to 1000000 The default value is 0 Overbooking al
202. ented in the local network by prefixing the area code 7 1 3 1 Edit or New Choose the Fy icon to edit existing entries Select the New button to create new entries The Call Routing gt Outgoing Services gt Dial Control gt New menu consists of the follow ing fields Fields in the Basic Settings menu Field Description Inhibited number Enter the number that cannot be dialled Enabled number Enter the number for which dialling is explicitly permitted 7 1 4 Priority Numbers In the Call Routing gt Outgoing Services gt Priority Numbers menu you configure num bers with particular special functions e g emergency functions In your system configuration you can enter numbers that must be accessible in an emer gency If you now dial one of these priority numbers it is detected by the system and an ISDN B channel is automatically cleared If the external ISDN B channels are already in use one of the ISDN B channels is freed up and the calling subscribers hear the busy tone An ongoing priority call is not interrupted 7 1 4 1 Edit or New Choose the 3 icon to edit existing entries Select the New button to create new entries The Call Routing gt Outgoing Services gt Priority Numbers gt New menu consists of the following fields Fields in the Basic Settings menu Field Description Description Enter a description for the entry Gigaset Communications GmbH 7 Call Routing Field Description Priority Number Enter t
203. enu Replacement Values Field Description New Destination IP Ad Only for Type of traffic incoming Destination NAT dress Netmask Enter the destination IP address and corresponding netmask to which the original destination IP address is to be translated New Destination Port Only for Type of traffic incoming Destination NAT Service user defined and Protocol TCP UDP TCP UDP Leave the destination port as it appears or enter the destination port to which the original destination port is to be translated Select Original to leave the original destination port If you disable Original an input field appears and you can enter a new destination port Originalis active by default New Source IP Ad Only for Type of traffic outgoing Source NAT and dress Netmask NAT method symmetric Enter the source IP address to which the original source IP ad 10 Networking Gigaset Communications GmbH Field Description dress is to be translated with corresponding netmask as the case arises New Source Port Only for Type of traffic outgoing Source NAT NAT method symmetric Service user defined and Pro tocol TCP UDP TCP UDP Leave the source port as it appears or enter a new source port to which the original source port is to be translated Original leaves the original source port If you disable Ori ginal an input field appears in which you can enter a new source port Originalis active by default If
204. enu or using a programmed function key If the announcement is initiated via a function key notifications appear in your telephone display as with a normal connection and the announcement key LED is switched on The announcement can be ended by renewed pressing of the function key or by pressing the loudspeaker key The LED switches off again at conclusion of the announcement If a system telephone is the destination for an announcement the number of the announ cer appears on the display The announcement is signalled with a positive acknowledge tone over the loudspeaker The announcement can be terminated with the ESC key A function key with associated LED can also be set up on a system telephone to deny or allow announcements Individual announcement You can initiate the announcement in a selective manner by dialling an internal number The announcement can be allowed or denied by the destination subscriber via an operat ing procedure The announcement is signalled to the destination subscriber and the an nouncer with a positive acknowledge tone Team announcement An announcement can also be made to a team by dialling a team number The team sub scribers hear the announcement simultaneously The announcement is signalled to the destination subscribers and the announcers with a positive acknowledge tone The an nouncement to a team is also possible from an inquiry With a team announcement it can take up to four seconds before the con
205. ephones can initiate speed dial from the phone book via these speed dial numbers System telephones System telephones can dial from the system phone book via a special menu To search for a telephone entry enter the first letters max 8 of the desired name and confirm the entry The system always provides 8 phone book entries which you can view success ively Select the desired entry and confirm with OK You must now begin to dial within 5 seconds The system telephone redialling list displays the name of the dialled subscriber instead of her number If a system telephone receives a call whose number and name are Gigaset Communications GmbH 8 Applications saved in the system phone book the caller s name is indicated in the system telephone display C Note The user s other numbers Mobile Number and Home Number are only displayed in the system telephone phone book menu They are not dis played in the System Phonebook menu of the user interface Entries in the system telephone phone book menu with the M mark refer to an entered Mobile Number of a user those with the H mark to Home Number 3 Note hybird support LDAP Lightweight Directory Access Protocol for providing the entries of the system phonebook to other devices Name Number as well as mobile and private numbers can be transferred this way 8 4 1 Entries In the Applications gt System Phonebook gt Entries menu all configured telephone book entries are display
206. epresents a group A sender e g Internet radio sends data to this group The addresses IP of the various senders within a group are called the source addresses Several senders with different IP addresses can therefore transmit to the same multicast group leading to a 1 to n rela tionship between groups and source addresses This information is forwarded to the router by means of reports In the case of incoming multicast data traffic a router can use this information to decide whether a host in its subnet wants to receive it Your device supports the current version IGMP V3 which is upwardly compatible which means that both V3 and V1 V2 hosts can be managed Your device supports the following multicast mechanisms e Forwarding This relates to static forwarding i e incoming data traffic for a group is passed in all cases This is a useful option if multicast data traffic is to be permanently passed e IGMP IGMP is used to gather information about the potential recipients in a subnet In the case of a hop incoming multicast data traffic can thus be selected Tip With multicast the focus is on excluding data traffic from unwanted multicast groups Note that if forwarding is combined with IGMP the packets can be forwarded to the groups specified in the forwarding request 11 1 General Gigaset Communications GmbH 11 Multicast 11 11 General In the Multicast gt General gt General menu you can disable or enable the
207. er which the system attempts to con tact the time server again following a failed time update 2 System Management Gigaset Communications GmbH Field Description Possible values e Normal default value The system attempts to contact the time server after 1 2 4 8 and 16 minutes e Aggressive For ten minutes the system attempts to con tact the time server after 1 2 4 8 seconds and then every 10 seconds e Endless For an unlimited period the system attempts to contact the time server after 1 2 4 8 seconds and then every 10 seconds If certificates are used to encrypt data traffic in a VPN it is ex tremely important that the correct time is set on the device To ensure this is the case for Time Update Policy select the value Endless Internal Time Server Select whether the internal timeserver is to be used The function is activated by selecting Enabled Time requests from a client will be answered with the current system time This is given as GMT without offset The function is enabled by default Clients time requests are answered in the LAN 2 2 4 Timer In the Timer menu you can configure the times at which particular system features are to be switched on by default The menu System Management gt Global Settings gt Timer consists of the following fields Fields in the Basic Settings menu Field Description Call Forwarding Enter the time after which a Call Forwarding CFNR will be CFNR e
208. erating status is displayed in green When generation has been completed successfully the status changes from Generating to Generated If an error occurs during the generation Not generated and the Generate Gigaset Communications GmbH 2 System Management Field Value link are displayed again You can then repeat generation If the Unknown status is displayed generation of a key is not possible for example because there is not enough space in the FlashROM DSA Key Status Shows the status of the DSA key If no DSA key has yet been generated Not generatedis displayed in red and a link Generate is provided If you se lect the link the generation process is triggered and the view is updated The Generating status is displayed in green When generation has been completed successfully the status changes from Generating to Generated If an error occurs during the generation Not generated and the Generate link are displayed again You can then repeat generation If the Unknown status is displayed generation of a key is not possible for example because there is not enough space in the FlashROM The menu Advanced Settings consists of the following fields Fields in the menu Advanced Settings Field Value Login Grace Time Enter the time in seconds that is available for establishing the connection If a client cannot be successfully authenticated during this time the connection is terminated The default value is 600 sec
209. erface type b Number of the wireless module on which the client link is configured c Number of the client link Example sta1 0 first client link on the first wireless module The name of the virtual interface connected to an Ethernet port is made up of the follow ing parts a Abbreviation for interface type b Number of the Ethernet port c Number of the interface connected to the Ethernet port Gigaset Communications GmbH 2 System Management d Number of the virtual interface Example en1 0 1 first virtual interface based on the first interface on the first Ethernet port 2 4 1 Interfaces You define separately whether each interface is to operate in routing or bridging mode If you want to set bridging mode you can either use existing bridge groups or create a new bridge group The default setting for all existing interfaces is routing mode When selecting the option New Bridge Group for Mode Bridge Group a bridge group i e br0 bri etc is automatically created and the interface is run in bridging mode The System Management gt Interface Mode Bridge Groups gt Interfaces menu con sists of the following fields Fields in the Interfaces menu Field Description Interface Description Displays the name of the interface Select whether you want to run the interface in Routing Mode Bridge Group Mode or whether you want to assign the interface to an existing br0 br1 etc or new bridge group New B
210. erflow RED Random Early Detection This proced ure ensures a smaller long term queue size for TCP based data traffic so that traffic bursts can also usually be transmitted without large packet losses The function is activated with Enabled The function is disabled by default Min queue size Enter the lower threshold value for the process prevention of data congestion RED in bytes Possible values are 0 to 262143 The default value is 0 Max queue size Enter the upper threshold value for the process prevention of data congestion RED in bytes Possible values are 0 to 262143 The default value is 16384 Gigaset Communications GmbH 10 Networking 10 4 Access Rules Accesses to data and functions are restricted with access lists which user gets to use which services and files You define filters for IP packets in order to allow or block access from or to the various hosts in connected networks This enables you to prevent undesired connections being set up via the gateway Access lists define the type of IP traffic the gateway is to accept or deny The access decision is based on information contained in the IP packets e g e source and or destination IP address e packet protocol e source and or destination port port ranges are supported Access lists are an effective means if for example sites with LANs interconnected over a bintec elmeg gateway wish to deny all incoming FTP requests or only allow Telnet ses
211. ers that are to be assigned to a particular interface Configuring a DNS server for a particular interface can be useful for example if accounts with different providers have been set up via different interfaces and load balancing is be ing used The Local Services gt DNS gt DNS Servers gt New menu consists of the following fields Fields in the Basic Parameters menu Field Description Admin Status Select whether the DNS server should be enabled The function is activated by selecting Enabled The function is enabled by default Description Enter a description for DNS server Priority Assign a priority to the DNS server You can assign more than one pair of DNS servers Primary DNS Server and Secondary DNS Server to an interface i e for example to an Ethernet port or a PPPoE WAN partner The pair with the highest priority is used if the interface is up Possible values from 0 highest priority to 9 lowest priority Gigaset Communications GmbH 15 Local Services Field Description The default value is 5 Interface Mode Select whether the IP addresses of name servers for resolving the names of Internet addresses are to be obtained automatic ally or whether up to two fixed DNS server addresses are to be entered depending on the priority Possible values o SEQELS e Dynamic default value Interface Select the interface to which the DNS server pair is to be as signed For Interface Mode Dynamic A
212. ersion 377 Version Check 340 View 160 VLAN 183 233 VLAN Identifier 183 VLAN Members 183 VLAN ID 180 233 VLAN Name 183 VLANs 183 Voice Applications 150 Voice Mail Language 173 Voice Mail System 177 Voice Mail Boxes 172 Voice Mail System 172 VolP 61 123 Volume 151 VPN 251 WwW Waiting Calls 160 Wake On LAN 362 Wake On LAN Filter 362 Wake On LAN Filter 365 Wake On LAN Rule Chain 365 Walled Garden 359 Walled Garden URL 359 Walled Network Netmask 359 WAN 230 Wave Files 151 Wave File 170 Web Access Password 164 Web Access Username 164 Weight 209 Wildcard 325 WINS Server 316 389 156 158 156 158 WOL Rules 365 Wrap up Time 164 Wrap up Timer 107 Write certificate in configuration 340 Xx X 31 82 XAUTH Profile 258 XAUTH Profiles 277 Z Zero Cookie Size 280 Zones 139 139 hybird 120 Gigaset Edition
213. ervers menu A certification authority certification service provider Certificate Authority CA issues your certificates to clients applying for a certificate via a certificate server The certificate server also issues the private key and provides certificate revocation lists CRL that are accessed by the device via LDAP or HTTP in order to verify certificates 2 8 3 1 New Choose the New button to set up a certificate server The System Management gt Certificates gt Certificate Servers gt New menu consists of the following fields Fields in the Basic Parameters menu Field Description Description Enter a unique description for the certificate server LDAP URL Path Enter the LDAP URL or the HTTP URL of the server Gigaset Communications GmbH 3 Physical Interfaces Chapter 3 Physical Interfaces 3 1 Ethernet Ports An Ethernet interface is a physical interface for connection to the local network or external networks The Ethernet ports ETH1 to ETH4 are assigned to a single logical Ethernet interface in ex works state The logical Ethernet interface en1 0 is assigned and is preconfigured with the IP Address 192 168 0 250 and Netmask 255 255 255 0 The logical Ethernet interface en 1 4 is assigned to the ETH5 port and is not precon figured En Note To ensure your system can be reached when splitting ports make sure that Ethernet interface en 1 0 with the preconfigured IP address and netmask is assigned to a port that
214. es A11 default value The destination port is not specified Specify port Enter a destination port Specify port range Enter a destination port range Source IP Address Enter the source IP address of the data packets and the cor Netmask responding netmask Only for Protocol TCP or UDP Source Port Range Enter a source port number or a range of source port numbers Possible values A11 default value The destination port is not specified Specify port Enter a destination port Specify port range Enter a destination port range DSCP TOS Filter Select the Type of Service TOS Layer 3 Possible values Ignore default value The type of service is ignored DSCP Binary Value Differentiated Services Code Point according to RFC 3260 is used to signal the priority of IP packets indicated in binary format 6 bit DSCP Decimal Value Differentiated Services Code Point according to RFC 3260 is used to signal the priority of IP packets indicated in decimal format DSCP Hexadecimal Value Differentiated Services Code Point according to RFC 3260 is used to signal the priority of IP packets indicated in hexadecimal format TOS Binary Value The TOS value is specified in binary format e g 00111111 TOS Decimal Value The TOS value is specified in decim al format e g 63 Gigaset Communications GmbH 15 Local Services Field Description e TOS Hexadecimal Value The TOS value is specified in
215. es gt New consists of the following fields Fields in the Basic Parameters menu Field Description Monitored Interface Select the interface on your device that is to be monitored Trigger Select the state or state transition of Monitored Interface that is to trigger a particular Interface Action Possible values e Interface goes up default value e Interface goes down Interface Action Select the action that is to follow the state or state transition defined in Trigger The action is applied to the Interface s selected in Interface Possible values e Enable default value Activation of interface s 15 Local Services Gigaset Communications GmbH Field Description e Disable Deactivation of interface s Interface Select the interface s for which the action defined in Interface is to be performed You can choose all physical and virtual interfaces as well as options 411 PPP Interfaces and A11 IPSec Inter faces 15 7 3 Ping Generator In the Local Services gt Surveillance gt Ping Generator menu a list of all configured automatically generated pings is displayed 15 7 3 1 Edit or New Choose the pl icon to edit existing entries Choose the New button to create additional pings The menu Local Services gt Surveillance gt Ping Generator gt New consists of the follow ing fields Fields in the Basic Parameters menu Field Description Destination IP Address Enter the IP address to which the ping is
216. es not signal whether a peer is actually online and cannot cause a peer to set up an Internet connection to enable an IPSec tunnel over the Internet This possibility is created with IPSec callback Using a direct ISDN call to a peer you can sig nal that you are online and waiting for the peer to set up an IPSec tunnel over the Internet If the called peer currently has no connection to the Internet the ISDN call causes a con nection to be set up This ISDN call costs nothing depending on country as it does not have to be accepted by your device The identification of the caller from his or her ISDN number is enough information to initiate setting up a tunnel To set up this service you must first configure a call number for IPSec callback on the passive side in the Physical Interfaces gt ISDN Ports gt MSN Configuration gt New menu 13 VPN Gigaset Communications GmbH The value IPSec is available for this purpose in the field Service This entry ensures that incoming calls for this number are routed to the IPSec service If callback is active the peer is caused to initiate setting up an IPSec tunnel by an ISDN call as soon as this tunnel is required If callback is set to passive setting up a tunnel to the peer is always initiated if an ISDN call is received on the relevant number MSN in menu Physical Interfaces gt ISDN Ports gt MSN Configuration gt New for Service IPSec This ensures that both peers are reachable and that the con
217. es user defined profiles pre defined profiles are available Possible values e None use default profile Uses the profile marked as standard in VPN gt IPSec gt Phase 2 Profiles e Multi Proposal Uses a special profile which contains the proposals for Phase 2 3DES MD5 AES 128 MD5 and Blow fish MD5 regardless of the proposal selection in menu VPN gt IPSec gt Phase 2 Profiles e lt Profilname gt Uses a profile configured in menu VPN gt IPSec gt Phase 2 Profiles for Phase 2 XAUTH Profile Select a profile created in VPN gt IPSec gt XAUTH Profiles if you wish to use this IPSec peer XAuth for authentication If XAuth is used together with IKE Config Mode the transac tions for XAuth are carried out before the transactions for IKE Config Mode Number of Admitted Choose how many users can connect using this peer profile Connections Possible values e One User default value Only one peer can be connected with the data defined in this profile e Multiple Users Several peers can be connected with the data defined in this profile The peer entry is duplicated for each connection request with the data defined in this profile Start Mode Select how the peer is to be switched to the active state Possible values 13 VPN Gigaset Communications GmbH Field Description e On Demand default value The peer is switched to the act ive state by a trigger e Always up The peer is always active Fields in th
218. escription Connections Nr Shows the serial number of the connection Internal Number Displays the assigned internal number Displayed Description Displays the description that will be displayed on the IP tele phone s display User Displays the user s name 6 1 1 3 Settings In the Terminals gt Gigaset Phones gt Gigaset Phones gt Settings menu you can reset the telephone s administrator password The Terminals gt Gigaset Phones gt Gigaset Phones gt Settings menu consists of the fol lowing fields Fields in the menu System Phone Gigaset Communications GmbH 6 Terminals Field Description Admin Password Select whether the administrator password should be reset The function is activated by selecting Enabled The function is disabled by default As soon as you select the OK button the password is reset to the default setting 6 1 2 Gigaset DECT The menu Terminals gt Gigaset Phones gt Gigaset DECT displays the base stations of the connected DECT single cell and multi cell systems Any base stations that are connected are automatically detected and listed in the lower part of the overview DHCP is required for this Choose the Fr icon to edit existing entries As soon as a Description is entered for a base station and copied with OK the entry for that device is moved to the upper part of the overview After a short time the icons j and P are displayed for this device To be able to use automatic provisionin
219. ets are always handled with priority e Disabled default value QoS is deactivated on the inter face The existing configuration is not deleted but can be ac tivated again if required Traffic shaping Activate or deactivate data rate limiting in the send direction The function is enabled with Enabled The function is disabled by default Maximum Upload Only for Traffic shaping enabled Speed Enter a maximum data rate for the queue in the send direction in kbits Possible values are 0 to 1000000 The default value is 0 i e no limits are set the queue can oc cupy the maximum bandwidth Protocol Header Size Only for Traffic shaping enabled below Layer 3 Choose the interface type to include the size of the respective overheads of a datagram when calculating the bandwidth Possible values e User defined Value in byte Possible values are 0 to 100 10 Networking Gigaset Communications GmbH Field Description e Undefined Protocol Header Offset 0 default value Can only be selected for Ethernet interfaces e Ethernet e Ethernet and VLAN e PPP over Ethernet e PPP over Ethernet and VLAN Can only be selected for IPSec interfaces e IPSec over Ethernet e IPSec over Ethernet and VLAN e IPSec via PPP over Ethernet e IPSec via PPPoE and VLAN Encryption Method Only if an IPSec Peers is selected as Interface Traffic shap ing is Active and Protocol Header Size below Layer 3 is not Undefiniert
220. etwork to do this All of the interfaces are then configured with the same IP address Within a segment network components which are connected to a connection can then be grouped and for example be protected by firewall Data traffic from network components between individual segments which are assigned to different ports are then controlled ac cording to the configured firewall rules 10 5 1 Drop In Groups The Networking gt Drop In gt Drop In Groups menu displays a list of all the Drop In Groups Each Drop In group represents a network 10 5 1 1 New Select the New button to set up other Drop In Groups The Networking gt Drop In gt Drop In Groups gt New menu consists of the following fields Fields in the Basic Parameters menu Field Description Group Description Enter a unique name for the Drop In group Mode Select which mode is to be used to send the MAC addresses of network components Possible values e Transparent default value ARP packets and IP packets belonging to the drop in network are routed transparently unchanged e Proxy ARP packets and IP packets related to the drop in network are forwarded with the MAC address of the corres ponding interface Network Configuration Select how an IP address netmask is assigned to the Drop In network Gigaset Communications GmbH 10 Networking Field Description Possible values e Static default value DHCP Network Address Only for Network Configu
221. ev eral internal numbers Possible values e No free Extension Available All configured internal numbers are already in use First configure another user with additional numbers e lt Internal Number gt Select one of the existing numbers of the configured users 6 2 3 analog In the Terminals gt Other phones gt analog menu you configure the connected analogue terminals For example you perform assignment of a configured internal number 6 2 3 1 Edit Choose the E icon to edit existing entries Choose the E icon to copy existing entries Copying an entry can prove useful if you wish to create an entry only distinguished by a few parameters from an existing entry In this case you copy the entry and modify the desired parameters The Terminals gt Other phones gt analog gt Edit menu consists of the following fields Fields in the Basic Settings menu Field Description Description Enter a description for the analogue telephone Interface Select the interface to which the telephone shall be connected Fields in the Basic Phone Settings menu Field Description Terminal Type Select the terminal type 6 Terminals Gigaset Communications GmbH Field Description Possible values e Multi Function Device Telefax e Telephone Modem e Answering Machine e Emergency Phone Internal Number Select the internal number for this terminal Possible values e No free Extension Available The configured intern
222. ey Size 340 Index Key Value 299 L L2TP 282 LAN 179 Language 173 177 Language for login window 359 Last configuration stored 2 Last Member Query Interval 226 Layer 4 Protocol 189 LCP Alive Check 235 239 288 294 LDAP URL Path 50 Lease Time 329 Level 380 390 Level No 38 Licence Key 19 Licence Serial Number 19 License Allocation 173 Lifetime 178 266 273 Line 160 Line Access Digit 20 Lines 160 Load firmware 377 Local Certificate 266 Local Hostname 283 Local Address 394 Local Certificate 323 Local Services 314 Local Certificate Description 48 49 340 Local File Name 340 Local GRE IP Address 299 LocalID 253 391 Local ID Type 253 266 Local ID Value 266 Local IP Address 188 220 234 238 242 255 285 287 293 299 Local IP Address 391 Local Port 391 394 Local PPTP IP Address 239 Locality 46 Location 4 65 116 120 123 Index Log Format 382 Log on Log off 112 163 Logged Actions 307 Logging Level 27 Login Frameset 360 Login Grace Time 27 Logon 395 Loopback active 193 Lost Calls Today 160 MAC Address 116 120 180 332 MAC Address 375 394 Mail Exchanger MX 325 Maintenance 368 Management VID 185 Matching String 383 Max Recording Time 173 Max waiting time in the queue 146 Max incoming control connections per remote IP Address 297 Max queue size 212 Maximum Downstream Bandwidth 69 Maximum Number of Dialup Retries 235 239 244 Maxi
223. fault gateway is to be monitored by your device select an ID for the group or the default gateway The group IDs are automatically created from 0 to 255 If an entry has not yet been created a new group is created using the New ID option If entries have been created you can se lect one from the list of created groups Each host to be monitored must be assigned to a group The operation configured in Interface is only executed if no group member can be reached Fields in the Trigger menu Field Description Monitored IP Address Enter the IP address of the host to be monitored Possible values e Default Gateway default value The default gateway is monitored e Specific Enter the IP address of the host to be monitored manually in the adjacent input field Source IP Address Select how the IP address is to be determined that your device uses as the source address of the packet sent to the host to be 15 Local Services Gigaset Communications GmbH Field Description monitored Possible values e Automatic default value The IP address is determined automatically e Specific Enter the IP address in the adjacent input field Interval Enter the time interval in seconds to be used for checking the availability of hosts Possible values are 1 to 65536 The default value is 10 Within a group the smallest Interval of the group members is used Successful Trials Specify how many pings need to be answered for the
224. fish Blowfish is a very secure and fast algorithm Twofish can be regarded as the successor to Blowfish e CAST CAST is also a very secure algorithm marginally slower than Blowfish but faster than 3DES Gigaset Communications GmbH 13 VPN Field Description DES DES is an older encryption algorithm which is rated as weak due to its small effective length of 56 bits e AES Rijndael has been nominated as AES due to its fast key setup low memory requirements high level of security against attacks and general speed The partner s AES key length is used here If this has also selected the parameter AES akey length of 128 bits is used e AES 128 Rijndael has been nominated as AES due to its fast key setup low memory requirements high level of se curity against attacks and general speed Here it is used with a key length of 128 bits e AES 192 Rijndael has been nominated as AES due to its fast key setup low memory requirements high level of se curity against attacks and general speed Here it is used with a key length of 192 bits e AES 256 Rijndael has been nominated as AES due to its fast key setup low memory requirements high level of se curity against attacks and general speed Here it is used with a key length of 256 bits Hash algorithms Authentication e MD5 default value MD5 Message Digest 5 is an older hash algorithm It is used with a 96 bit digest length for IPSec e SHA1 SHA1 Secure Has
225. for a specific purpose e Tagged VLAN This option only applies for routing inter faces You use this option to assign the interface to a VLAN This is done using the VLAN ID which is displayed in this mode and can be configured The definition of a MAC address in MAC Address is optional in this module MAC Address Only with virtual interfaces and only for Interface Mode Un tagged Enter the MAC address associated with the interface For virtu al interfaces you can use the MAC address of the physical in terface under which the virtual interface was created but this is not necessary You can also allocate a virtual MAC address The first 6 characters of the MAC are preset but can be changed VLAN ID Only for Interface Mode Tagged VLAN This option only applies for routing interfaces Assign the inter face to a VLAN by entering the VLAN ID of the relevant VLAN Possible values are 1 default value to 4094 The menu Advanced Settings consists of the following fields Fields in the Advanced Settings menu Field Description DHCP MAC Address Only for Address Mode DHCP If Use built in is activated default setting the hardware MAC address of the Ethernet interface is used In the case of physic al interfaces the current MAC address is entered by default If you disable Use built in you enter an MAC address for the virtual interface e g 00 e1 9 06 bf 03 Some providers use hardware independent MAC addresse
226. for data traffic classified as outgoing and for data traffic classified in both direc tions A priority is assigned to these automatic queues The value of the priority is equal to the value of the class ID You can change the default priority of a queue If you add new queues you can also use classes in other class plans via the class ID 10 3 3 1 New Choose the New button to create additional prioritisations The Networking gt 00S gt 00S Interfaces Policies gt New menu consists of the following fields Fields in the Basic Parameters menu Field Description Interface Select the interface for which QoS is to be configured Prioritisation Al Select the algorithm according to which the queues are to be gorithm processed This activates and deactivates QoS on the selected interface Gigaset Communications GmbH 10 Networking Field Description Possible values e Priority Queueing QoS is activated on the interface The available bandwidth is distributed strictly according to the queue priority e Weighted Round Robin QoS is activated on the inter face The available bandwidth is distributed according to the weighting weight of the queue Exception High priority packets are always handled with priority Weighted Fair Queueing QoS is activated on the inter face The available bandwidth is distributed as fairly as pos sible among the automatically detected traffic flows ina queue Exception High priority pack
227. for the firewall Make sure therefore that data traffic that has not been expressly authorised if blocked by the firewall Priority Only for Action Access and Apply QoS Enabled Select the priority with which the data specified by the policy is handled on the send side Possible values e None default value No priority e Low Latency Low Latency Transmission LTT i e hand ling of data with the lowest possible latency e g suitable for VoIP data e High e Medium e Low 14 1 2 QoS More and more applications need increasingly larger bandwidths which are not always available Quality of Service QoS makes it possible to distribute the available band widths effectively and intelligently Certain applications can be given preference and band width reserved for them A list of all QoS rules is displayed in the Firewall gt Policies gt QoS menu 14 1 2 1 New Choose the New button to set up new QoS rules The Firewall gt Policies gt QoS gt New menu consists of the following fields Fields in the Configure QoS Interface menu Field Description Interface Select the interface on which bandwidth management is to be carried out Traffic Shaping Select whether you want to activate bandwidth management Gigaset Communications GmbH 14 Firewall Field Description for the selected interface The function is enabled with Enabled The function is disabled by default Specify bandwidth Only for Traffic Shapi
228. for the alarm Active Variant Select the call options that are to be enabled You can config ure the options as soon as you have confirmed the entry in the General tab with OK The menu Advanced Settings consists of the following fields Fields in the menu Advanced Settings Field Description Alarm Signalling Peri od Enter the length of time for which an alarm is to be signalled in seconds The default value is 30 seconds Repeat after Specify the time between the alarm repeats in seconds A value of between 1 and 600 seconds is possible The default value is 10 seconds Call repeats are not possible via a FXO interface Number of repeats Specify the number of repeats if the alarm is not taken A value of between 1 and 10 repeats is possible The default value is 2 Call repeats are not possible via a FXO interface External Connection Specify the maximum duration of an external call once it has Timer been accepted in seconds A value of between 1 and 600 seconds is possible The default value is 60 seconds Info Message UUS1 Optionally a message max 32 characters can be sent to ISDN terminals Relay Contact If a relay is to be switched on during the alarm Select the relay that is to be used Configuration of the Relay is done in the menu Physical Interfaces gt Relay Wave File Select whether and which saved WAV file is to be played when the alarm call is taken Gigaset Communications GmbH 8 Appl
229. full duplex for all resulting interfaces remains the same For example if you split all the switch ports from each other each of the resulting interfaces only uses a part of the total bandwidth If you group together several switch ports into one interface the full bandwidth of max 1000 mbps full duplex is available for all the ports together The menu Physical Interfaces gt Ethernet Ports gt Port Configuration consists of the fol lowing fields Fields in the Switch Configuration menu Field Description Switch Port Shows the respective switch port The numbering corresponds to the numbering of the Ethernet ports on the back of the device Ethernet Interface Se Assign a logical Ethernet interface to the switch port lection You can select from five interfaces en1 0 to en1 2 In the basic setting switch port 1 4 has the en1 0 interface as signed to it Configured Speed Select the mode in which the interface is to run Mode Possible values e Full Autonegotiation default value e Auto 1000 mbps only e Auto 100 mbps only e Auto 10 mbps only Auto 100 mbps Full Duplex Gigaset Communications GmbH 3 Physical Interfaces Field Description Auto 100 mbps Half Duplex e Auto 10 mbps Full Duplex e Auto 10 mbps Half Duplex e Fixed 1000 mbps Full Duplex e Fixed 100 mbps Full Duplex e Fixed 100 mbps Half Duplex e Fixed 10 mbps Full Duplex e Fixed 10 mbps Half Duplex e None The interface is
230. fy whether Net work Address Translation NAT is to be enabled The function is enabled with Enabled The function is disabled by default Local IP Address Only for IP Address Mode Static Assign the IP address from your LAN to the PPTP interface which is to be used as your device s internal source address Route Entries Only if IP Address Mode Static Define routing entries for this connection partner e Remote IP Address IP address of the destination host or LAN e Netmask Netmask for Remote IP Address 13 VPN Gigaset Communications GmbH Field Description e Metric The lower the value the higher the priority of the route possible values 0 15 The default value is 7 IP Assignment Pool IPCP Only if PPTP Mode pws IP Address Mode Provide IP Address Select a IP pool configured in the VPN gt PPTP gt IP Pools menu The menu Advanced Settings consists of the following fields Fields in the Advanced Settings menu Field Description Block after connection failure for Enter the wait time in seconds before the device should try again after an attempt to set up a connection has failed The default value is 300 Authentication Select the authentication protocol for this PPTP partner Possible values e PAP Only run PAP PPP Password Authentication Protocol the password is transferred unencrypted e CHAP Only run CHAP PPP Challenge Handshake Authen tication Protocol as per RFC 1994
231. g e Internal external target subscribers as well as teams can be dialled e A return call occurs in case of invalid or engaged target number If the subscriber is free a return call is made according to the target subscriber s defined period e With transfer to a team number there is no return call in case of an engaged or un reachable team e With transfer to a team number only return call after time is supported ISDN terminals Configuration and operation of call waiting occurs as described in the users guides of the corresponding terminals ISDN terminals use their own tones to signal call waiting Cz Note Call waiting is not possible e for conference calls e for do not disturb analogue terminals e for announcements e for room monitoring e for terminals for which the Data Protection performance feature is set up e g fax modem e in analogue subscriber s dialling status the receiver has been picked up but there is no connection yet e for current call waiting protection for dialling a team number Then there is no call waiting for analogue team subscribers ISDN telephones can also transfer a call waiting to another subscriber via the Call Deflection performance feature An active connection is ended by replacing the receiver for example The call waiting connection is then sig nalled and can be accepted e g by picking up the receiver The Numbering gt User Settings gt Class of Services gt Fe
232. g click the icon again and add the relevant phone numbers Select the New button to manually set up a new base station Select the button j to go to the base station s Web configurator This is described in the user guide for the relevant DECT system Use the automatic provisioning to use the elmeg hybird to transfer elementary telephony parameters to the DECT system If you want to use the assistant First Steps to do this you activate the value elmeg IP1x DECT under Assistants gt First steps gt Advanced Settings gt Add in the field Transmit Provisioning Server for Instead of this you can also set the fields Option URL provisioning server and Value http lt IP address of the provisioning server gt eg prov under Local Services gt DHCP Server gt DHCP Configuration gt New gt Advanced Settings To register the mobile parts you first set the base station to login mode Then you do the registering of the mobile parts on the mobile parts themselves To configure the base sta tion in any more detail you need to use the DECT system s web configurator Select the button P to trigger an update of the device s provisioning If the update is suc cessful the updated value displays in the Last seen column within 10 seconds 6 Terminals Gigaset Communications GmbH C Note If you wish to test whether your base station is correctly configured and ac cessible select the button P and check whether an updated value is dis
233. g Enabled The function is disabled by default If the function is active you can enter the following options e Reload Interval Enter the time period in seconds between update intervals The default entry here is 0 i e an automatic reload is not car ried out 2 6 2 TACACS TACACS permits access control for your device network access servers NAS and oth er network components via one or more central servers Like RADIUS TACACS is an AAA protocol and offers authentication authorisation and accounting services TACACS Accounting is currently not supported by bintec elmeg devices The following TACACS functions are available on your device e Authentication for login shell e Command authorisation on the shell e g telnet show TACACS uses TCP port 49 and establishes a secure and encrypted connection Gigaset Communications GmbH 2 System Management A list of all entered TACACS servers is displayed in the System Management gt Remote Authentication gt TACACS menu 2 6 2 1 Edit or New Choose the E icon to edit existing entries Choose the New button to add TACACS servers The System Management gt Remote Authentication gt TACACS gt New menu consists of the following fields Fields in the Basic Parameters menu Field Description Authentication Type Displays which TACACS function is to be used The value cannot be changed Possible values e Login Authentication Here you can define whether
234. g Mode Select how dialling shall be externally routed Possible values e Default default value The default procedure provides that when dialling externally the prefix entered under Call prefix is placed first e Route External dialling is set up via the bundle selected in Route Gigaset Communications GmbH 7 Call Routing Field Description Call prefix Enter the number to be placed as a prefix when making an ex ternal call e g to set up a connection via a call by call pro vider Route Only if Routing Mode Route Select a bundle via which the external call shall proceed 7 2 3 Zones amp Routing In the menu Call Routing gt Automatic Route Selection gt Zones amp Routing you define the zones via which dialling shall proceed using specific routes or providers Configuration of the routing tables for the defined zones occurs individually for each week day For 2 routing tables routing level 1 and routing level 2 can be created as fallback Choose the ry icon to edit existing entries Select the New button to create new entries 7 2 3 1 Numbers In the Numbers area enter the number or partial number of the zones for which you wish to configure the routing tables Fields in the Basic Settings menu Field Description Description Enter a description for the entry Zones Configure the desired external zones which should be dialled via the desired entered provider routes Possible values e Number Partial Nu
235. ge 224 0 0 0 4 are to be forwarded from the defined Source Interface to the defined Destination Interface To do this check Enabled Disable the option if you only want to forward one defined mul ticast group to a particular interface The option is deactivated by default Multicast Group Ad Only for All Multicast Groups not active dress Enter here the address of the multicast group you want to for ward from a defined Source Interface to a defined Destina tion Interface Source Interface Select the interface on your device to which the selected mul ticast group is sent Destination Interface Select the interface on your device to which the selected mul ticast group is to be forwarded 12 WAN Gigaset Communications GmbH Chapter 12 WAN This menu offers various options for configuring accesses or connections from your LAN to the WAN You can also optimise voice transmission here for telephone calls over the Internet 12 1 Internet Dialup In this menu you can set up Internet access or dialup connections In addition you can create address pools for the dynamic assignment of IP addresses To enable your device to set up connections to networks or hosts outside your LAN you must configure the partners you want to connect to on your device This applies to outgo ing connections your device dials its WAN partner and incoming connections a remote partner dials the number of your device If you want to set up
236. ge of configuration data For an incoming connection your device sends a request with user name and password to the RADIUS server which then searches its database If the user is found and can be authenticated the RADIUS server sends corresponding confirmation to your device This confirmation also contains parameters called RADIUS attributes which your device uses as WAN connection parameters 2 System Management Gigaset Communications GmbH If the RADIUS server is used for accounting your device sends an accounting message at the start of the connection and a message at the end of the connection These start and end messages also contain statistical information about the connection IP address user name throughput costs RADIUS packets The following types of packets are sent between the RADIUS server and your device client Packet types Field Value ACCESS_REQUEST Client gt Server If an access request is received by your device a request is sent to the RADIUS server if no corresponding connection part ner has been found on your device ACCESS_ACCEPT Server gt Client If the RADIUS server has authenticated the information con tained in the ACCESS_REQUEST it sends an AC CESS_ACCEPT to your device together with the parameters used for setting up the connection ACCESS_REJECT Server gt Client If the information contained in the ACCESS_REQUEST does not correspond to the information in the user database
237. ging 104 Parent Location 69 Passed 393 Password 40 44 48 49 61 89 233 237 241 277 283 286 291 324 333 340 365 370 385 Password for protected Certificate 340 Password for IP Phone Registration 89 Passwords 10 PBX coupling 65 Peer Address 253 Peer ID 253 Permanent Layer 2 Activation 55 Permit Call Forwarding 106 Personal Access 89 Phase 1 Profile 258 Phase 1 Profiles 266 Index Phase 2 Profile 258 Phase 2 Profiles 273 Phone Number 153 Phone Number 155 Phone Version 375 Phone Type 116 120 131 375 377 Phone Update 374 Physical Address 395 Physical Interfaces 51 Pick up Group 96 Pick up Extension 20 Pick up Group 20 PIN 6 Digit Numeric 114 PIN for Phone Access 89 PINI 11 PIN2 11 Ping 24 Ping Generator 354 Ping Test 368 Policies 303 Policy 32 36 Pool Usage 329 Pop Up window for status indication 360 POP3 Server 385 POP3 Timeout 385 Port 76 193 326 Port Number 124 Port Configuration 52 184 Port STUN server 64 Ports 76 Positive Cache 316 PPPoE 232 PPPoE Mode 233 PPPoE Ethernet Interface 233 PPPoE Interfaces for Multilink 233 PPTP 237 291 PPTP Inactivity 308 PPTP Passthrough 193 PPTP Tunnels 291 PPTP Address Mode 239 PPTP Ethernet Interface 237 PPTP Mode 291 Gigaset Communications GmbH Preshared Key 253 Primary DHCP Server 332 Primary DNS Server 318 Prioritisation Algorithm 206 Prioritize TCP ACK Packets 235 239 288 294
238. gt Rout ing Stage 1 not available connection setup is terminated e 2 If the entered provider or selected bundle Call Routing gt Automatic Route Selection gt Zones amp Routing gt 7 Call Routing Gigaset Communications GmbH Field Description Edit Add gt Mo Su gt Routing Stage 1 is not available there is an attempt to initiate the connection over the addi tional entered routing variant Call Routing gt Automatic Route Selection gt Zones amp Routing gt Edit Add gt Mo Su gt Routing Stage 2 e 3 default value If neither of the two entered providers or bundles Call Routing gt Automatic Route Selection gt Zones amp Routing gt Edit Add gt Mo Su gt Rout ing Stage 1 and Routing Stage 2 is available dialling oc curs via the provider entered as the default for the user Numbering gt Class of Service gt Add gt Basic Settings gt Trunk Line Selection with Line Access Num ber 7 2 2 Interfaces Provider In the Call Routing gt Automatic Route Selection gt Interfaces Provider menu enter the routes or providers along with their network access profiles 7 2 2 1 Edit or New Choose the 3 icon to edit existing entries Select the New button to create new entries The Call Routing gt Automatic Route Selection gt Interfaces Provider gt New menu consists of the following fields Fields in the Basic Settings menu Field Description Description Enter a description for the entry Routin
239. h Algorithm 1 is a hash algorithm developed by NSA United States National Security Associ ation It is rated as secure but is slower than MD5 It is used with a 96 bit digest length for IPSec e RipeMD 160 RipeMD 160 is a 160 bit hash algorithm It is used as a secure replacement for MD5 and RipeMD e Tiger1 92 Tiger 192 is a relatively new and very fast al gorithm Please note that the description of the encryption and authen tication or the hash algorithms is based on the author s know ledge and opinion at the time of creating this User Guide In particular the quality of the algorithms is subject to relative as pects and may change due to mathematical or cryptographic developments 13 VPN Gigaset Communications GmbH Field Description DH Group Only for Phase 1 IKE Parameters The Diffie Hellman group defines the parameter set used as the basis for the key calculation during phase 1 MODP as supported by bintec elmeg devices stands for modular expo nentiation Possible values e 1 768 Bit During the Diffie Hellman key calculation modular exponentiation at 768 bits is used to create the en cryption material e 2 1024 Bit During the Diffie Hellman key calculation modular exponentiation at 1024 bits is used to create the en cryption material e 5 1536 Bit During the Diffie Hellman key calculation modular exponentiation at 1536 bits is used to create the en cryption material Lifetime Create
240. h be entered Your device can also receive the global name servers dynamically via PPP or DHCP and transfer them dynamically if necessary Strategy for name resolution on your device A DNS request is handled by your device as follows 1 If possible the request is answered directly from the static or dynamic cache with IP address or negative response 2 Otherwise if a suitable forwarding entry exists the relevant DNS server is asked de pending on the configuration of the Internet or dialin connections if necessary by set ting up a WAN connection at extra cost If the DNS server can resolve the name the information is forwarded and a dynamic entry created in the cache 3 Otherwise if name servers have been entered taking into account the priority con figured and if the relevant interface status is up the primary DNS server is queried and then the secondary DNS server If one of the DNS servers can resolve the name the information is forwarded and a dynamic entry created in the cache 4 Otherwise if a suitable Internet or dialin connection is selected as the standard inter face the relevant DNS server is asked depending on the configuration of the Inter net or dialin connections if necessary by setting up a WAN connection at extra cost If one of the DNS servers can resolve the name the information is forwarded and a dynamic entry created in the cache 5 Otherwise if overwriting the addresses of the global name
241. han one filter rule matches a packet only the first rule is executed This means that if the first rule denies a packet whereas a later rule allows it the packet is rejected A deny rule also has no effect if a relevant packet has previously been allowed by another filter rule A list of all configured filter rules is displayed in the Firewall gt Policies gt Filter Rules menu You can use the dl button to insert another policy above the list entry The configuration menu for creating a new policy opens You can use the A button to move the list entry A dialog box opens in which you can se lect the position to which the policy is to be moved 14 1 1 1 New Choose the New button to create additional parameters The menu Firewall gt Policies gt Filter Rules gt New consists of the following fields Fields in the Basic Parameters menu Field Description Source Select one of the preconfigured aliases for the source of the packet In the list all WAN LAN interfaces interface groups see Fire wall gt Interfaces gt Groups addresses see Firewall gt Ad dresses gt Address List and address groups see Firewall gt Addresses gt Groups are available The value Any means that neither the source interface nor the source address is checked Destination Select one of the preconfigured aliases for the destination of the packet In the list all WAN LAN interfaces interface groups see Fire wall gt Interfaces gt Groups a
242. he ISDN standard connection Please inquire of your network operator the extent to which indi vidual performance features must be separately ordered for your ISDN con nection The menu Advanced Settings consists of the following fields Fields in the Further Settings menu Field Description Dial Control Select whether numbers entered in the Call Routing gt Outgo ing Services gt Dial Control menu shall be allowed or denied also for this authorisation class The function is activated by selecting Enabled The function is disabled by default Automatic Route Se Select whether the routing rules entered in the Call lection ARS Routing gt Automatic Route Selection menu shall also be ap plied to this authorisation class The function is activated by selecting Enabled The function is disabled by default Show Outgoing Num Select whether the caller number shall be displayed to the ber CLIP called party The function is activated by selecting Enabled The function is enabled by default Show Connected Num Select whether the called party number shall be displayed to ber COLP the caller If for example the called party has set up call forwarding to a 5 Numbering Gigaset Communications GmbH Field Description third subscriber the caller can display the number of the call forwarding destination using this performance feature The function is activated by selecting Enabled The function is enabled by default
243. he gateway can take on two different roles when using XAuth as it can act as a server or as a client e As a server the gateway requires a proof of authorisation e Asa client the gateway provides proof of authorisation In server mode multiple users can obtain authentication via XAuth e g users of Apple iPhones Authorisation is verified either on the basis of a list or via a Radius Server If us ing a one time password OTP the password check can be carried out by a token server e g SecOVID from Kobil which is installed behind the Radius Server If a company s headquarters is connected to several branches via IPSec several peers can be con figured A specific user can then use the IPSec tunnel over various peers depending on the assignment of various profiles This is useful for example if an employee works al ternately in different branches if each peer represents a branch and if the employee wishes to have on site access to the tunnel XAuth is carried out once IPSec IKE Phase 1 has been completed successfully and be fore IKE Phase 2 begins If XAuth is used together with IKE Config Mode the transactions for XAuth are carried out before the transactions for IKE Config Mode 13 1 4 1 New Choose the New button to create additional profiles The VPN gt IPSec gt XAUTH Profiles gt New menu consists of the following fields Fields in the Basic Parameters menu Field Description Description Enter a description f
244. he maximum time in seconds that your device waits between Retries before resending a L2TP control packet for which it received no response The available values are 8 to 255 the default value is 16 Maximum Retries Enter the maximum number of times your device is to try to re send the L2TP control packet for which is received no re sponse The available values are 8 to 255 the default value is 5 Data Packets Se Select whether your device is to use sequence numbers for quence Numbers data packets sent through a tunnel on the basis of this profile The function is enabled with Enabled The function is disabled by default 13 VPN 13 2 2 Users Gigaset Communications GmbH A list of all configured interface L2TP partners is displayed in the VPN gt L2TP gt Users menu 13 2 2 1 New Choose the New button to set up new L2TP partners The menu VPN gt L2TP gt Users gt New consists of the following fields Fields in the Basic Parameters menu Field Description Description Connection Type Tunnel Profile User Name Password Always on Enter a name for uniquely identifying the L2TP partner The first character in this field must not be a number No special characters or umlauts must be used The maximum length of the entry is 25 characters Select whether the L2TP partner is to take on the role of the L2TP network server LNS or the functions of a L2TP access concentrator client LAC client Possi
245. he messages are output together with messages from other subsystems Possible values e A11 default value All firewall activities are displayed e Deny Only reject and deny events are shown see Action e Accept Only accept events are shown e None Syslog messages are not generated Full Filtering Here you define whether packets are only to be filtered if they are sent to an interface other than the interface that created the connection With Enable all the packets are filtered default value Fields in the Session Timer menu Field Description UDP Inactivity Enter the inactivity time after which a UDP session is to be re garded as expired in seconds Possible values are 30 to 86400 The default value is 180 TCP Inactivity Enter the inactivity time after which a TCP session is to be re garded as expired in seconds Possible values are 30 to 86400 The default value is 3600 PPTP Inactivity Enter the inactivity time after which a PPTP session is to be re garded as expired in seconds Possible values are 30 to 86400 The default value is 86400 Other Inactivity Enter the inactivity time after which a session of another type is to be regarded as expired in seconds Field Description Possible values are 30 to 86400 The default value is 30 14 2 Interfaces 14 2 1 Groups A list of all configured interface routes is displayed in the Firewall gt Interfaces gt Groups menu You can g
246. he number which can even be dialled if all B channels are occupied In this case an external B channel is released for this connection and reassigned for the priority call An ongo ing priority call is not interrupted 72 Automatic Route Selection In the Call Routing gt Automatic Route Selection menu you can set up routes for ex ternal calls in addition to configured line occupancy Here bundles released for users can be selectively assigned to ongoing calls according to the dialled number or new providers entered along with their network access prefixes You then specifically define the routing for individually created zones for every weekday 7 2 1 General In the Call Routing gt Automatic Route Selection gt General menu you enable the ARS Automatic Route Selection function and select the desired route level The menu Call Routing gt Automatic Route Selection gt General consists of the following fields Fields in the Basic Settings menu Field Description ARS Select whether to enable the ARS performance feature Automatic Route Selection The function is activated by selecting Enabled The function is disabled by default Routing Stage Select whether additional routes shall be used if an entered provider or bundle cannot be accessed Possible values e 1 No Fallback lf the entered provider or selected bundle is Call Routing gt Automatic Route Selection gt Zones amp Routing gt Edit Add gt Mo Su
247. her this authorisation class may receive information tion about existing messages MWI Message Waiting Indication Gigaset Communications GmbH 5 Numbering Field Description The function is activated by selecting Enabled The function is enabled by default Net Direct Keypad Select whether you wish to use your network operator s current ISDN functions also from older ISDN or analogue telephones by entering a key sequence The function is activated by selecting Enabled The function is disabled by default 5 2 2 3 Applications Additional applications are configured in the Numbering gt User Settings gt Class of Ser vices gt Applications menu The Numbering gt User Settings gt Class of Services gt Applications menu consists of the following fields Fields in the Application Authorization menu Field Description System Phonebook Select whether this authorisation class may use entries in the Authorization system phone book and if so to what extent Possible values e Yes according to line access authorization default value System phone book entries may be used unless located beyond the configured line ac cess authorisation e Yes without restrictions System phone book entries may be used in unrestricted access e No System phone book entries may not be used Music on Hold Select whether and which MoH Music on Hold shall be used Possible values e off default value A caller on hold shall
248. his profile If you want to enter a fixed port enable the Fixed option Se lect this option if you encounter problems with the firewall or NAT The available values are 0 to 65535 UDP Destination Port Enter the destination port number to be used for all calls based on this profile The remote LNS that receives the call must monitor this port on L2TP connections Possible values are 0 to 65535 The default value is 1701 RFC 2661 Gigaset Communications GmbH 13 VPN The menu Advanced Settings consists of the following fields Fields in the Advanced Settings menu Field Description Local IP Address Enter the IP address to be used as the source address for all L2TP connections based on this profile If this field is left empty your device uses the IP address of the interface used to reach the remote IP Address by the L2TP tunnel Hello Intervall Enter the interval in seconds between the sending of two L2TP HELLO messages These messages are used to keep the tunnel open The available values are 0 to 255 the default value is 30 The value 0 means that no L2TP HELLO messages are sent Minimum Time Enter the minimum time in seconds that your device waits be between Retries fore resending a L2TP control packet for which it received no response The wait time is dynamically extended until it reaches the Max imum Time between Retries The available values are 1 to 255 the default value is 1 Maximum Time Enter t
249. hole network to the outside world behind one IP address You should certainly do this for your connection to the Inter net Service Provider ISP Only outgoing sessions are allowed initially if NAT is activated To allow certain connec tions from outside to hosts within the LAN these must be explicitly defined and admitted Connection Idle Timeout The connection idle timeout is determined in order to clear the connection automatically if it is not being used i e if data is no longer being sent to help you save costs Block after Connection Failure You use this function to set up a waiting time for outgoing connection attempts after which your device s connection attempt is regarded as having failed Authentication When a call is received on ISDN connections the calling party number is always sent over the ISDN D channel This number enables your device to identify the caller CLID provided the caller is entered on your device After identification with CLID your device can additionally carry out PPP authentication with the connection partner before it accepts the call Your device needs the necessary data for this which you should enter here for all PPP connections Establish the type of authentication process that should be performed then 12 WAN Gigaset Communications GmbH enter a common password and two codes You get this information for example from your Internet Service Provider ISP or the system administrator
250. hosting article number 5510000198 e Access data e Documentation e Software licensing Please note that you must first activate the licence Go to www bintec elmeg com then Service Support gt Services gt Online Services Enter the required data please note the relevant explanations on the license sheet and follow the instructions of the online licensing You then receive the Hotspot server s login data En Note Activation may require 2 3 business days Access data for gateway configuration RADIUS Server IP 62 245 165 180 RADIUS Server Password Set by Gigaset Communications GmbH Domain Individually set for customers by customer dealer Walled Garden Network Individually set for customers by customer dealer Walled Garden Server URL Individually set for customers by customer dealer Terms amp Conditions URL Individually set for customers by customer dealer Access data for configuration of the Hotspot server Admin URL https hotspot bintec elmeg com Username Individually set by bintec elmeg Password Individually set by bintec elmeg 15 9 1 HotSpot Gateway In the HotSpot Gateway menu you can configure the bintec elmeg gateway installed onsite for the Hotspot Solution A list of all configured hotspot networks is displayed in the Local Services gt HotSpot Gateway gt HotSpot Gateway menu hybird 120 Gigaset Edition Gigaset Communications GmbH 15 Local Services You can use the Enabled option to enable
251. i e the data traffic is associated using class IDs of various classes To do this create class plans for classifying IP packets based on pre defined IP filters Each class plan is associated to at least one interface via its first filter 10 3 2 1 New Choose the New button to create additional data classes The Networking gt QoS gt QoS Classification gt New menu consists of the following fields Fields in the Basic Parameters menu Field Description Class map Choose the class plan you want to create or edit Possible values 10 Networking Gigaset Communications GmbH Field Description New default value You can create a new class plan with this setting e lt Name of class plan gt Shows a class plan that has already been created which you can select and edit You can add new filters Description Only for Class map New Enter the name of the class plan Filter Select an IP filter If the class plan is new select the filter to be set at the first point of the class plan If the class plan already exists select the filter to be attached to the class plan To select a filter at least one filter must be configured in the Networking gt QoS gt QoS Filter menu Direction Select the direction of the data packets to be classified Possible values e Incoming Incoming data packets are assigned to the class Class ID that is then to be defined e Outgoing default value Outgoing data packets ar
252. ially modified if the initiator status changes MIB Variables Only if Command Type MIB SNMP Select the MIB variable whose value is to be configured as de pendent upon initiator status If the initiator is active Trigger Status Active the MIB vari Gigaset Communications GmbH 15 Local Services Field Description able is described with the value entered in Active Value If the initiator is inactive Trigger Status Inactive the MIB variable is described with the value entered in Inactive Value If the MIB variable is to be modified depending on whether the initiator is active or inactive Trigger Status Both it is de scribed with an active initiator with the value entered in Active Value and with an inactive initiator with the value in Inactive Value Use Add to create more entries Interface Only if Command Type Interface Status Select the interface whose status should be changed Set interface status Only if Command Type Interface Status Select the status to be set for the interface Possible values e Up default value e Down e Reset Source Location Only if Command Type Software Update Select the source for the software update Possible values e Current Software from Update Server default value The latest software will be downloaded from the up date server e HTTP Server The latest software will be downloaded from an HTTP server that you define in Server URL e HTTPS Server
253. icast gt IGMP gt IGMP gt New menu consists of the following fields Fields in the IGMP Settings menu Field Description Interface Query Interval Maximum Response Time Robustness Last Member Query In terval Select the interface on which IGMP is to be enabled i e quer ies are sent and responses are accepted Enter the interval in seconds in which IGMP queries are to be sent Possible values are 0 to 600 The default value is 125 For the sending of queries enter the time interval in seconds within which hosts must respond The hosts randomly select a time delay from this interval before sending the response This spreads the load in networks with several hosts improving per formance Possible values are 0 0 to 25 0 The default value is 10 0 Select the multiplier for controlling the timer values A higher value can e g compensate for packet loss in a network sus ceptible to loss If the value is too high however the time between logging off and stopping of the data traffic can be in creased leave latency Possible values are 2 to 8 The default value is 2 Define the time after a query for which the router waits for an answer If you shorten the interval it will be more quickly detected that the last member has left a group so that no more packets for this group should be forwarded to this interface Possible values are 0 0 to 25 0 The default value is 2 0 Gigaset Communicatio
254. ications Field Description Possible values e off default value A caller on hold shall hear no music on hold e lt WAV file gt The subscriber called will hear the selected WAV file Number of playbacks Select how many times in a row the announcement is to be played Possible values e Endlessly default value e 1to10 8 8 1 2 Variant 1 and 2 You can configure two versions of the alarm call One version will normally use the option to call internal extensions while the other will use the option to call external subscribers Fields in the menu Basic Settings Field Description Assignment You can assign up to eight internal numbers or two external numbers to each alarm Define whether an alarm s calls are to be signalled to the internal or external subscribers Possible values e External The external number that was entered is called Alternatively two external numbers can be called for an alarm e Internal default value The subscribers assigned to the selected numbers are called based on the signalling defined For one alarm eight internal subscribers can be called simul taneously First External Number Only for Assignment Externa1Enter the first number of the external subscriber Second External Num Only for Assignment Externa1Enter the second number of ber the external subscriber 8 Applications Gigaset Communications GmbH Field Description Internal Assignment Only for Assignmen
255. ices gt Wake On LAN gt Interface Assignment menu 15 10 3 1 Edit or New Choose the icon to edit existing entries Choose the New button to create other entries The Local Services gt Wake On LAN gt Interface Assignment gt New menu consists of the following fields Fields in the menu Basic Parameters Field Description Interface Select the interface for which a configured rule chain is to be assigned Rule Chain Select a rule chain hybird 120 Gigaset Edition Chapter 16 Maintenance This menu provides you with numerous functions for maintaining your device It firstly provides a menu for testing availability within the network You can manage your system configuration files If more recent system software is available you can use this menu to install it If you need other languages for the configuration interface you can import these You can also trigger a system reboot in this menu 16 1 Diagnostics In the Maintenance gt Diagnostics menu you can test the availability of individual hosts the resolution of domain names and certain routes 16 1 1 Ping Test You can use the ping test to check whether a certain host in the LAN or an internet ad dress can be reached The Output field displays the ping test messages The ping test is launched by entering the IP address to be tested in Test Ping Address and clicking the Go button 16 1 2 DNS Test The DNS test is used to check whether the domain name of a partic
256. ider you want in the VolP gt Settings gt SIP Provider menu You change the status of the SIP provider by pressing the a button or the button in the Action column After about one minute registration with the provider has taken place and the status is automatically set to active 4 1 1 1 Edit or New Choose the o icon to edit existing entries Select the New button to create new entries The menu VolP gt Settings gt SIP Provider gt New consists of the following fields Fields in the Basic Settings menu hybird 120 Gigaset Edition 4 VoIP Gigaset Communications GmbH Field Description Description You can enter a name for the SIP provider A 20 digit alpha numeric sequence is possible Provider Status Select whether this VolP provider entry is enabled Enablea default value or not disabled Access Configuration Select which type of VoIP phonenumbers you wish to config ure Possible values e Single Number s default value Enter the individual DSL phonenumbers e Direct Dial In Enter a basic number in conjunction with an extension number block Authentication ID Enter your provider s authentication ID A 64 digit alpha nu meric sequence is possible At this point you can assign a password A 32 digit alpha Password numeric sequence is possible User Name Enter the user name you received from your VoIP provider A 64 digit alpha numeric sequence is possible Domain Enter a new dom
257. if a CRL Distribution Point entry is included in the certificate This can be determined under View Details in the certificate content e Use settings from superior certificate The set tings of the higher level certificate are used if one exists It is does not the same procedure is used as that described un der Only if a CRL Distribution Point is present Force certificate to be Define that this certificate is to be accepted as the user certific trusted ate without further checks during authentication The function is enabled with True The function is disabled by default A Caution It is extremely important for VPN security that the integrity of all certificates manually marked as trustworthy certification authority and user certificates is ensured The displayed fingerprints can be used to check this integrity Compare the displayed values with the fingerprints specified by the issuer of the certificate e g on the Internet It is sufficient to check one of the two values 2 System Management Gigaset Communications GmbH 2 8 1 2 Certificate Request Registration authority certificates in SCEP If SCEP Simple Certificate Enrollment Protocol is used your device also supports separ ate registration authority certificates Registration authority certificates are used by some Certificate Authorities CAs to handle certain tasks signature and encryption during SCEP communication with separate keys and to delegate
258. ificates option you can select up to three CA certificates that are accepted for this profile Gigaset Communications GmbH 13 VPN Field Description This option can only be configured if certificates are loaded 13 1 3 Phase 2 Profiles You can define profiles for phase 2 of the tunnel setup just as for phase 1 In the VPN gt IPSec gt Phase 2 Profiles menu a list of all configured IPSec phase 2 pro files is displayed In the Default column you can mark the profile to be used as the default profile 13 1 3 1 New Choose the New button to create additional profiles The menu VPN gt IPSec gt Phase 2 Profiles gt New consists of the following fields Fields in the Phase 2 IPSEC Parameters menu Field Description Description Enter a description that uniquely identifies the profile The maximum length of the entry is 255 characters Proposals In this field you can select any combination of encryption and message hash algorithms for IKE phase 2 on your default The combination of six encryption algorithms and two message hash algorithms gives 12 possible values in this field Encryption algorithms Encryption e 3DES default value 3DES is an extension of the DES al gorithm with an effective key length of 112 bits which is rated as secure It is the slowest algorithm currently suppor ted e ALL All options can be used e AES Rijndael has been nominated as AES due to its fast key setup low memory re
259. igaset Communications GmbH 8 Applications Field Description e User defined If the administrator activates the User defined function the e mail alert settings can be changed by the user in the User Access If the administrator sets a different value a block is placed on changes from the user S Note Once a subscriber has received notification of a new message in an e mail the Status of the noti fication is changed according to the settings in the User Access You can configure the status behaviour in the User Access gt Voice Mail Sys tem gt Settings menu under E Mail forwarding behavior Max Recording Time Enter the maximum recording time per message The possible values are 5 to 300 seconds the default value is 180 seconds Calendar for status When the subscriber is out the voicemail box can be switched Qut of Office over a calendar If a calendar is to be used it needs to be configured with the setting Application Voice Mail Systemin the menu Ap plications gt Calendar Possible values e No calendar only manually default value The sub scriber can manually switch the voicemail box on and off e lt Calendar gt Using the selected calendar the voicemail box can be switched on or off at the times defined there Fields in the menu User Settings Field Description Status of Mail Box Define in which mode the mailbox shall be used when starting Owner the voicemail system Possible values e In the
260. igured in the Matching String field must reach to trigger an e mail alert Possible values Emergency default value Alert Critical Error Warning Notice Information Debug Select the subsystems to be monitored Add new subsystems with Add Enter how long the router must wait after a relevant event be fore it is forced to send the alert mail Possible values are 0 to 86400 The value 0 disables the timeout The default value is 60 Enter the number of syslog messages that must be reached before an E mail can be sent for this case If timeout is con figured the mail is sent when this expires even if the number of messages has not been reached Possible values are 0 to 99 the default value is 1 17 3 2 Alert Settings The menu External Reporting gt Alert Service gt Alert Settings consists of the following fields Fields in the Basic Parameters menu Field Description Alert Service Maximum E mails per Select whether the alert service is to be enabled for the inter face The function is enabled with Enabled The function is enabled by default Limit the number of outgoing mails per minute Possible values Gigaset Communications GmbH 17 External Reporting Field Description Minute are 1 to 15 the default value is 6 Fields in the E mail Parameters menu Field Description Sender E mail Address Enter the mail address to be entered in the sender field of the E mail SMTP Server Enter
261. ile 151 Select Interface 82 Select lines 164 Select vendor 331 Select file 154 Select file 370 Selected Ports 297 Selection 310 Send 395 Send Certificate Chains 281 Send Certificate Request Payloads 281 SendCRLs 281 Send Initial Contact Message 280 Send Key Hash Payloads 281 Sender E mail Address 385 Separator 154 Sequence of Trunk Lines in Group 81 Serial Number 2 Server 326 Server Address 340 Server Timeout 32 Server URL 340 Server Failures 322 Server IP Address 31 35 Service 196 201 214 304 362 Set Time 13 Set COS value 802 1p Layer 2 203 Set Date 13 Set DSCP TOS value Layer 3 203 Set interface status 340 Settings 61 118 122 377 Severity 383 Show Connected Number COLP 93 Show Date andTime 128 Show incoming Name CNIP 128 Gigaset Communications GmbH Show incoming Number CLIP 128 Show incoming waiting Number CLIP off Hook 128 Show new Messages MWI 129 Show Outgoing Number CLIP 93 Show passwords and keys in clear text 12 Signal remote caller number 62 77 Signal fixed out number 62 77 Signalling 110 167 389 Silent Deny 219 Silent Deny 193 Simultaneous on no response 107 167 Single Number MSN 79 SIP Provider 61 SIP Client Mode 124 SIP Client IP Address 124 SIP Header Field for User Name 65 SIP Header Field s for Caller Address 65 Size of Queue 146 SMTP Authentication 385 SMTP Password 178 SMTP Server 178 385 SMTP Server P
262. ilters If possible access your gateway for filter configuration over the serial con sole interface or ISDN Login 10 4 1 Access Filter This menu is for configuration of access filter Each filter describes a certain part of the IP traffic and defines for example the IP addresses the protocol the source port or the des tination port A list of all access filters is displayed in the Networking gt Access Rules gt Access Filter menu 10 4 1 1 Edit or New Choose the Fay icon to edit existing entries To configure access fitters select the New button The Networking gt Access Rules gt Access Filter gt New menu consists of the following fields Fields in the Basic Parameters menu Field Description Description Enter a description for the filter Service Select one of the preconfigured services The extensive range of services configured ex works includes the following Field Description activity apple qt auth charge CUE Sl daytime dhcp discard The default value is User defined Protocol Select a protocol The Any option default value matches any protocol Type Only if Protocol TCMP Possible values Any Echo reply Destination unreachable Source quench Redirect Echo Time exceeded Timestamp Timestamp reply The default value is Any See RFC 792 Connection State Only if Protocol TCP You can define a filter that takes the status of the TCP connec tions into
263. imary Enter the IP address of the DNS server that is to be used preferably by clients who draw an address from this pool Secondary Optionally enter the IP address of an alternative DNS server 13 4 GRE Generic Routing Encapsulation GRE is a network protocol that encapsulates other pro tocols and transports them in the form of IP tunnels to the specified recipients The specification of the GRE protocol is available in two versions e GRE V 1 for use in PPTP connections RFC 2637 configuration in the PPTP menu e GRE V 0 RFC 2784 for general encapsulation using GRE In this menu you can configure a virtual interface for using GRE V 0 The data traffic routed over this interface is then encapsulated using GRE and sent to the specified recipi ent 13 4 1 GRE Tunnels A list of all configured GRE tunnels is displayed in the VPN gt GRE gt GRE Tunnels menu 13 4 1 1 New Choose the New button to set up new GRE tunnels The VPN gt GRE gt GRE Tunnels gt New menu consists of the following fields Fields in the Basic Parameters menu Field Description Description Enter a description for the GRE tunnel Local GRE IP Address Enter the source IP address of the GRE packets to the GRE 13 VPN Gigaset Communications GmbH Field Description partner If no IP address is given this corresponds to IP address 0 0 0 0 the source IP address of the GRE packets is selected automatically from one of the addresses of the interfac
264. import step If you want to generate only one phonebook entry select the blank option in all selection fields for the second record Phonebook Import The Applications gt System Phonebook gt Import Export gt Phonebook Import menu consists of the following fields Fields in the Phonebook Import menu Field Description Phone Number Select which data is to be used from a data record as the phonenumber Name Select which columns are to be used from a data record as the name You have the option to use two elements here e g fore name and surname The middle input field can be used to place a character string between the two elements here The default separator used is a comma Speed dial is automatically assigned By default call through is disabled 8 Applications Gigaset Communications GmbH 8 4 3 General In the menu Applications gt System Phonebook gt General you define the user name and password for system phone book administration In the phone book area the admin istrator can view and modify the phone book as well as import and export data The Applications gt System Phonebook gt General menu consists of the following fields Fields in the Basic Settings menu Field Description Web Access User Enter a user name for the system telephone book administrat name or Web Access Password Enter a password for the system telephone book administrator Delete Phonebook If you wish to remove the existing system phone
265. in the Team Status list Field Description Name Displays the name assigned to the team Number Displays the team s internal number Users assigned Users Displays the users assigned to the team and how many of logged on these users are logged in Call Forwarding Displays current call forwarding for this team Values in the System Settings list Field Description Active Variant Day Displays the currently enabled call option for this team Switch call signalling Displays whether the call option can be switched manually over the calendar or manually and over the calendar Signalling Displays the type of call signalling in the team Busy on busy Displays whether busy on busy is configured for the team Automatic Call Pick up Displays whether automatic call acceptance is configured and which melody is played 18 Monitoring Gigaset Communications GmbH Field Description Rerouting on no re Displays whether redirect on no reply is enabled ana if so the sponse time period after which it occurs and the destination team Further Rerouting Displays which of the redirect functions are enabled and which subscriber is the redirect destination The menu Advanced Settings consists of the following fields Values in the Advanced Settings list Field Description Assigned Users Displays all logged in and logged out subscribers in the team 18 2 Internal Log 18 2 1 System Messages In the Monitoring gt Internal Log gt System Mes
266. in the menu Basic Parameters Field Description Description Enter your chosen designation for the action Gigaset Communications GmbH 15 Local Services Field Description Command Type Select the desired action Possible values e Reboot default value Your device is rebooted e MIB SNMP The desired value is entered for a MIB variable e Interface Status The status of an interface is modified e Wlan Status Only for devices with a wireless LAN The status of a WLAN SSID is modified e Software Update A software update is initiated e Configuration Management A configuration file is loaded onto your device or backed up by your device e Ping Test Accessibility of an IP address is checked e Certificate Management A certificate is to be renewed deleted or entered Event List Select the event list you want which has been created in Local Services gt Scheduling gt Trigger Event List Condition For the selected chains of events select how many of the con figured events must occur for the operation to be initiated Possible values e A11 default value The operation is initiated if all events oc cur e One The operation is initiated if a single event occurs e None The operation is triggered if no event occurs One not The operation is triggered if one of the events does not occur Reboot device after Only if Command Type Reboot Enter the timespan in seconds that must elapse after occ
267. inal e Get IP Address Only for Connection Type LAC Your device is dynamically assigned an IP address Default Route Only for IP Address Mode Get IP Address and Static Select whether the route to this connection partner is to be defined as the default route The function is enabled with Enabled The function is disabled by default Create NAT Policy Only for IP Address Mode Get IP Address and Static 13 VPN Gigaset Communications GmbH Field Description Specify whether Network Address Translation NAT is to be activated for this connection The function is enabled with Enabled The function is disabled by default IP Assignment Pool Only for IP Address Mode Provide IP Address IPCP Select an IP pool configured in the WAN gt Internet Dialup gt IP Pools menu Local IP Address Only for IP Address Mode Static Enter the WAN IP address of your device Route Entries Only for IP Address Mode Static Enter Remote IP Address and Netmask of the LANs for L2TP partners and the corresponding Metric Add new entries with Add The menu Advanced Settings consists of the following fields Fields in the Advanced Settings menu Field Description Block after connection Enter the wait time in seconds before the device should try failure for again after an attempt to set up a connection has failed The default value is 300 Authentication Select the authentication protocol for this L2TP partner Possible
268. individual call options of a team are automatically switched through the calendars You wish to modify the external calling authorisations after business hours for specific subscribers In the system configuration you can set individually for each user whether the authorisation for external calls is automatically switched The switch occurs according to the data in the assigned calendar You can set up five types of calendars in the system The Authorisation Class and Night Operation calendars are intended for central switching and can only be set up once The Team Signalling Intercom Signalling and Redirect to internal external number calen dars can be set up repeatedly Several different switching times can be selected for each weekday In the configuration a calendar can be assigned to all performance features for which several options can be defined e g teams Switching between the individual call options then occurs at the switching times of the assigned calendar 8 1 1 Calendar In the menu Applications gt Calendar gt Calendar you can view modify or copy a previ ously set calendar as well as create new calendars Choose the o icon to edit existing entries Select the New button to create new entries 8 1 1 1 General In the General area you define the name of the calendar to be created 8 Applications Gigaset Communications GmbH The menu Applications gt Calendar gt Calendar gt General consists of the
269. ing the O button you display detailed statistics on the IPSec connection Values in the IPSec Tunnels list Field Description Description Shows the description of the peer Local IP Address Shows the WAN IP address of your device Remote IP Address Shows the WAN IP address of the connection partner Local ID Shows the ID of your device for this IPSec tunnel Remote ID Shows the ID of the peer Negotiation Type Shows the exchange type Authentication Method Shows the authentication method MTU Shows the current MTU Maximum Transfer Unit Alive Check Shows the method for checking that the peer is reachable NAT Detection Displays the NAT detection method Local Port Shows the local port 18 Monitoring Gigaset Communications GmbH Field Description Remote Port Shows the remote port Packets Shows the total number of incoming and outgoing packets Bytes Shows the total number of incoming and outgoing bytes Errors Shows the total number of errors IKE Phase 1 SAs x The parameters of the IKE Phase 1 SAs are displayed here Role Algorithm Life time remaining Status IPSec Phase 2 SAs Shows the parameters of the IPSec Phase 2 SAs x Role Algorithm Life time remaining Status Messages The system messages for this IPSec tunnel are displayed here 18 3 2 IPSec Statistics In the Monitoring gt IPSec gt IPSec Statistics menu statistical values for all IPSec con nections are displayed
270. ingle port if you select Specify port range you Can specify a continu ous range of ports which will be a applied for filtering the outgo ing data traffic Source Port Range Only for Type of traffic excluding Without NAT Ser vice user defined and Protocol TCP UDP TCP UDP Enter the source port or the source port range of the original data packets The default setting A11 means that the port remains unspecified Destination IP Ad Only for Type of traffic excluding Without NAT or Gigaset Communications GmbH 10 Networking Field Description outgoing Source NAT and NAT method symmetric dress Netmask Enter the destination IP address and corresponding netmask of the original data packets as the case arises Destination Port Only for Type of traffic outgoing Source NAT NAT Range method symmetric Service user defined and Pro tocol TCP UDP TCP UDP or Type of traffic excluding Without NAT Service user defined and Protocol TCP UDP TCP UDP Enter the destination port or the destination port range of the original data packets The default setting Al1 means that the port remains unspecified In the NAT Configuration gt Replacement Values menu you can define depending on whether you re dealing with inbound or outbound data traffic new addresses and ports to which specific addresses and ports from the NAT Configuration gt Specify original traffic menu can be translated Fields in the m
271. ion ance feature is enabled for as system without subsystem two simultaneous calls on the phone are not connected to each other after the receiver is replaced but released for example Here the performance feature should not be set The function is activated by selecting Enabled The function is disabled by default No Hold and Retrieve The performance features hold a call and retrieve a held call are not available on certain telephones The function is activated by selecting Enabled The function is disabled by default 6 2 2 ISDN In the Terminals gt Other phones gt ISDN menu you configure the connected ISDN ter minals For example you perform assignment of a configured internal number 6 2 2 1 Edit or New Choose the 3 icon to edit existing entries Select the New button to add ISDN terminals The Terminals gt Other phones gt ISDN gt New menu consists of the following fields Fields in the Basic Settings menu Field Description Description Enter a description for the ISDN telephone Interface Select the interface to which the ISDN telephone shall be con nected Fields in the Basic Phone Settings menu Field Description Terminal Type Select the terminal type Possible values e Telephone default value Gigaset Communications GmbH 6 Terminals Field Description e Answering Machine e Voice Mail e Emergency Phone Internal Numbers Select the internal number for this terminal You can define s
272. ion tion servers SIP Client IP Address Only for SIP Client Mode Static Enter the static local IP address of the SIP client Port Number Only for SIP Client Mode Static Enter the number of the port to be used for connection A 5 digit sequence is possible For example port 5065 must be entered for connection to a Microsoft Exchange Communic ation Server Transport Protocol Only for SIP Client Mode Static Select the transport protocol for the connection Possible values e UDP default value O WE For example the TCP protocol must be entered for connection to a Microsoft Exchange Communication Server Fields in the menu Codec Settings Field Description Codec Profile Select the codec profile to be used if the connection is over a VoIP line Codec profiles are configured in the VoIP gt Settings gt Codec Profiles menu Fields in the menu Further Settings Field Description Multiple SIP Connec Select whether multilinks shall be allowed from this terminals tions Sub Exchange Operation as subsystem Only in case of connection of a sub system to a system Here with a disabled performance feature only a connection via the subscriber SIP registration is pos sible If a second call comes in it is accepted and the existing call is held With an enabled performance feature several SIP connections are possible over the same login If the perform 6 Terminals Gigaset Communications GmbH Field Descript
273. ion Protocol PAP CHAP MS CHAP Primarily run CHAP on denial then the authentication protocol required by the connection part ner MSCHAP version 1 or 2 possible e MS CHAPv2 Run MS CHAP version 2 only e None Some providers use no authentication In this case select this option DNS Negotiation Select whether your device receives IP addresses for Primary DNS Server and Secondary DNS Server from the connection partner or sends these to the connection partner The function is enabled with Enabled The function is enabled by default Prioritize TCP ACK Select whether the TCP download is to be optimised in the Packets event of intensive TCP upload This function can be specially applied for asymmetrical bandwidths ADSL The function is enabled with Enabled The function is disabled by default LCP Alive Check Select whether the availability of the remote terminal is to be checked by sending LCP echo requests or replies This makes Gigaset Communications GmbH 12 WAN Field Description it possible to switch to a backup connection more quickly in the event of line faults The function is enabled with Enabled The function is enabled by default MTU Enter the maximum packet size Maximum Transfer Unit MTU in bytes that is allowed for the connection With default value Automatic the value is specified by link control at connection setup If you disable Automatic you can enter a value Possible values ar
274. ion calculation is deleted and the process be gins again If all team subscribers are in Post processing time external calls are routed to the preset redirect destination internal calls hear the busy tone If the same time since the last call is calculated for several team subscribers the sequence of entries in Internal Assignement applies Fields in the Options menu Field Description Signalling Busy on busy Automatic Call Pick up with You can call team subscribers with a broadcast call Possible values e Simultaneous default value e Linear e Rotating e Adding e Linear Simultaneous on No Reply e Rotating Simultaneous on No Reply e Even Distribution Longest Free Select whether the performance feature Busy on Busy is to be enabled for this call option If a team subscriber is currently engaged you can decide whether additional calls for this team should be signalled If Busy on Busy is set for a team other callers are signalled as engaged The function is activated by selecting Enabled The function is disabled by default Select whether an incoming call should be automatically ac cepted and the caller hear the desired music on hold or an nouncement Signalling of the call to the team proceeds The caller bears the costs for the existing connection The function is activated by selecting Enabled The function is disabled by default Also select the desired music on hold or announcement Pos
275. ion is not activated by default 15 Local Services Gigaset Communications GmbH Field Description Walled Network Net mask Only if Walled Garden is enabled Enter the network address of the Walled Network and the cor responding Netmask of the intranet server For the address range resulting from Walled Network Net mask clients require no authentication Example Enter 192 168 0 0 255 255 255 0 if all IP ad dresses from 192 168 0 0 to 19 168 0 255 are free Enter 192 168 0 1 255 255 255 255 if only the IP address 192 168 0 1 is free Walled Garden URL Only if Walled Garden is enabled Enter the Walled Garden URL of the intranet server Freely accessible websites must be reachable over this address Terms amp Conditions Only if Walled Garden is enabled In the Terms amp Conditions input field enter the address of the general terms and conditions on the intranet server or public server e g http www webserver de agb htm The page must lie within the address range of the walled garden network Additional freely ac cessible Domain Names Only if Walled Garden is enabled Add further URLs or IP addresses with Add The web pages can be accessed via these additional freely accessible ad dresses Language for login window Here you can choose the language for the start login page The following languages are supported English Deutsch Italiano Francais Espa ol Portugu s and Neder land
276. is can mean that the IP address propag ated via DynDNS is not correct This problem is avoided by transferring the IP address over ISDN This type of transfer of dynamic IP addresses also enables the more secure ID Protect mode main mode to be used for tunnel setup Gigaset Communications GmbH 13 VPN Method of operation Various modes are available for transferring your own IP address to the peer The address can be transferred free in the D channel or in the B channel but here the call must be accepted by the remote station and therefore incurs costs If a peer whose IP address has been assigned dynamically wants to arrange for another peer to set up an IPSec tunnel it can transfer its own IP address as per the settings described in Fields in the menu IPSec Callback on page 264 Not all transfer modes are supported by all telephone companies If you are not sure automatic selection by the device can be used to ensure that all the available possibilities can be used Cr Note The callback configuration should be the same on the two devices so that your device is able to identify the IP address information from the called peer The following roles are possible e One side takes on the active role the other the passive role e Both sides can take on both roles both The IP address transfer and the start of IKE phase 1 negotiation take place in the follow ing steps 1 Peer A the callback initiator sets up a connection to the I
277. is disabled Timeout Enter the idle interval in seconds This determines how many seconds should pass between sending the last traffic data packet and clearing the connection Possible values are 0 to 3600 seconds 0 deactivates the timeout The default value is 300 Example 10 for FTP transmission 20 for LAN to LAN trans mission 90 for Internet connections Fields in the IP Mode and Routes menu Field Description IP Address Mode Select whether your device is to be assigned a static IP ad dress or whether it should be assigned this dynamically Possible values e Get IP Address default value Your device is automatic ally assigned a temporarily valid IP address from the pro vider Gigaset Communications GmbH 12 WAN Field Description e Static You enter a static IP address Default Route Select whether the route to this connection partner is to be defined as the default route The function is enabled with Enabled The function is enabled by default Create NAT Policy Specify whether Network Address Translation NAT is to be activated The function is enabled with Enabled The function is enabled by default Local IP Address Only for IP Address Mode Static Assign an IP address from your LAN to the PPT interface which is to be used as your device s internal source address Route Entries Only if IP Address Mode Static Define other routing entries for this PPTP partner Add new entries wi
278. is disabled by default Rerouting to Number Set the destination to which incoming calls should be diverted to e g in the case of a misdial Possible values e None Busy Tone The caller hears the engaged tone by default and cannot be redirected to a destination e lt Extension number gt By default the incoming call is routed to the number selected The default value is the preset internal number 40 Team global Gigaset Communications GmbH 2 System Management Field Value Interconnect external When brokering with two external subscribers select whether calls they are to be connected after you hang up The function is activated with Enabled The function is disabled by default Country settings Your business is an international company with subsidiaries in several countries Despite the differences in network implementation in the different countries you want to use the same system in each subsidiary By setting the respective country variants the system can be adjusted to the particular features of the network in the required country As the system requirements vary from country to country the functionality of certain fea tures needs to be customised The basic settings for different country variants are stored in the system Fields in the menu Country Settings Field Value Country Profile Select the country in which you want to use the system Note This does not change the language of the text in the
279. is system menu you define what system protocol messages are saved on which computers and whether the system administrator should receive an e mail for certain events Information on IP data traffic can also be saved depending on the individual inter faces In addition SNMP traps can be sent to specific hosts in case of error Moreover you can prepare your device for monitoring with the activity monitor 17 1 Syslog Events in various subsystems of your device e g PPP are logged in the form of syslog messages system logging messages The number of messages visible depends on the level set eight steps from Emergency over Information to Debug In addition to the data logged internally on your device all information can and should be transmitted to one or more external PCs for storage and processing e g to the system administrator s PC The syslog messages saved internally on your device are lost when you reboot Warning Make sure you only pass syslog messages to a safe computer Check the data regularly and ensure that there is always enough spare capacity avail able on the hard disk of your PC Syslog Daemon All Unix operating systems support the recording of syslog messages For Windows PCs the Syslog Demon included in the DIME Tools can record the data and distribute to vari ous files depending on the contents can be called in the download area at www bintec elmeg com 17 1 1 Syslog Servers Configure you
280. isable alive check The function is enabled by default Block Time Define how long a peer is blocked for tunnel setups after a 13 VPN Gigaset Communications GmbH Field Description phase 1 tunnel setup has failed This only affects locally initi ated setup attempts Possible values are 1 to 86400 seconds 1 means the value in the default profile is used and 0 means that the peer is never blocked The default value is 30 NAT Traversal NAT Traversal NAT T also enables IPSec tunnels to be opened via one or more devices on which network address translation NAT is activated Without NAT T incompatibilities may arise between IPSec and NAT see RFC 3715 section 2 These primarily prevent the setup of an IPSec tunnel from a host within a LANs and behind a NAT device to another host or device NAT T enables these kinds of tunnels without conflicts with NAT device activated NAT is automatically detected by the IPSec Daemon and NAT T is used Only for TKEv1 profiles Possible values e Enabled default value NAT Traversal is enabled e Disabled NAT Traversal is disabled e Force The device always behaves as it would if NAT were in use Only for TKEv2 profiles The function is enabled with Enabled The function is enabled by default CA Certificates Only for Phase 1 IKE Parameters Only for Authentication Method DSA Signature RSA Signature Or RSA Encryption If you enable the Trust the following CA cert
281. iting Calls Only for Type of Rerouting Function On Busy or On Busy with and On No Reply Define what callers on hold shall hear internal or configured music on hold announcement Possible values e MoH Wave 1 t0 MoH Wave 8 e MoH internal 1 default value e MOH internal 2 e Off Max waiting time in the queue Only for Type of Rerouting Function On Busy or On Busy and On No Reply Define maximum time a caller can remain on hold After expira tion of this time the caller shall be transferred to the defined re direct destination Leave Endless for an unlimited queue corresponds to value 0 Disable Endless to enter the de sired value Fields in the On No Reply Settings menu Field Description Time for Rerouting on Define maximum time a caller can remain on hold if she cannot No Reply reach the destination number After expiration of this time the caller shall be transferred to the defined redirect destination The default value is 30 seconds Fields in the Further Settings menu Gigaset Communications GmbH 8 Applications Field Description Announcement Select whether the incoming call shall be redirected to an an nouncement Possible values e Off default value The incoming call is not redirected to an announcement e MoH Wave 1tO MoH Wave 8 Target Number Select the internal number to which the incoming call shall be redirected Possible values e No Number Disconnect The call is terminated
282. ive OSPF is activated for this interface i e routes are propagated or OSPF protocol packets sent over this inter face e Inactive OSPF is disabled for this interface Proxy ARP Mode Select whether and how ARP requests from your own LAN are to be responded to for the specified connection partner Possible values e Inactive default value Deactivates Proxy ARP for this connection partner e Up or Dormant Your device only responds to an ARP re quest if the status of the connection to the connection partner iS Up or Dormant In the case of Dormant your device only responds to the ARP request the connection is not set up until someone actually wants to use the route e Up only Your device responds to an ARP request only if the status of the connection to the connection partner is Up i e a connection already exists to the connection partner DNS Negotiation Select whether your device receives IP addresses for Primary DNS Server and Secondary DNS Server and WINS Server Primary and Secondary from the connection partner or sends these to the connection partner The function is enabled with Enabled The function is enabled by default 12 1 4 IP Pools The IP Pools menu displays a list of all IP pools Your device can operate as a dynamic IP address server for PPP connections You can use this function by providing one or more pools of IP addresses These IP addresses can be assigned to dialling in connection partners for
283. k Settings 2 a a a 76 TRUNKS ee a ee a a o a ek ee es 76 Trunk Numbers a aoaaa a a 78 T NKGTrOUPS a 4 5 chy Aralia da adas GMS a 81 MSs tn ard m fate As ata dada Li ede de ty lel ae E a 82 User Settings 0 20 aa ik waa eke a bos Geet 83 USES a de Rede de oh AGA Sees he he Magen ote AAA he da 83 Class Of S6rviceS gt eo ep ee Ge en ee 90 Parallel Ringing 2 o o 104 hybird 120 Gigaset Edition 5 3 Groups amp Teams 2 a a A A i a TA a 105 5 3 1 Tamse coc e E tn eck A E a i e 105 5 4 Call Distribution o oo a a 112 5 4 1 Incoming Distribution a 0a a a a a a 112 5 4 2 Misdial Routing a a a a a 115 Chapter 6 TEMAS 24 ca er aa e A 116 6 1 GigasetiPOOM S timido fe a ee Mae a lw O A 116 6 1 1 Gigaset Phones 2 116 6 1 2 Gig setDECT ea is a A E 119 6 2 Other pPRONMeS p ii e de be See a a ee el 123 6 2 1 OURS rt tout tan ete ea EN eon Naw ete ee HP han We ea aN Le ecient st 123 6 2 2 ISDN seer keer pens a ee dd Sr pg E A 126 6 2 3 analog ek cos SP ase acces ated at te Be ees te GE ae 127 6 2 4 CAP Wii i Ar ks SE SO Aes ar OA RO Ae 130 6 3 OVErIEW aa Ia Ne es 131 6 3 1 OvervieW bon See Roe da he eae kh dee a a es 131 Chapter 7 Call ROUTING rr Cec A ae ee Miah Fev Bs aS et 132 7 1 Outgoing Services o oo aoa a a a 132 7 1 1 Direct Cali z s 20 SB bo ria a A 132 7 1 2 Call Forwarding oaoa a a en 133 7 1 3 Di
284. k components from one system Such an SNMP tool is included on your device the Configuration Manager As SNMP is a standard pro tocol you can use any other SNMP managers e g HPOpenView For more information on the SNMP versions see the relevant RFCs and drafts e SNMP V 1 RFC 1157 e SNMP V 2c RFC 1901 1908 e SNMP V 3 RFC 3410 3418 17 4 1 SNMP Trap Options In the event of errors a message known as a trap packet is sent unrequested to monit or the system In the External Reporting gt SNMP gt SNMP Trap Options menu you can configure the sending of traps The menu External Reporting gt SNMP gt SNMP Trap Options consists of the following fields Fields in the Basic Parameters menu Field Description SNMP Trap Broadcast Select whether the transfer of SNMP traps is to be activated ing Your device then sends SNMP traps to the LAN s broadcast address The function is activated by selecting Enabled The function is disabled by default SNMP Trap UDP Port Only if SNMP Trap Broadcasting is enabled Enter the number of the UDP port to which your device is to send SNMP traps Gigaset Communications GmbH 17 External Reporting Field Description Any whole number is possible The default value is 162 SNMP Trap Com Only if SNMP Trap Broadcasting is enabled munity Enter a new SNMP code This must be sent by the SNMP Manager with every SNMP request so that this is accepted by your device A char
285. king fields Gigaset Communications GmbH Fields in the Basic Parameters menu Field Description Rule Chain Description Access Filter Action Select whether to create a new rule chain or to edit an existing one Possible values e New default value You can create a new rule chain with this setting e lt Name of class plan gt Select an already existing rule chain and thus add another rule to it Enter the name of the rule chain Select an IP filter If the rule chain is new select the filter to be set at the first point of the rule chain If the rule chain already exists select the filter to be attached to the rule chain Define the action to be taken for a filtered data packet Possible values e Allow default value Allow packet if it matches the filter e Allow if filter does not match Allow packet if it does not match the filter e Deny if filter matches Deny packet if it matches the filter e Deny if filter does not match Deny packet if it does not match the filter e Ignore Use next rule To set the rules of a rule chain in a different order select the button in the list menu for the entry to be shifted A dialog box opens in which you can decide under Move whether the entry below default value or above another rule of this rule chain is to be shifted Gigaset Communications GmbH 10 Networking 10 4 3 Interface Assignment In this menu the configured rule chains are a
286. kph do gtd chen So Ae neal te ts a eet etm Oe TR ten 395 18 6 1 QOS dr 2 te Sols es oh Sed ke a i eh es ce at hte aE 395 Neal he A ao hes Lar ER ey 397 X hybird 120 Gigaset Edition Chapter 1 Assistants The Assistants menu offers step by step instructions for the following basic configuration tasks e First steps e Internet Access VPN e PBX Choose the corresponding task from the navigation bar and follow the instructions and ex planations on the separate pages of the Assistant hybird 120 Gigaset Edition 1 2 System Management Gigaset Communications GmbH Chapter 2 System Management The System Management menu contains general system information and settings You see a system status overview Global system parameters such as the system name date time passwords and licences are managed and the access and authentication meth ods are configured 2 1 Status If you log into the GUI your device s status page is displayed which shows the most im portant system information You see an overview of the following data e System status e Your device s activities Resource utilisation active sessions and tunnels e Status and basic configuration of the LAN WAN ISDN and ADSL interfaces e Information on plugged add on modules if any You can customise the update interval of the status page by entering the desired period in seconds as Automatic Refresh Interval and clicking on the Apply button fl Caution Under
287. l format e g 63 e TOS Hexadecimal Value The TOS value is specified in hexadecimal format e g 3F hybird 120 Gigaset Edition 5 Numbering Gigaset Communications GmbH Chapter 5 Numbering 5 1 Trunk Settings Your system is a telecommunication installation for external connection to the Euro ISDN DSS1 and the Internet ISDN connections SO Depending on module extension the system features external ISDN connections configured for connection to the network operator s ISDN connection Depending on module extension several ISDN connections can either be set as an in ternal or external ISDN connection Es Note If your assign a name to the connections in these settings it will not be used in the subsequent configuration It merely serves as description for the con nection 5 1 1 Trunks You configure your system s external connections in the Numbering gt Trunk Settings gt Trunks menu 5 1 1 1 Edit or New Choose the H icon to edit existing entries Select the New button to create new connec tions The Numbering gt Trunk Settings gt Trunks gt New menu consists of the following fields Fields in the Basic Settings menu Field Description Description You can enter a name for the connection you selected Access Type Shows the configured connection type Possible values e Point to multipoint connection default value Gigaset Communications GmbH 5 Numbering Field Description e ISDN P P
288. lable after the configuration has been saved Description Enter a description of the peer that identifies it The maximum length of the entry is 255 characters Peer Address Enter the official IP address of the peer or its resolvable host name The entry can be omitted in certain configurations whereby your device then cannot initiate an IPSec connection Peer ID Select the ID type and enter the peer ID This entry is not necessary in certain configurations The maximum length of the entry is 255 characters Possible ID types e Fully Qualified Domain Name FQDN e E mail Address e IPV4 Address e ASN 1 DN Distinguished Name e Key ID Any string On the peer device this ID corresponds to the Local ID Value 13 VPN Gigaset Communications GmbH Field Description Internet Key Exchange Select the version of the Internet Exchange Protocol to be used Possible values e IKEv1 default value Internet Key Exchange Protocol Ver sion 1 IKEv2 Internet Kex Exchange Protocol Version 2 Authentication Method Only for Internet Key Exchange IKEv2 Select the authentication method Possible values e Preshared Keys default value If you do not use certific ates for the authentication you can select Preshared Keys These are configured during peer configuration in the IPSec Peers The preshared key is the shared password e RSA Signature Phase 1 key calculations are authentic ated using the RSA algorithm L
289. larm Calls The hybird products FXS interface can be configured as an alarm input E g an alarm button can be connected to one of these interfaces When the button is pressed an alarm call is triggered to either up to eight internal numbers or one of two external numbers If necessary one of the switch contacts can be activated during an alarm call The function can optionally be switched on using a calendar or you can switch between the two pos sible signalling variants 8 8 1 Alarm Calls Choose the FA icon to edit existing entries Select the New button to create new alarm in puts 8 8 1 1 General In the General area you set up the alarm inputs basic features The Applications gt Alarm Calls gt Alarm Calls gt General menu consists of the following fields Fields in the menu Basic Settings Field Description Status Enable or disable the alarm input function The function is enabled with Enabled The function is enabled by default Enter a unique name for the alarm Description Interface Select the interface to be used for alarm Select an internal number to be used for the alarm Internal Number Switch signalling Specify how the alarm that has been set up is to be switched on Possible values e No calendar only manually Manual switch is enabled e lt calendar entry gt Select one of the calendar entries that 8 Applications Gigaset Communications GmbH Field Description has been configured
290. ld be that your gateway no longer boots Do not turn your device off dur ing the update An update of BOOTmonitor and or Logic is recommended in a few cases In this case the release notes refer expressly to this fact Only update BOOT monitor or Logic if bintec elmeg GmbH explicitly recommends this Flash Your device saves its configuration in configuration files in the flash EEPROM Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory The data even remains stored in the flash when your device is switched off RAM The current configuration and all changes you set on your device during operation are stored in the working memory RAM The contents of the RAM are lost if the device is switched off So if you modify your configuration and want to keep these changes for the next time you start your device you must save the modified configuration in the flash 16 Maintenance Gigaset Communications GmbH memory before switching off The Save configuration button over the navigation area of the GUI This configuration is then saved in the flash in a file with the name boot When you start your device the boot configuration file is used by default Actions The files in the flash memory can be copied moved erased and newly created It is also possible to transfer configuration files between your device and a host via HTTP Configuration file format The file format of the configuration file allows encryption and ensures com
291. ld enter the last port of the port range By default the field does not contain an entry If a value is displayed this means that the previously specified port number is verified If a port range is to be checked enter the upper limit here Possible values are 1 to 65535 Source Port Range Only for Protocol TCP UDP TCP or UDP 14 Firewall Gigaset Communications GmbH Field Description In the first field enter the source port to be checked if applic Type Code able If a port number range is specified in the second field enter the last port of the port range By default the field does not contain an entry If a value is displayed this means that the previously specified port number is verified If a port range is to be checked enter the upper limit here Possible values are 7 to 65535 Only for Protocol TCMP The Type field shows the class of ICMP messages the Code field specifies the type of message in greater detail Possible values e Any default value e Echo Reply e Destination unreachable 0 Sources Cuenca e Redirect e Echo e Time Exceeded e Parameter Problem e Timestamp e Timestamp Reply e Information Request e Information Reply e Address Mask Request e Address Mask Reply Selection options for the ICMP codes are only available for Type Destination unreachable Possible values e Any default value e Net Unreachable Field Description e Host Unreachable e
292. lect the type of data traffic for which NAT is to be configured Possible values e incoming Destination NAT default value The data traffic that comes from outside e outgoing Source NAT Outgoing data traffic e excluding Without NAT Data traffic excluded from NAT NAT method Only for Type of traffic outgoing Source NAT Select the NAT method for outgoing data traffic The starting point for choosing the NAT method is a NAT scenario in which an internal source host has initiated an IP connection to an external destination host over the NAT interface and in which an internally valid source address and internally valid source port are translated to an externally valid source address and an externally valid source port Possible values e full cone UDP only Any given external host may send IP packets via the external address and the external port to the initiating source address and the initial source port e restricted cone UDP only Like full cone NAT as ex ternal host however only the initial external destination host is allowed e port restricted cone UDP only Like restricted cone NAT however exclusively data from the initial destination 10 Networking Gigaset Communications GmbH Field Description port are allowed e symmetric standard value any protocol Outbound an ex ternally valid source address and an externally valid source port are administratively set Inbound only
293. lling with the code for bundle assignment The function is activated by selecting Enabled The function is disabled by default Then select the bundles for which manual bundle assignment is to be allowed You can configure bundles in the Numbering gt Trunk Settings gt Trunk Groups menu Number display If you call a subscriber your number is displayed to him The person you re calling thus sees that you are calling even before picking up the receiver If you don t want the person you re calling to see your number before picking up the receiver you can prevent display of your number to your called party If your called party has set up call forwarding you won t know at which telephone you ve reached him In this case you can display the number to which your called party has for warded the call However the person you re calling also has the option of preventing dis play of this number Call number display allows display of the caller s number already at call signaling even on analogue telephones Thus you know who wishes to speak to you even before you ve ac cepted the call Gigaset Communications GmbH 5 Numbering C Note Transmission of analogue CLIP data can be set up separately for every ana logue connection Please refer to the users guides for your analogue termin als to determine whether these support the CLIP and CLIP off Hook per formance features Not all described performance features are included in t
294. log into your system In this way several PABX systems can be linked The function is activated by selecting Enabled The function is disabled by default Delete SIP bindings If after registering with a provider a reset of the system should after Restart occur for example or a power failure depending on the pro vider another registration may prove impossible Enabling these performance features allows re registration after restart 4 VoIP Gigaset Communications GmbH Field Description The function is activated by selecting Enabled The function is disabled by default Upstreaming Device If you enable this function you can use a gateway with NAT with NAT and still make VoIP calls Without this function it may not be possible to call you with VoIP if you use a gateway with NAT The function is activated by selecting Enabled The function is disabled by default Early media support Select whether you ll allow exchange of voice and audio data before a receiver accepts a call The function is enabled with Enabled The function is enabled by default Provider without Re Select whether registration and authentication with a provider gistration can be eliminated In this case the relevant data can be sent to a specific IP address already known to the correspondent An example of this method is Microsoft Exchange SIP The function is enabled with Enabled The function is disabled by default If this function is n
295. lowed Only for Traffic Shaping enabled Enable or disable the function The function controls the band width limit If Overbooking allowed is activated the bandwidth limit set for this queue can be exceeded as long as free bandwidth ex ists on the interface If Overbooking allowed is deactivated the queue can never occupy bandwidth beyond the bandwidth limit that has been set The function is enabled with Enabled The function is disabled by default Burst size Only for Traffic Shaping enabled Enter the maximum number of bytes that may still be transmit ted temporarily when the data rate permitted for this queue has been reached Possible values are 0 to 64000 10 Networking Gigaset Communications GmbH Field Description The default value is 0 The menu Advanced Settings consists of the following fields Fields in the Advanced Settings menu Field Description Dropping Algorithm Choose the procedure for rejecting packets in the QoS queue if the maximum size of the queue is exceeded Possible values e Tail Drop default value The newest packet received is dropped e Head Drop The oldest packet in the queue is dropped Random Drop A randomly selected packet is dropped from the queue Congestion Avoidance Enable or disable preventative deletion of data packets RED Packets which have a data size of between Min queue size and Max queue size are preventively dropped to prevent queue ov
296. lt value Enter a static IP address e IKE Config Mode Client Can only be selected for IKEv1 Select this option if your gateway receives an IP ad dress from the server as IPSec client e IKE Config Mode Server Select this option if your gate way assigns an IP address as server for connecting clients This is taken from the selected IP Assignment Pool Only where IP Address Assignment IKE Config Mode Server Or IKE Config Mode Client Possible values e Pull default value The client requests the IP address and the gateway answers the request e Push The gateway suggests an IP address to the client and the client must either accept or reject this This value must be identical for both sides of the tunnel Only if IP Address Assignment IKE Config Mode Server 13 VPN Gigaset Communications GmbH Field Description Select an IP pool configured in the VPN gt IPSec gt IP Poolsmenu If an IP pool has not been configured here yet the message Not yet defined appears in this field Default Route Only for IP Address Assignment Static or IKE Config Mode Client Select whether the route to this IPSec peer is to be defined as the default route The function is enabled with Enabled The function is disabled by default Local IP Address Only for IP Address Assignment Static or IKE Config Mode Server Enter the WAN IP address of your IPSec tunnel This can be the same IP address as the address configured on your ro
297. lution consists of a bintec elmeg gateway installed onsite with its own WLAN access point or additional connected WLAN device or wired LAN and of the Hot spot server centrally located at a computing centre The operator account is administered on the server via an administration terminal e g a hotel reception PC this includes functions such as registration entry generating tickets statistical analysis etc Login sequence at the Hotspot server e When a new user connects with the Hotspot he she is automatically assigned an IP ad dress via DHCP e As soon as he attempts to access any Internet site with a browser the user is redirected to the home login page e After the user has entered the registration data user password these are sent to the central RADIUS server Hotspot server as RADIUS registration Following successful registration the gateway opens Internet access e For each user the gateway sends regular additional information to the RADIUS server for recording accounting data When the ticket expires the user is automatically logged off and again redirected to the home login page Requirements To operate a Hotspot the customer requires e a bintec elmeg device as hotspot gateway with active Internet access and configured hotspot server entries for login and accounting see menu System Management gt Re mote Authentication gt RADIUS gt New with Group Description default group 0 e bintec elmeg Hotspot
298. ly for peers with IKEv2 MobIKE In cases of changing public IP addresses enables Gigaset Communications GmbH 13 VPN Field Description only these addresses to be updated in the SAs without the SAs themselves having to be renegotiated The function is enabled by default Note that MobIKE requires a current IPSec client e g the cur rent Windows 7 or Windows 8 client or the latest version of the bintec elmeg IPSec client Proxy ARP Select whether your device is to respond to ARP requests from its own LAN on behalf of the specific connection partner Possible values e Inactive default value Deactivates Proxy ARP for this IPSec peer e Up or Dormant Your device only responds to an ARP re quest if the status of the connection to the IPSec peer is Up active or Dormant dormant In the case of Dormant your device only responds to the ARP request the connec tion is not set up until someone actually wants to use the route e Up only Your device responds to an ARP request only if the status of the connection to the IPSec peer is Up active i e a connection already exists to the IPSec peer IPSec Callback bintec elmeg devices support the DynDNS service to enable hosts without fixed IP ad dresses to obtain a secure connection over the Internet This service enables a peer to be identified using a host name that can be resolved by DNS You do not need to configure the IP address of the peer The DynDNS service do
299. m It is used with a 96 bit digest length for IPSec e ALL All options can be used e SHA1 SHA1 Secure Hash Algorithm 1 is a hash algorithm developed by NSA United States National Security Associ ation It is rated as secure but is slower than MD5 It is used with a 96 bit digest length for IPSec Note that RipeMD 160 and Tiger 192 are not available for mes sage hashing in phase 2 Use PFS Group As PFS Perfect Forward Secrecy requires another Diffie Hellman key calculation to create new encryption material you must select the exponentiation features If you enable PFS Enabled the options are the same as for the configuration of DH Group in the VPN gt IPSec gt Phase 1 Profiles menu PFS is used to protect the keys of a renewed phase 2 SA even if Gigaset Communications GmbH 13 VPN Field Description the keys of the phase 1 SA have become known The field has the following options e 1 768 Bit During the Diffie Hellman key calculation modular exponentiation at 768 bits is used to create the en cryption material e 2 1024 Bit default value During the Diffie Hellman key calculation modular exponentiation at 1024 bits is used to create the encryption material e 5 1536 Bit During the Diffie Hellman key calculation modular exponentiation at 1536 bits is used to create the en cryption material Lifetime Define how the lifetime is defined that will expire before phase 2 SAs need to be renewed
300. m in the menu Numbering gt Groups amp Teams gt Teams gt New gt Variant1 4 Possible values e No calendar only manually Manual switch is enabled e lt Calendar gt Select one of the configured calendars Active Variant Day Select one of the call options to be currently enabled If a switch is set up via the calendar this setting will be switched back again in a timely manner Permit Call Forwarding Define whether call forwarding may occur for the team The function is activated by selecting Enabled Gigaset Communications GmbH 5 Numbering Field Description The function is disabled by default Call Forwarding to Ex Define whether there shall be call forwarding within the system ternal Numbers itself Through PABX or via an exchange provider Through Exchange Office Please note that for call forwarding within the system two external connections are used The menu Advanced Settings consists of the following fields Fields in the Timer menu Field Description Team Speed Timer Here enter the Team Speed Timer following which call for warding after time shall be performed in the team The default value is 15 seconds Simultaneous on no With linear and rotating team calls there is the option for all response team subscribers to be simultaneously called after a defined period The default value is 60 seconds Wrap up Timer This setting is only enabled in Signalling Even Distribu tion Longest Free
301. mail box and how many old calls are already present Values in the System Messages list Gigaset Communications GmbH 8 Applications Field Description Internal Number Displays the number of the individual subscriber for which the voicemail box is configured User Displays the name of the individual subscriber for which the voicemail box is configured New Calls Displays the calls which have not yet been listened to by the subscriber Old Calls Displays the calls which have already been listened to or stored by the subscriber 8 9 3 General In this menu you can configure the general settings for your voicemail system The menu Applications gt Voice Mail gt General consists of the following fields Fields in the menu Basic Settings Field Description Voice Mail System Select whether to activate your voicemail system The function is enabled with Enabled The function is enabled by default Description Only for Voice Mail System enabled Enter a description for your voicemail system This description is displayed on the telephone when a call goes in to the voice mail system The default value is Voice Mail Internal Number Only for Voice Mail System enabled Enter the internal number under which to access your voice mail system The default value is 50 Language Select the language for the entire voicemail system 8 Applications Gigaset Communications GmbH Field Description Possible values e
302. mark The function is disabled by default You can use the Select all and Deselect all buttons for all the devices displayed 16 3 2 Firmware Files In the Maintenance gt Phone Update gt Firmware Files menu you see the system soft ware files that are currently available on your SD card You can load additional files on the SD card 3 Note For DECT systems there is a ZIP file available which contains the system software files and for Gigaset N510 IP PRO language files too Gigaset Communications GmbH 16 Maintenance S Note One version of the system software file per telephone type can be saved on the SD card Values in the list Firmware Files Field Description Load firmware Save the system software files on your SD card No Displays the serial number of the system software file on your SD card Phone Type Displays the system telephone type Version Displays the version of the system software Status indicates that a system software file is saved on the SD card in the correct directory 16 3 3 Settings In the Maintenance gt Phone Update gt Settings menu you can set a period for the time dependent updating of the system software You can save a telephone number that may be used in case a system software update has failed You can dial this number with the telephone in order to update the system software once the telephone is in boot mode fol lowing a failed update The Maintenance gt Phone Update gt
303. mbH 13 VPN Field Description The function is disabled by default Send Initial Contact Select whether IKE Initial Contact messages are to be sent Message during IKE phase 1 if no SAs with a peer exist The function is enabled with Enabled The function is enabled by default Sync SAs with ISP in Select whether all SAs are to be deleted whose data traffic was terface state routed via an interface on which the status has changed from Up to Down Dormant or Blocked The function is enabled with Enabled The function is disabled by default Use Zero Cookies Select whether zeroed ISAKMP Cookies are to be sent These are equivalent to the SPI Security Parameter Index in IKE proposals as they are redundant they are normally set to the value of the negotiation currently in progress Alternatively your device can use zeroes for all values of the cookie In this case select Enabled Zero Cookie Size Only for Use Zero Cookies enabled Enter the length in bytes of the zeroed SPI used in IKE propos als The default value is 32 Dynamic RADIUS Au Select whether RADIUS authentication is to be activated via thentication IPSec The function is enabled with Enabled The function is disabled by default Fields in the PKI Handling Options menu Field Description Ignore Certificate Re Select whether certificate requests received from the remote quest Payloads end during IKE phase 1 are to be ignored 13 VPN Gigaset
304. mber Enter the number or part of a number identifying a zone e Name Enter a name for this zone 7 2 3 2 Mon Sun In the Mon Sun area select the desired times for each routing level and the desired route or provider via which outgoing calls shall be routed from the entered time Fields in the lt Weekday gt menu Field Description Routing Stage 1 Configure the switching times for routing level 1 For this first select the Start Time from which routing shall occur over a specific interface or a specific network provider and select the latter under Interface Provider Routing Stage 2 Configure the switching times for routing level 2 For this first select the Start Time from which routing shall occur over a specific interface or a specific network provider and select the latter under Interface Provider hybird 120 Gigaset Edition Gigaset Communications GmbH 8 Applications Chapter 8 Applications Internal telephone performance features of the system are set up under Applications 8 1 Calendar In the Applications gt Calendar menu you can decide whether to make new entries or modifications in the calendar Every company has fixed business hours You can enter these in the system s internal calendar For example all calls outside of business hours can be signalled to a exchange or an answering machine During this period your employees can perform other tasks without being interrupted by telephone calls The
305. mber default value The internal team num ber is selected for assignment to a team e Call Through e Redirect application e Phone Remote Access e ISDN Login e Service Login e Mini Call Center Fields in the Internal Number and Rerouting Settings menu Field Description Internal Number Only for Assignment Internal Number Select the internal number to which incoming calls shall be as signed via the line selected in Trunk Rerouting Application Only for Assignment redirect application Select the desired redirect application to be assigned to the number You can configure redirect applications in the Applic ations gt Rerouting gt Rerouting Applications menu Active Variant Day Only for redirect application lt configured redirect ap plication gt Select the redirect application variant to be currently enabled If a variant switch is set up via the calendar this setting will be switched back again at the appropriate time 5 Numbering Gigaset Communications GmbH Field Description Possible values e Variant 1 e Variant 2 o Variance 3 e Variant 4 Fields in the Call Through Settings menu Field Description Authorization PIN 6 Digit Numeric Internal Number and Rerouting Settings Only for Assignment Call Through Define the authorisation for which the Call Through function shall be released Possible values e Number screening Dialling release occurs after matching the entered n
306. meg hybird GUI Values in the list Gigaset Phones Field Description Description Displays the description entered for the system telephone Phone Type Displays the system telephone type MAC Address Shows the system telephone s MAC address Phone Version Displays the software version of the telephone SD Card Vers Displays the inserted SD card version Status Update Status Displays the system telephone status or a progress bar during the update progress identifies a connected system telephone whose system software is supported by your hybird 16 Maintenance Gigaset Communications GmbH Field Description identifies a system telephone that is either not connected or whose system software is not supported by your hybird For IP telephone there is no restriction on simultaneous updat ing of system software If the system telephone system software is not supported by your hybird there is still a way to update the system software During system software updating you see a progress bar Update enabled Shows whether connected telephones can independently download new software from the system You can select individual entries using the checkbox in the cor responding line or select them all using the Select all button or the Deselect all button Update immediately Displays whether the system telephone software should be up dated immediately This function is enabled on an individual device by setting a check
307. mum Retries 285 Maximum Upstream Bandwidth 69 Maximum Groups 227 Maximum Message Level of Syslog Entries 4 Maximum Number of Accounting Log Entries 4 Maximum Sources 227 Maximum E mails per Minute 384 Maximum Number of Syslog Entries 4 Maximum number of concurrent con nections 25 Maximum Response Time 226 Maximum Time between Retries 285 Maximum TTL for Negative Cache Entries 316 Maximum TTL for Positive Cache Entries 316 Gigaset Communications GmbH Maximum Upload Speed 206 209 250 Members 309 313 Memory Usage 3 Memory Card 3 Message 390 Message Compression 383 Message Timeout 383 Messages 391 Metric 188 192 255 MIB Variables 340 MIB SNMP Variable to add edit 340 Min queue size 212 Mini Call Center 159 Minimum Time between Retries 285 Misdial Routing 115 MobIKE 260 Mobile Number 84 122 Mode 44 189 192 220 226 227 247 264 266 277 Mode Bridge Group 23 Mode for status In the Office 175 Mode for status Out of Office 175 Monitored Certificate 336 Monitored Interface 336 353 Monitored Subsystems 383 Monitored Variable 336 Monitored IP Address 351 Monitoring 388 MTU 299 391 Multicast 223 Multicast Routing 225 Multicast Group Address 229 Multiple SIP Connections Sub Exchange 125 Music on Hold 103 N Name 54 56 57 58 59 83 155 277 388 389 NAT 193 394 NAT method 195 NAT Traversal 270 NAT Detection 391 Gigaset Communicati
308. n SO Upn Exten sion 8 Charge Rate Factor 8 Charges 388 Check PIN 175 Class ID 203 209 Classmap 203 Class of Services 90 Client Registration Timer 74 CLIP 58 Code 311 Code for Doorcom Call Acceptance 165 Codec Profile 118 121 125 Codec Profiles 65 Codec Profiles 71 Codec Proposal Sequence 72 Command Mode 340 Command Type 340 Common Name 46 Compare Condition 336 Compare Value 336 Compression 27 294 Config Mode 255 Configuration Encryption 370 Configuration Access 37 Configuration contains certificates keys 340 Configuration Interface 23 Configured Speed Mode 52 Confirm Admin Password 10 Congestion Avoidance RED 212 Connection State 201 214 362 Connection Type 241 286 Connection Idle Timeout 233 237 241 286 291 Connections Nr 118 Consider public holidays 143 Contact 4 Control Mode 206 250 Controlled Interfaces 249 COS Filter 802 1p Layer 2 201 214 362 Costs 157 Index Count 340 Country 46 Country Profile 7 CPU Usage 3 Create NAT Policy 234 238 242 287 293 CRLs 49 CSV File Format 340 Currency 8 Current Class of Service 388 Current File Name in Flash 370 Current Local Time 13 Current Speed Mode 52 Custom 46 D D Channel Mode 264 Data Packets Sequence Numbers 285 Date 12 157 157 390 Date DD MM 144 Deactivate number suppression 65 Default MSN 56 Default Route 234 238 242 255 287 293 299 Default
309. n IP address from this range represents a multicast group to which several recipients can log in The multicast router then forwards the re quired packets to all subnets with logged in recipients Multicast basics Multicast is connectionless which means that any trouble shooting or flow control needs to be guaranteed at application level At transport level UDP is used almost exclusively as in contrast to TCP it is not based on a point to point connection At IP level the main difference is therefore that the destination address does not address 11 Multicast Gigaset Communications GmbH a dedicated host but rather a group i e during the routing of multicast packets the decis ive factor is whether a recipient is in a logged in subnet In the local network all hosts are required to accept all multicast packets For Ethernet or FDD this is based on MAC mapping where the group address is encoded into the destin ation MAC address For routing between several networks the routers first need to make themselves known to all potential recipients in the subnet This is achieved by means of Membership Management protocols such as IGMP for IPv4 and MLP for IPv6 Membership Management protocol In IPv4 IGMP Internet Group Management Protocol is a protocol that hosts can use to provide the router with multicast membership information IP addresses of the class D ad dress range are used for addressing An IP address in this class r
310. n achieves this firstly by using the Authentication Header AH protocol and Encapsulated Security Payload ESP protocol and secondly through the use of cryptographic key administration mechanisms like the Internet Key Exchange IKE pro tocol Additional Traffic Filter bintec elmeg gateways support two different methods of setting up IPSec connections e a method based on policies and e a method based on routing The policy based method uses data traffic filters to negotiate the IPSec phase 2 SAs This allows for a very fine grained filter to be applied to the IP packet even at the level of the protocol and the port 13 VPN Gigaset Communications GmbH The routing based method offers various advantages over the policy based method e g NAT PAT within a tunnel IPSec in combination with routing protocols and the creation of VPN backup scenarios With the routing based method the configured or dynamically learned routes are used to negotiate the IPSec phase 2 SAs Although this method doe simplify many configurations problems may also be caused by competing routes or the coarser filtering of data traffic The Additional Traffic Filter parameter fixes this problem You can apply a finer filter i e you can enter the source IP address or the source port If a Additional Traffic Filter is configured this is used to negotiate the IPSec phase 2 SAs the route now only determ ines which data traffic is to be routed If an IP pa
311. n as rel evant syslog messages appear 173 1 Alert Recipient A list of Syslog messages is displayed in the Alert Recipient menu 17 3 1 1 New Select the New to create additional alert recipients The menu External Reporting gt Alert Service gt Alert Recipient gt New consists of the following fields Fields in the Add Edit Alert Recipient menu Field Description Alert Service Displays the alert service Recipient Enter the recipient s e mail address The entry is limited to 40 characters Message Compression Select whether the text in the alert E mail is to be shortened The e mail then contains the syslog message only once plus the number of relevant events Enable or disable the field The function is enabled by default Subject You can enter a subject Matching String You must enter a Matching String This must occur in a sys log message as a necessary condition for triggering an alert The entry is limited to 55 characters Bear in mind that without the use of wildcards e g only those strings that corres pond exactly to the entry fulfil the condition The Matching String entered therefore usually contains wildcards To be in formed of all syslog messages of the selected level just enter 17 External Reporting Gigaset Communications GmbH Field Description Severity Monitored Subsys tems Message Timeout Number of Messages MR Select the severity level which the string conf
312. n the Select file field is deleted e Import language You can import additional language versions of the GUI into your device You can download the files to your PC from the download area at www gigasetpro com and from there import them to your device e Update system software You can launch an update of the system software the ADSL logic and the BOOTmonitor 16 Maintenance Gigaset Communications GmbH Field Description Action Import Voice Mail Wave Files Only displayed if an SD card is inserted In file name select the vms_wavfiles zip file that you wish to import Export configuration with state information The active configuration from the RAM is transferred to your local host If you click the Go button a dialog box is dis played in which you can select the storage location on your PC and enter the desired file name Select the action you wish to execute After each task a window is displayed showing the other steps that are required Possible values No Action default value Import configuration Under Filename select a config uration file you want to import Please note Click Go to first load the file under the name boot in the flash memory for the device You must restart the device to enable it Please note The files to be imported must be in CSV format Import language You can import additional language versions of the GUI into your device You can download the files to your PC from the d
313. ne of the protocols implemented Possible values e DynDNS default value e Static DynDNS e ODS Gigaset Communications GmbH 15 Local Services Field Description e AN A TDYNS CnuDTB ATME O Grae 12 e Custom DynDNS e DnsExit Update Interval Enter the minimum time in seconds that your device must wait before it is allowed to propagate its current IP address to the DynDNS provider again The default value is 300 seconds 15 4 DHCP Server You can configure your device as a DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol server Your device and each PC in your LAN requires its own IP address One option for allocat ing IP addresses in your LAN is the Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP If you configure your device as a DHCP server the device automatically assigns IP addresses to requesting PCs in the LAN from a predefined IP address pool If a client requires an IP address for the first time it sends a DHCP request with its MAC address to the available DHCP server as a network broadcast The client then receives its IP address from bintec elmeg as part of a brief exchange You therefore do not need to allocate fixed IP addresses to PCs which reduces the amount of configuration work in your network To do this you set up a pool of IP ad dresses from which your device assigns IP addresses to hosts in the LAN for a defined period of time A DHCP server also transfers the addresses of the domain name server
314. nection can be set up over the Internet The only case in which callback is not executed is if SAs Security Associations already exist i e the tunnel to the peer already exists Ca Note If a tunnel is to be set up to a peer the interface over which the tunnel is to be implemented is activated first by the IPSec Daemon If IPSec with DynDNS is configured on the local device the own IP address is propagated first and then the ISDN call is sent to the remote device This ensures that the remote device can actually reach the local device if it initiates the tunnel setup Transfer of IP Address over ISDN Transferring the IP address of a device over ISDN in the D channel and or B channel opens up new possibilities for the configuration of IPSec VPNs This enables restrictions that occur in IPSec configuration with dynamic IP addresses to be avoided C Note To use the IP address transfer over ISDN function you must obtain a free of charge extra licence You can obtain the licence data for extra licences via the online licensing pages in the support section at www bintec elmeg com Please follow the online licensing instructions Before System Software Release 7 1 4 IPSec ISDN callback only supported tunnel setup if the current IP address of the initiator could be determined by indirect means e g via DynDNS However DynDNS has serious disadvantages such as the latency until the IP address is actually updated in the database Th
315. nection to the individual team subscribers is estab lished The announcement then proceeds to the team subscribers who have accepted the announcement within this period 5 Numbering Gigaset Communications GmbH C Note Announcements are automatically accepted by the called telephone by en abling the loudspeaker function if e the telephone is not in use e the announcement is set up and e the Do not disturb function is not active MWI Message Waiting Indication You ve got new messages in your mailbox or new e mails waiting at your Internet service provider as you have no prior knowledge you must constantly check whether you do ac tually have new messages With the MWI performance feature your system receives the information about new messages from the corresponding service provider Now you merely need query your mailbox or e mail POB if new messages really are present You can also send a MWI from a voicebox connected to the system or from a system tele phone set up as a reception telephone This information can be displayed or signalled on terminals analogue terminals ISDN ter minals and system telephones that support this performance feature MMW information from outside is conveyed transparently by the system When an MMI is present the Gigaset telephone displays an envelope symbol and a text generated in the telephone along with the caller s phone number Analogue terminals e Switching on the MMI can only
316. nevertheless registered e Not defined No Registration No location is defined According to set default behaviour the subscriber is not registered e Not defined Registration for Private Net works Only No location is defined According to set de fault behaviour the subscriber is only registered if located in a private network e lt Location gt A defined location is selected The subscriber is only registered if at this location MAC Address Shows the MAC address of the telephone The menu Advanced Settings consists of the following fields Fields in the menu Further Settings Field Description No Hold and Retrieve The performance features hold a call and retrieve a held call are not available on certain telephones 6 Terminals Gigaset Communications GmbH Field Description The function is activated by selecting Enabled The function is disabled by default Fields in the menu Codec Settings Field Description Select the Codec profile to be used Codec profiles are con Codec Profile figured in the VoIP gt Settings gt Codec Profiles menu 6 1 1 2 Numbers In the menu Terminals gt Gigaset Phones gt Gigaset Phones gt Numbers you assign an IP telephone up to twelve internal phone numbers using Add The available internal phone numbers are created under Numbering gt User Settings gt Users gt New You can delete assigned numbers from the list with m Values in the list Number Settings Field D
317. nfiguration The function is enabled with Enabled The function is disabled by default Switch to SNMP If you activate the button Switch to SNMP Browser the user Browser can switch to the SNMP browser view access the parameters and modify all the settings displayed there f Caution Note that the permission for Switch to SNMP Browser means that the user can access the en tire MIB because no individual access profile can be created in this view The user can save the changed MIB with the permission for Save con figuration With the permission for Switch to SNMP Browser you remove the configured GUI restric tions at the MIB level once more Enable or disable Switch to SNMP Browser The function is enabled with Enabled The function is disabled by default Fields in the menu Navigation Entrys Field Description Menus You see all the menus from the GUl s navigation bar Menus that contain at least one sub menu are flagged by and r The icon indicates pages When you create a new access profile no elements are as signed yet i e all the available menus sub menus and pages are flagged with the icon Each element in the navigation bar can have three values Click the icon in the row you want to display these three val 2 System Management Gigaset Communications GmbH Field Description ues Possible values e Deny The menu and all its lower level menus are blocked e Allow The menu is released L
318. nfigured or dynamically learned routes are used to negotiate the IPSec phase 2 SAs While it is true that this method simplifies many configurations at the same time there can be problems due to competing routes or the coarser filtering of the data traffic The Additional Traffic Filter parameter fixes this problem You can filter more finely i e you can e g specify the source IP address or the source port If there is a Additional Traffic Filter configured it is used to negotiate the IPSec phase 2 SAs the route only de termines which data traffic is to be routed If an IP packet does not match the defined Additional Traffic Filter it is discarded If an IP packet meets the requirements in an Additional Traffic Filter IPSec phase 2 ne gotiation begins and data traffic is transferred over the tunnel En Note The parameter Additional Traffic Filter is only relevant to the initiator of the IPSec connection it only applies to outgoing data traffic En Note Please note that the phase 2 policies must be configured identically on both of the IPSec tunnel endpoints 13 VPN Gigaset Communications GmbH Add new entries with Add The menu VPN gt IPSec gt IPSec Peers gt New gt Add consists of the following fields Fields in the menu Basic Parameters Field Description Description Enter a description for the filter Protocol Select a protocol The Any option default value matches all protocols Source IP Address
319. ng Enabled Enter the maximum available bandwidth in kbps for the selec ted interface Filter Rules This field contains a list of all configured firewall policies for which QoS was activated Apply QoS Enabled The follow ing options are available for each list entry e Use Select whether this entry should be assigned to the QoS interface The option is deactivated by default e Bandwidth Enter the maximum available bandwidth in Bit s for the service specified under Service 0 is entered by de fault Bounded Select whether the bandwidth defined in Band width can be exceeded in the longer term By activating this field you specify that it cannot be exceeded If the option is deactivated the bandwidth can be exceeded and the excess data rate is handled in accordance with the priority defined in the firewall policy The option is deactivated by default 14 1 3 Options In this menu you can disable or enable the firewall and can log its activities In addition you can define after how many seconds of inactivity a session shall be ended The menu Firewall gt Policies gt Options consists of the following fields Fields in the Global Firewall Options menu Field Description Firewall Status Enable or disable the firewall function The function is enabled with Enabled The function is enabled by default 14 Firewall Gigaset Communications GmbH Field Description Logged Actions Select the firewall syslog level T
320. ng fields Fields in the Basic Settings menu Field Description Assignment Choose the redirect function to which you wish to assign the selected option 8 3 Voice Applications In the Applications gt Voice Applications menu you configure you system s wave files A professional greeting especially on the telephone constitutes a company s visiting card Voice applications make this possible for every business Indeed while being trans ferred the caller receives information that s individually tailored e g according to depart ment or is simply entertained with pleasant music on hold You wish to employ special music as music on hold or specific announcements for your clients You can load your self produced Wave files to the system User specific voice and music files can be saved in the system Storage space for 2 MoH melodies is available in the system basic settings The available storage space can be ex tended with an SD card The length of the language and music files that can be saved is based upon the SD card used Voice and music data is saved in Wave format The following voice applications can be defined in the system e Announcement before query e Announcement without query Infobox e Wake up call e Music on hold You can find additional information on function configuration and operation in the descrip tion of the individual performance features Basic settings of voice applications The voice application
321. ng packets are processed as follows e The SIF first checks if an incoming packet can be assigned to an existing connection If so it is forwarded If the packet cannot be assigned to an existing connection a check is made to see if a suitable connection is expected e g as affiliated connection of an existing connection If so the packet is also accepted e If the packet cannot be assigned to any existing or expected connection the SIF filter rules are applied If a deny rule matches the packet the packet is rejected without send ing an error message to the sender of the packet if a reject rule matches the packet is rejected and an ICMP Host Unreachable message sent to the sender of the packet The packet is only forwarded if an accept rule matches e All packets without matching rules are rejected without sending an error message to the sender when all the existing rules have been checked default behaviour 14 1 Policies 14 1 1 Filter Rules The default behaviour with Action Access consists of two implicit filter rules If an in coming packet can be assigned to an existing connection and if a suitable connection is expected e g such as an affiliated connection of an existing connection the packet is al lowed 14 Firewall Gigaset Communications GmbH The sequence of filter rules in the list is relevant The filter rules are applied to each pack et in succession until a rule matches If overlapping occurs i e more t
322. ng the server and client An L2TP tunnel profile must be created on each of the two sides LAC and LNS The corresponding L2TP tunnel profile is used on the initiator side LAC to set up the connection The L2TP tunnel profile is needed on the responder side LNS to accept the connection 13 2 1 Tunnel Profiles A list of all configured tunnel profiles is displayed in the VPN gt L2TP gt Tunnel Profiles menu 13 2 1 1 New Choose the New button to create additional tunnel profiles The menu VPN gt L2TP gt Tunnel Profiles gt New consists of the following fields Fields in the Basic Parameters menu Field Description Description Enter a description for the current profile The device automatically names the profiles L2TP and numbers them but the value can be changed Enter the host name for LNS or LAC Local Hostname e LAC The local hostname is used in outgoing tunnel setup messages to identify this device and is associated with the remote hostname of a tunnel profile configured on the LNS These tunnel setup messages are SCCRQs Start Control Connection Request sent from the LAC and SCCRPs Start Control Connection Reply sent from the LNS LNS Is the same as the value for Remote Hostname of the incoming tunnel setup message from the LAC Enter the host name of the LNS or LAC Remote Hostname e LAC Defines the value for Local Hostname of the LNS contained in the SCCRQs received from the LNS and the SCCRPs receive
323. ns GmbH 11 Multicast Field Description IGMP State Limit Limit the number of reports queries per second for the selected interface Mode Specify whether the interface defined here only works in host mode or in both host mode and routing mode Possible values e Routing default value The interface is operated in Rout ing mode e Host The interface is only operated in host mode IGMP Proxy IGMP Proxy enables you to simulate several locally connected interfaces as a subnet to an adjacent router Queries coming in to the IGMP Proxy interface are forwarded to the local subnets Local reports are forwarded on the IPGM Proxy interface The menu Advanced Settings consists of the following fields Fields in the Advanced Settings menu Field Description IGMP Proxy Select whether your device is to forward the hosts IGMP mes sages in the subnet via its defined Proxy Interface Proxy Interface Only for IGMP Proxy enabled Select the interface on your device via which queries are to be received and collected 11 2 2 Options In this menu you can enable and disable IGMP on your system You can also define whether IGMP is to be used in compatibility mode or only IGMP V3 hosts are to be accep ted The Multicast gt IGMP gt Options menu consists of the following fields Fields in the Basic Settings menu 11 Multicast Gigaset Communications GmbH Field Description IGMP Status Select the IGMP status Possible values
324. nternal numbers to the terminals and set additional functions according to terminal type Terminals of the corresponding category VoIP ISDN or analog are sorted alphabetically in the Description column Click the column title of any other column to sort entries in as cending or descending order 6 2 1 VoIP In the Terminals gt Other phones gt VolP menu you configure the connected VoIP termin als For example you perform assignment of a configured internal number 6 2 1 1 Edit or New Choose the ry icon to edit existing entries Select the New button to add VoIP terminals The Terminals gt Other phones gt VolP gt New menu consists of the following fields Fields in the menu Basic Settings Field Description Description Enter a description for the IP telephone Location Select the location of the telephone You define locations in the VoIP gt Settings gt Locations menu Depending on the setting in this menu default behaviour for registration of VoIP sub scribers for which no location should be defined is displayed for selection Possible values e Not defined Unrestricted Registration No loc ation is defined According to set default behaviour the sub criber is nevertheless registered 6 Terminals Gigaset Communications GmbH Field Description e Not defined No Registration No location is defined According to set default behaviour the subscriber is not registered e Not defined Registration f
325. nternet in order to be as signed a dynamic IP address and be reachable for peer B over the Internet 2 Your device creates a token with a limited validity and saves it together with the cur rent IP address in the MIB entry belonging to peer B 3 Your device sends the initial ISDN call to peer B which transfers the IP address of peer A and the token as per the callback configuration 4 Peer B extracts the IP address of peer A and the token from the ISDN call and as signs them to peer A based on the calling party number configured the ISDN num ber used by peer A to send the initial call to peer B 5 The IPSec Daemon at peer B s device can use the transferred IP address to initiate phase 1 negotiation with peer A Here the token is returned to peer A in part of the payload in IKE negotiation 6 Peer A is now able to compare the token returned by peer B with the entries in the MIB and so identify the peer without knowing its IP address As peer A and peer B can now mutually identify each other negotiations can also be con ducted in the ID Protect mode using preshared keys 13 VPN Gigaset Communications GmbH En Note In some countries e g Switzerland the call in the D channel can also incur costs An incorrect configuration at the called side can mean that the called side opens the B channel the calling side incurs costs The following options are only available on devices with an ISDN connection Fields in the me
326. nticating IPSec peers via XAuth Vendor Mode Only for Authentication Type Accounting In hotspot applications select the mode define by the provider In standard applications leave the value set to Default Possible values for hotspot applications e France Telecom For France Telecom hotspot applica tions e bintec HotSpot Server For hotspot applications Server IP Address Enter the IP address of the RADIUS server 2 System Management Gigaset Communications GmbH Field Value RADIUS Secret Enter the shared password used for communication between the RADIUS server and your device Default User Password Some Radius servers require a user password for each RADI US request Enter the password that your device sends as the default user password in the prompt for the dialout routes on the RADIUS server Priority If a number of RADIUS server entries were created the server with the highest priority is used first If this server does not an swer the server with the next highest priority is used Possible values from 0 highest priority to 7 lowest priority The default value is 0 See also Policy in the Advanced Settings Entry active Select whether the RADIUS server configured in this entry is to be used The function is activated by selecting Enabled The function is enabled by default Group Description Define a new RADIUS group description or assign the new RA DIUS entry to a predefined group The configured R
327. ntication protocol required by the connection part ner MSCHAP version 1 or 2 possible e MS CHAPv2 Run MS CHAP version 2 only e None Some providers use no authentication In this case select this option DNS Negotiation Select whether your device receives IP addresses for Primary DNS Server and Secondary DNS Server from the connection partner or sends these to the connection partner The function is enabled with Enabled The function is enabled by default Prioritize TCP ACK Select whether the TCP download is to be optimised in the Packets event of intensive TCP upload This function can be specially applied for asymmetrical bandwidths ADSL The function is enabled with Enabled The function is disabled by default Gigaset Communications GmbH 12 WAN Field Description PPTP Address Mode Displays the address mode The value cannot be changed Possible values e Static The Local PPTP IP Address will be assigned to the selected Ethernet port Local PPTP IP Ad Assign the PPTP interface an IP address that is used as the dress source address The default value is 10 0 0 140 Remote PPTP IP Ad Enter the IP address of the PPTP partner dress The default value is 10 0 0 138 LCP Alive Check Select whether the availability of the remote terminal is to be checked by sending LCP echo requests or replies This makes it possible to switch to a backup connection more quickly in the event of line faults The functi
328. nts are to be quest answered via the particular interface from the local network The function is enabled with Enabled The function is disabled by default Interface is UPnP con Determine whether the NAT configuration of this interface is trolled controlled by UPnP The function is enabled with Enabled The function is disabled by default 15 8 2 General In this menu you make the basic UPnP settings The Local Services gt UPnP gt General menu consists of the following fields Fields in the General menu Field Description UPnP Status Decide how the gateway processes UPnP requests from the LAN The function is enabled with Enabled The gateway proceeds with UPnP releases in accordance with the parameters con tained in the request from the LAN UPnP client independently of the IP address of the requesting LAN UPnP client The function is disabled by default The gateway rejects UPnP requests NAT releases are not made Gigaset Communications GmbH 15 Local Services Field Description UPnP TCP Port Enter the number of the port on which the gateway listens for UPnP requests The possible values are 7 to 65535 the default value is 5678 15 9 HotSpot Gateway The HotSpot Solution allows provision of public Internet accesses using WLAN or wired Ethernet The solution is adapted to setup of smaller and larger Hotspot solutions for cafes hotels companies communal residences campgrounds etc The HotSpot So
329. nu IPSec Callback Field Description Mode Select the Callback Mode Possible values e Inactive default value IPSec callback is deactivated The local device neither reacts to incoming ISDN calls nor initiates ISDN calls to the remote device e Passive The local device only reacts to incoming ISDN calls and if necessary initiates setting up an IPSec tunnel to the peer No ISDN calls are sent to the remote device to cause this to set up an IPSec tunnel e Active The local device sends an ISDN call to the remote device to cause this to set up an IPSec tunnel The device does not react to incoming ISDN calls e Both Your device can react to incoming ISDN calls and send ISDN calls to the remote device The setting up of an IPSec tunnel is executed after an incoming ISDN call and initiated by an outgoing ISDN call Incoming Phone Num Only for Mode Passive or Both ber Enter the ISDN number from which the remote device calls the local device calling party number Wildcards may also be used Outgoing Phone Num Only for Mode Active or Both ber Enter the ISDN number with which the local device calls the re mote device calls called party number Wildcards may also be used Transfer own IP ad Select whether the IP address of your own device is to be Gigaset Communications GmbH 13 VPN Field Description dress over ISDN GSM_ _ transferred over ISDN for IPSec callback The function is enabled with Enabled
330. nvalid DNS packets received and ad dressed direct to your device DNS Requests Shows the number of valid DNS requests received and ad dressed direct to your device Cache Hits Shows the number of requests that were answered with static or dynamic entries from the cache Forwarded Requests Shows the number of requests forwarded to other name serv ers Cache Hitrate Indicates the number of Cache Hits pro DNS request in per centage Successfully Shows the number of successfully answered requests positive Answered Queries and negative Server Failures Shows the number of requests that were not answered by any Gigaset Communications GmbH 15 Local Services Field Description name server either positively or negatively 15 2 HTTPS You can operate the user interface of your device from any PC with an up to date Web browser via an HTTPS connection HTTPS HyperText Transfer Protocol Secure is the procedure used to establish an en crypted and authenticated connection by SSL between the browser used for configuration and the device 15 2 1 HTTPS Server In the Local Services gt HTTPS gt HTTPS Server menu configure the parameters of the backed up configuration connection via HTTPS The Local Services gt HTTPS gt HTTPS Server menu consists of the following fields Fields in the HTTPS Parameters menu Field Description HTTPS TCP Port Enter the port via which the HTTPS connection is to be estab lished Pos
331. ocal ID Type Only for Internet Key Exchange IKEv2 Select the local ID type Possible ID types e Fully Qualified Domain Name FQDN e E mail Address e IPV4 Address e ASN 1 DN Distinguished Name e Key ID Any string Local ID Only for Internet Key Exchange IKEv2 Enter the ID of your device For Authentication Method DSA Signature or RSA Sig nature the option Use Subject Name from certificate is dis played When you enable the option Use Subject Name from certific ate the first alternative subject name indicated in the certificate Gigaset Communications GmbH 13 VPN Field Description Preshared Key is used or if none is specified the subject name of the certific ate is used Note If you use certificates for authentication and your certific ate contains alternative subject names see Certificates on page 41 you must make sure your device selects the first al ternative subject name by default Make sure you and your peer both use the same name i e that your local ID and the peer ID your partner configures for you are identical Enter the password agreed with the peer The maximum length of the entry is 50 characters All charac ters are possible except for 0x at the start of the entry Fields in the menu Interface Routes Field Description IP Address Assign ment Config Mode IP Assignment Pool Select the configuration mode of the interface Possible values e Static defau
332. of the RADIUS server it sends an ACCESS_REJECT to reject the connection ACCOUNTING_START Client gt Server If a RADIUS server is used for accounting your device sends an accounting message to the RADIUS server at the start of each connection ACCOUNTING_STOP Client gt Server If a RADIUS server is used for accounting your device sends an accounting message to the RADIUS server at the end of each connection Gigaset Communications GmbH 2 System Management A list of all entered RADIUS servers is displayed in the System Management gt Remote Authentication gt RADIUS menu 2 6 1 1 Edit or New Choose the Fay icon to edit existing entries Choose the New button to add RADIUS serv ers The System Management gt Remote Authentication gt RADIUS gt New menu consists of the following fields Fields in the Basic Parameters menu Field Value Authentication Type Select what the RADIUS server is to be used for Possible values e PPP Authentication default value only for PPP connec tions The RADIUS server is used for controlling access to a network e Accounting for PPP connections only The RADIUS serv er is used for recording statistical call data e Login Authentication The RADIUS server is used for controlling access to the SNMP shell of your device e IPSec Authentication The RADIUS server is used for sending configuration data for IPSec peers to your device e XAUTH The RADIUS server is used for authe
333. of the authorisation classes assigned to the vice user The currently enabled authorisation class is marked ap propriately with a green arrow Terminal Displays the interface assigned to this subscriber Charges Displays calculated charges for accrued connection units Status Displays the status of the interface to which the subscriber is connected Values in the System Settings list Field Description Parallel Ringing Displays whether parallel call is set up for the user Call Forwarding Displays current call forwarding for this user Gigaset Communications GmbH 18 Monitoring Field Description Do not Disturb Displays whether call waiting protection is set up for the user Only for system telephones Call Waiting Displays whether call waiting is allowed for internal and or ex ternal calls Direct Call Displays whether direct call on receiver pickup is configured for the user Room Monitoring Displays whether room monitoring is enabled for the user Receive Announce Displays whether the announcement is allowed for the user ment Calls Receive Intercom Calls Displays whether simplex operation is allowed for the user Automatic Call Pick up Displays whether automatic call acceptance is configured for the user 18 1 2 Teams In the Monitoring gt Status Information gt Teams menu current team settings are dis played By pressing the P button you display detailed statistics for the respective team Values
334. om Units 2 o 164 8 7 1 Doorcom UNIS 38 6 e ee e e eae 165 8 7 2 Doorcom Signalling s e o 166 8 8 Alarm Galls 4 2 a Se ee bh ee et 169 8 8 1 Alarm GalllS vos ao pov pie eR op Me Bye cer da eei 169 8 9 Voice Mail System 2 0 o 172 hybird 120 Gigaset Edition 8 9 1 Voice Mail Boxes a a ee a a A OB ge 172 8 9 2 Status ic oe eee Re oe ee Ee RR we Re 176 8 9 3 Generali 20s Boren ON 177 Chapter 9 LAN ue ebb ee Oe a eS 179 9 1 IP Configuration gt 2 408 Sp aide ed Se ee hee BA a de 179 9 1 1 Interfaces 32 naia aoe a Bb ee T a Dai e zorla eb eg as 179 9 2 MVEA dedo tpt do ia de arde ah a sett ream eh Maya oben ody 183 9 2 1 VEANS 2 Ande Soe ae Eee LASS A od AREA 183 9 2 2 Port Configuration 2 2 ee 184 9 2 3 Administration eae Se PS RS Pe ee SS 185 Chapter 10 NETWORKING e cor a e ar a GO A ieee 186 10 1 A RR A E A AS 186 10 1 1 IPv4 Route Configuration 2 186 10 1 2 IPv4 Routing Tables 0 ios a ir Soon AD ck a oS 191 10 1 3 OPIONS a ah ee APR Aa Sal SAL Se GPR Aa ee of 192 10 2 NAT wet et Gabbe a et ae ae T D Pe Gade 193 10 2 1 NAT Interfaces s ioo a 2 ee 193 10 2 2 NAT Configuration seana en 194 10 3 QOS 238 Gh whee Hele Re Bout fee ale tee a 200 10 3 1 QoSiFillet ss sae di e Sete cite o BeBe wide dead hw 200 10 3 2 QoS Classification 2 a a o 2 203 10 3 3 QoS Interfaces Policies 0 0 0
335. on 14 Firewall Gigaset Communications GmbH Chapter 14 Firewall The Stateful Inspection Firewall SIF provided for bintec elmeg gateways is a powerful security feature The SIF with dynamic packet filtering has a decisive advantage over static packet filtering The decision whether or not to send a packet cannot be made solely on the basis of source and destination addresses or ports but also using dynamic packet filtering based on the state of the connection to a partner This means packets that belong to an already active connection can also be forwarded The SIF also accepts packets that belong to an affiliated connection The negotiation of an FTP connection takes place over port 21 for example but the actual data exchange can take place over a completely different port SIF and other security features The Stateful Inspection Firewall fits into the existing security architecture of bintec elmeg The configuration work for the SIF is comparatively straightforward with systems like Net work Address Translation NAT and IP Access Lists IPAL As SIF NAT and IPAL are active in the system simultaneously attention must be given to possible interaction If any packet is rejected by one of the security instances this is done immediately This is irrelevant whether another instance would accept it or not Your need for security features should therefore be accurately analysed The essential difference between SIF and NAT IPAL i
336. on For this a user name and password must be entered in the user HTML configuration and personal access author ised Once logged out you can view and modify the corresponding settings after entering this user name and password The Numbering gt User Settings gt Users gt Authorizations menu consists of the following fields Fields in the Basic Settings menu Field Description Password for IP Phone Enter the password with which a user IP telephone must log in Registration to the system The password can remain free if IP telephones log in but need not authenticate themselves PIN for Phone Access Here you can change the PIN for the user s personal answer ing machine voicemail box The default value is none Fields in the User HTML Configuration menu Field Description Personal Access Select whether this user shall receive access authorisation to a personalised user interface user access where he can per form his own entries and settings The function is activated by selecting Enabled The function is disabled by default Login Name Only for Personal Access enabled Enter a user name for this user This is required for login on the user interface Password Only for Personal Access enabled Enter a password for this user This is required for login on the user interface 5 Numbering Gigaset Communications GmbH Call Through Call Through consists in dialin to the system via an external connection and the c
337. on is enabled with Enabled The function is enabled by default 12 1 3 ISDN A list of all ISDN interfaces is displayed in the WAN gt Internet Dialup gt ISDN menu In this menu you configure the following ISDN connections e Internet access over ISDN e LAN to LAN connection over ISDN e Remote Mobile dial in e Use of the ISDN Callback function 12 1 3 1 New Choose the New button to set up new ISDN interfaces The menu WAN gt Internet Dialup gt ISDN gt New consists of the following fields Fields in the Basic Parameters menu 12 WAN Gigaset Communications GmbH Field Description Description Enter a name for uniquely identifying the connection partner The first character in this field must not be a number No special characters or umlauts must be used Connection Type Select which layer 1 protocol your device should use This setting applies for outgoing connections to the connection partner and only for incoming connections from the connection partner if they could be identified on the basis of the calling party number Possible values e ISDN 64 kbps For 64 kbps ISDN data connections e ISDN 56 kbps For 56 kbps ISDN data connections User Name Enter your device code local PPP user name Remote User for Dial Enter the code of the remote terminal remote PPP user in only name Password Enter the password Always on Select whether the interface should always be activated The function is enabl
338. on the PC must be enabled The pre configured port used for UPnP communication between LAN UPnP clients and the gateway is 5678 The LAN UPnP client acts as a so called service control point i e it recognizes and controls the UPnP devices on the network The ports assigned dynamically by for example MSN Messenger lie in the range from 5004 to 65535 The ports are released internally to the gateway on demand i e when an audio video transfer is started in Messenger When the application is closed the ports are immediately closed again The peer to peer communication is initiated via public SIP servers with only the informa tion from the two clients being forwarded The clients then communicate directly with one another For further information about UPnP see www upnp org 15 8 1 Interfaces In this menu you configure the UPnP settings individually for each interface of your gate way You can determine whether UPnP requests from clients are accepted by each interface 15 Local Services Gigaset Communications GmbH for requests from the local network and or whether the interface can be controlled via UPnP requests The menu Local Services gt UPnP gt Interfaces consists of the following fields Fields in the Interfaces menu Field Description Interface Shows the name of the interface for which the UPnP settings are to be made The entry cannot be changed Answer to client re Determine whether UPnP requests from clie
339. onds Compression Select whether data compression should be used The function is activated by selecting Enabled The function is disabled by default TCP Keepalives Select whether the device is to send keepalive packets The function is activated by selecting Enabled The function is enabled by default Logging Level Select the syslog level for the syslog messages generated by 2 System Management Gigaset Communications GmbH Field Value the SSH Daemon Possible settings e Information default value Fatal and simple errors of the SSH Daemon and information messages are recorded e Fatal Only fatal errors of the SSH Daemon are recorded e Error Fatal and simple errors of the SSH Daemon are re corded e Debug All messages are recorded 2 5 3 SNMP SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol is a network protocol used to monitor and control network elements e g routers servers switches printers computers etc from a central station SNMP controls communication between the monitored devices and monit oring station The protocol describes the structure of the data packets that can be trans mitted as well as the communication process The data objects queried via SNMP are structured in tables and variables and defined in the MIB Management Information Base This contains all the configuration and status variables of the device SNMP can be used to perform the following network management tasks e Surveillan
340. one B channels remains in use in case of forwarding from external to external it s both B channels Two possibilities exist for call forwarding of an external call to an external number e Call forwarding in the exchange Call forwarding is conducted at the exchange if only one subscriber is entered in the call allocation for an external call For call forwarding in 7 Call Routing Gigaset Communications GmbH the exchange the performance features Call Deflection point to multipoint connection or Partial Rerouting point to point connection must be enabled with the network oper ator for the relevant ISDN connections e Call forwarding in the system Call forwarding occurs in the system if the required per formance features for call forwarding at the exchange are not available for the relevant ISDN connections If several telephones e g a team some of which have set up call forwarding receive an external call the corresponding call forwarding is performed in the system Here the external connection is set up over a bundle s B channel cleared for the subscriber initiating the setup This B channel remains assigned for the duration of active call forwarding Ca Note If the system is connected to the external ISDN for external to external con nections the system systematically attempts to initiate call forwarding via the exchange For teams there can be manual definition of whether call for warding shall occur via the exchange or
341. one Select the time zone in which your device is installed You can select Universal Time Coordinated UTC plus or minus the deviation in hours or a predefined location e g Europe Berlin Current Local Time The current date and current system time are shown here The entry cannot be changed Fields in the Manual Time Settings menu Field Description Set Date Enter a new date Format Day dd 2 System Management Gigaset Communications GmbH Field Description e Month mm e Year yyyy Set Time Enter a new time Format e Hour hh e Minute mm Fields in the Automatic Time Settings Time Protocol menu Field Description ISDN Timeserver Determine whether the system time is to be updated via ISDN If a time server is configured the time is only determined over ISDN until a successful update is received from this time serv er Updating over ISDN is deactivated for the period in which the time is determined by means of a time server The function is activated with Enabled The function is enabled by default First Timeserver Enter the primary time server by using either a domain name or an IP address In addition select the protocol for the time server request Possible values e SNTP default value This server uses the simple network time protocol via UDP port 123 e Time Service UDP This server uses the Time service with UDP port 37 e Time Service TCP This server uses the Time service
342. ons GmbH NAT Configuration 194 NAT active 193 NAT Interfaces 193 National Prefix City Code 7 Negative Cache 316 Negotiation Type 391 Net Direct Keypad 102 Netmask 192 220 287 Network Address 220 Network Configuration 220 Networking 186 New Calls 176 New Destination Port 199 New Destination IP Address Netmask 199 New File Name 370 New Source Port 199 New Source IP Address Netmask 199 Night 84 Night Mode Status 2 No Hold and Retrieve 117 121 125 No 192 377 390 393 Notification 173 Number 176 388 389 Number of Messages 383 Number of playbacks 148 170 Number of repeats 170 Number of Admitted Connections 258 Number of allowed simultaneous Calls 65 Number of BChannels 246 Number of Used Ports 247 Numbering 76 Numbers 86 112 118 122 163 0 Old Calls 176 On Busy 111 Optional 84 Optional Rerouting 88 Options 37 192 227 279 290 297 307 334 350 362 369 Index 382 Organization 46 Organizational Unit 46 OSPF Mode 247 289 295 Other Inactivity 308 Other phones 123 Outbound Interface 209 Outgoing 156 Outgoing Signalisation 62 77 86 Outgoing Signalisation 86 Outgoing Services 132 Outgoing ISDN Number 296 Outgoing Phone Number 264 Overbooking allowed 209 Overview 131 Overwrite similar certificate 340 P P P Additional MSN 79 P P Base Number 79 P P DDI Exception 79 Packets 391 Parallel Ringing 105 Parallel Ringing 388 Parallel Rin
343. or Line this authorisation class With automatic outside line users of this authorisation class hear the external dialling tone after picking up the receiver and can immediately dial outside To make internal calls press the star key after picking up the re ceiver Trunk Line Selection Select the connections over which outgoing calls from these 5 Numbering Gigaset Communications GmbH Field Description with Line Access Num telephones shall be externally routed The order of entries de ber termines in which sequence in case of an engaged external line dialling shall occur over the other assigned lines Allow manual trunk Besides general exchange access a telephone can also se group selection lectively use a bundle Here an external connection is initiated with the corresponding code for the target assignment of the bundle and not by dialling the dialling code To be able to perform a selective bundle assignment the au thorisation class must possess the appropriate authorisation The authorisation can also include bundles that the authorisa tion class can otherwise not assign If a telephone does not possess the authorisation for selective bundle assignment or if the selected bundle is in use the busy tone is heard after dial ling the code If Automatic outside line is set up for an au thorisation class users of this authorisation class must press the star key before selective bundle assignment then initiate external dia
344. or Mode SCEP Only for CA Certificate not Download 2 System Management Gigaset Communications GmbH Field Description Select a certificate for signing SCEP communication The default value is Use CA Certificate i e the CA certificate is used RA Encrypt Certificate Only for Mode SCEP Only if RA Sign Certificate not Use CA Certificate If you use one of your own certificates to sign communication with the RA you can select another one here to encrypt com munication The default value is Use RA Sign Certificate i e the same certificate is used as for signing Password Only for Mode SCEP You may need a password from the certification authority to obtain certificates for your keys Enter the password you re ceived from the certification authority here Fields in the Subject Name menu Field Description Custom Select whether you want to enter the name components of the subject name individually as specified by the CA or want to enter a special subject name If Enabled is selected a subject name can be given in Sum mary with attributes not offered in the list Example CN VPNServer DC mydomain DC com c DE If the field is not selected enter the name components in Com mon Name E mail Organizational Unit Organization Loc ality State Province and Country The function is disabled by default Summary Only for Custom enabled Enter a subject name with attributes not offe
345. or Private Net works Only No location is defined According to set de fault behaviour the subscriber is only registered if located in a private network e lt Location gt A defined location is selected The subscriber is only registered if at this location Fields in the menu Number Seitings Field Description Internal Numbers Select the internal number for this terminal You can define sev eral internal numbers Possible values e No free Extension Available All configured internal numbers are already in use First configure another user with additional numbers e lt Internal Number gt Select one of the existing numbers of the configured users The menu Advanced Settings consists of the following fields Fields in the menu SIP Client Settings Field Description SIP Client Mode Select whether a dynamic SIP client or a static SIP client is to be used Possible values e Dynamic default value Your device e g a standard SIP telephone runs a SIP registration to tell the system its dynamic IP address e Static The system accepts an incoming call from a statically configured SIP client without this client needing to have been registered beforehand if the IP address of the cli ent matches the IP address entered under SIP Client IP Ad dress This mode is used by for example the Microsoft Of fice Communications Server and other unified xommunica Gigaset Communications GmbH 6 Terminals Field Descript
346. or analogue telephone The keypad function allows control of service or performance features in your operator s network by entering character and numerical sequences S Note You can only use the keypad performance feature if it is supported by your network operator and has been requested for your ISDN connection If you have set up an automatic outside line for an internal subscriber the keypad functions cannot be directly used First disable the Automatic Outside Line or dial the star key then the code for manual outside line e g 0 followed by keypad dialling beginning with the star or hash key Keypad functions can only operate from terminals that have been assigned an external multiple subscriber number MSN in configuration and possess a keypad authorisation Your network operator s performance features are always set up for the number MSN sent by your terminal The menu Advanced Settings consists of the following fields Fields in the Advanced Settings menu Field Description Receive System Inter Select whether simplex operation calls to the system telephone com Call shall be allowed for this authorisation class The function is activated by selecting Enabled The function is enabled by default Receive Announce Select whether this authorisation class may receive announce ment Calls ments The function is activated by selecting Enabled The function is enabled by default Receive MWI Informa Select whet
347. or disable the corresponding entry 15 9 1 1 Edit or New You configure the hotspot networks in the Local Services gt HotSpot Gateway gt HotSpot Gateway gt menu Choose the New button to set up additional Hotspot networks The Local Services gt HotSpot Gateway gt HotSpot Gateway gt menu consists of the following fields Fields in the menu Basic Parameters Field Description Interface Choose the interface to which the Hotspot LAN or WLAN is connected When operating over LAN enter the Ethernet inter face here e g en1 0 If operating over WLAN the WLAN in terface to which the access point is connected must be selec ted il Caution For security reasons you cannot configure your device over an interface that is configured for the Hotspot Therefore take care when selecting the interface you want to use for the Hotspot If you select the interface over which the current configuration session is running the current con nection will be lost You must then log in again over a reachable interface that is not configured for the Hotspot to configure your device Domain at the HotSpot Enter the domain name that you used when setting up the Hot Server Spot server for this customer The domain name is required so that the Hotspot server can distinguish between the different clients customers Walled Garden Enable this function if you want to define a limited and free area of websites intranet The funct
348. or holidays select the option Individual Switching Points Only for Use settings from Individual Enter the desired switching times For this under Time select the desired switching points to which switching shall occur from any divergent active switching option in the desired switching options selected under Action Depending on the application the following switching options are available e Team Signalling Call option 1 to call option 4 e Doorcom Signalling Door Intercom call option 1 and door intercom call option 2 Night Mode Night operation and night operation off e Class of Service Authorisation class by default and au thorisation class optional e Rerouting for internal external Number Redirect option 1 to redirect option 4 8 1 2 Public Holiday In the Applications gt Calendar gt Public Holiday menu you can enter holidays or any special days for which divergent settings should be made via the calendar The holiday entries are sorted by date 8 1 2 1 Edit or New Choose the ray icon to edit existing entries Select the New button to create new entries The menu Applications gt Calendar gt Public Holiday gt New consists of the following fields Fields in the Basic Settings menu Gigaset Communications GmbH 8 Applications Field Description Description Enter a description for a holiday Date DD MM Enter the date with day and month in two digit form Incorrect entries e g 31 02 are accepted
349. or this XAuth profile Role Select the role of the gateway for XAuth authentication Possible values 13 VPN Gigaset Communications GmbH Field Description e Server default value The gateway requires a proof of au thorisation e Client The gateway provides proof of authorisation Mode Only for Role Server Select how authentication is carried out Possible values e RADIUS default value Authentication is carried out via a Radius server It is configured in the System Management gt Remote Authentication gt RADIUS menu and selected in the RADIUS Server Group ID field e Local Authentication is carried out via a local list Name Only for Role Client Enter the authentication name of the client Password Only for Role Client Enter the authentication password RADIUS Server Group Only for Role Server ID Select the desired list in System Management gt Remote Au thentication gt RADIUS configured RADIUS group Users Only for Role Server and Mode Local If your gateway is configured as an XAuth server the clients can be authenticated via a locally configured user list Define the members of the user group of this XAUTH profile here by entering the authentication name of the client Name and the authentication password Password Add new members with Add 13 1 5 IP Pools In the IP Pools menu a list of all IP pools for your configured IPSec connections is dis played Gigaset Communication
350. ort 178 SMTP User Name 178 SNMP 24 28 386 SNMP Version 28 SNMP Listen UDP Port 28 SNMP Read Community 12 SNMP Trap Broadcasting 386 SNMP Trap Community 386 SNMP Trap Hosts 387 SNMP Trap Options 386 SNMP Trap UDP Port 386 SNMP Write Community 12 Software amp Configuration 369 Source 304 Source Interface 189 229 Source Location 340 Source Port 189 196 258 Source Port Range 196 201 214 362 Gigaset Communications GmbH Source Location 370 Source File Name 370 Source IP Address 336 340 351 354 Source IP Address Netmask 189 196 201 214 258 362 Source Port Range 311 Specific Ports 297 Specify bandwidth 306 Speed Dial 20 Speed Dial Number 153 SSH 24 25 SSH Port 25 SSH service active 25 Standard 84 Start Mode 258 Start Time 339 State Province 46 Static Hosts 319 Statistics 322 393 Status 2 56 57 59 112 163 169 171 176 336 377 388 391 392 393 394 Status Information 388 Status of Mail Box Owner 175 Status Update Status 375 Stop Time 339 STUN server 64 Subject 383 Subject Name 340 Substitution of Incoming Number Prefix 65 Substitution of International Prefix with 65 Subsystem 390 Successful Trials 351 Successfully Answered Queries 322 Summary 46 Surveillance 350 Switch signalling 166 169 Switch Port 52 Switch call signalling 106 149 161 Switch call signalling 389 Switch signalling variants manually Index 96 Switch
351. ort Enter the number of the port to be used for the connection to the server The default value is 5060 A 5 digit sequence is possible Transport Protocol Select the transport protocol for the connection Possible values e UDP default value SETCE 4 VoIP Gigaset Communications GmbH Fields in the STUN menu Field Description STUN server Enter the name or the IP address of the STUN server STUN Simple Traversal of User Datagram Protocol UDP Through Network Address Translators NATs A STUN server is required to allow VoIP devices access to the internet behind an active NAT This determines the current public IP address for the connection which is used for precise remote addressing Maximum number of characters 32 Port STUN server Enter the number of the port to be used for the connection to the STUN server The default value is 3478 A 5 digit sequence is possible Fields in the Timer menu Field Description Registration Timer Enter the time in seconds within which the SIP client must re register to prevent the connection from disconnecting automat ically The default value is 60 The menu Advanced Settings consists of the following fields Fields in the Advanced Settings menu Field Description Proxy Enter the DNS name or IP address of the SIP server A 26 digit alpha numeric sequence is possible Proxy Port Enter the number of the port to be used for the connection to the proxy The default val
352. orward to Select the forwarding destination requests to the name defined in Host or Domain Possible values e Interface default value The request is forwarded to the defined Interface DNS Server The request is forwarded to the defined DNS Server Interface Only for Forward to Interface Select the interface via which the requests for the defined Do main are to be received and forwarded to the DNS server DNS Server Only for Forward to DNS Server 15 Local Services Gigaset Communications GmbH Field Description Enter the IP address of the primary and secondary DNS serv er 15 1 5 Cache In the Local Services gt DNS gt Cache menu a list of all available cache entries is dis played You can select individual entries using the checkbox in the corresponding line or select them all using the Select all button A dynamic entry can be converted to a static entry by marking the entry and confirming with Make static This corresponding entry disappears from the list and is displayed in the list in the Static Hosts menu The TTL is transferred 15 1 6 Statistics In the Local Services gt DNS gt Statistics menu the following statistical values are dis played Fields in the DNS Statistics menu Field Description Received DNS Packets Shows the number of received DNS packets addressed direct to your device including the response packets for forwarded requests Invalid DNS Packets Shows the number of i
353. ot enabled an authentication is performed by default For this every SIP client user sends its current posi tion to a registrar server This information on the user and his current address is saved by the registrar on a server queried by other proxies to locate the user T 38 FAX support Select whether faxes shall be transmitted with T 38 The function is enabled with Enabled The function is enabled by default If the function is disabled faxes are transmitted with G 711 Substitution of Incom For incoming calls if the call number should be forwarded in ing Number Prefix the system in modified form in the first input field enter the se quence of the incoming number to be replaced by the number Gigaset Communications GmbH 4 VoIP Field Description sequence entered in the second input field 4 1 2 Locations In the VoIP gt Settings gt Locations menu you configure the locations of the VoIP sub scribers who have been configured on your system and define the bandwidth manage ment for the VoIP traffic Individual locations can be set up for using the bandwidth management A location is identified from its fixed IP address or DynDNS address or from the interface to which the device is connected The available VolP bandwidth up and downstream can then be set up for each location Fields in the Registration behavior for VolP subscribers without assigned loca tion menu Field Description Default Behavior Specify how the
354. ower level menus may need to be specifically released e Allow all The menu and all its lower level menus are re leased You can select Allow and Allow all in the corresponding row to assign elements to the current access profile Elements that are assigned to the current access profile are flagged with the icon indicates a menu that is blocked but which has at least one re leased sub menu 2 7 2 Users The menu System Management gt Configuration Access gt Users displays a list of all the users that have been configured You can delete existing entries with the icon mig You can click the button A to display the details of the configured user You can see which fields and menus are assigned to the user The icon means that Read only is permitted If a row is flagged with the icon the informa tion is released for reading and writing The icon indicates blocked entries 2 7 2 1 Edit or New Choose the E icon to edit existing entries Choose the New button to enter additional users The menu System Management gt Configuration Access gt Users gt New consists of the following fields Fields in the menu Basic Settings Field Description User Enter a unique name for the user Gigaset Communications GmbH 2 System Management Field Description Password Enter a password for the user User must change The administrator can use the option User must change password password to specify that the user must select their o
355. owing switching options are available e Team Signalling Call option 1 to call option 4 e Doorcom Signalling Door Intercom call option 1 and door intercom call option 2 e Night Mode Night operation on and night operation off e Class of Service Authorisation class by default and au thorisation class optional e Rerouting for internal external Number Redirect option 1 to redirect option 4 Use settings from Only if settings have already been performed for a weekday Select from which weekday the settings should be imported If you require specific settings for this day select the option Individual 8 1 1 3 Exception In the Exception area select whether holidays shall be taken into account and if so how The menu Applications gt Calendar gt Calendar gt Exception consists of the following fields Fields in the Settings holidays menu Field Description Consider public holi Select whether appointments entered in the days Applications gt Calendar gt Public Holiday menu shall also be considered in this calendar The function is activated by selecting Enabled The function is disabled by default Use settings from Only if Consider public holidays is enabled 8 Applications Gigaset Communications GmbH Field Description Select from which weekday the settings for holidays should be imported Configure weekdays in menu Applications gt Calen dar gt Calendar gt Mo Su If you require specific settings f
356. ownload area at www gigasetpro com and from there import them to your device Update system software You can launch an update of the system software the ADSL logic and the BOOTmonitor Export configuration The configuration file Current File Name in Flash is transferred to your local host If you click the Go button a dialog box is displayed in which you can select the storage location on your PC and enter the de sired file name Export configuration with state information The active configuration from the RAM is transferred to your local host If you click the Go button a dialog box is dis played in which you can select the storage location on your PC and enter the desired file name Restore backup Only if under Save configuration with the setting Save configuration and back up previ Gigaset Communications GmbH 16 Maintenance Field Description ous boot configuration the current configuration was saved as boot configuration and the previous boot configura tion was also archived You can load back the archived boot configuration e Copy configuration The configuration file in the Source File Name field is saved asDestination File Name e Rename configuration The configuration file in the Se lect file field is renamed to New File Name e Delete configuration The configuration in the Select file field is deleted e Delete software firmware The file in the Select file field is deleted Configuration Encryp
357. password is transferred encrypted e PAP CHAP Primarily run CHAP otherwise PAP e MS CHAPv1 Only run MS CHAP version 1 PPP Microsoft Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol e PAP CHAP MS CHAP Give priority to CHAP if refused use the authentication protocol requested by the PPTP partner MSCHAP version 1 or 2 possible e MS CHAPv2 default value Run MS CHAP version 2 only e None Some providers use no authentication In this case select this option Encryption If necessary select the type of encryption that should be used for data traffic to the connection partner If Encryption is set the remote terminal must also support it otherwise a connec tion cannot be set up Gigaset Communications GmbH 13 VPN Field Description Possible values e None MPP encryption is not used e Enabled default value MPP encryption V2 with 128 bit is used to RFC 3078 e Windows compatible MPP encryption V2 with 128 bit is used as compatible with Microsoft and Cisco Compression If necessary select the type of encryption that should be used for data traffic to the connection partner If encryption is set the remote terminal must also support it otherwise a connection cannot be set up Possible values e None default value Encryption is not used e STAC MSTS TAC e MPPC Microsoft Point to Point Compression LCP Alive Check Select whether the availability of the remote terminal is to be checked by sen
358. patibility when restoring the configuration on the gateway in various system software versions This is a CSV format which can be read and modified easily In addition you can view the corres ponding file clearly using Microsoft Excel for example The administrator can store encryp ted backup files for the configuration When the configuration is sent by e mail e g for support purposes confidential configuration data can be protected fully if required You can save or import files with the actions Export configuration Export configuration with status information and Load configuration If you want to save a configuration file with the action Export configuration or Export configuration with status information you can choose whether the configuration file is saved encrypted or without encryption fl Caution If you have saved a configuration file in an old format via the SNMP shell with the put command there is no guarantee that it can be reloaded to the device As a result the old format is no longer recommended The Maintenance gt Software amp Configuration gt Options menu consists of the following fields Fields in the Currently Installed Software menu Field Description BOSS Shows the current software version loaded on your device Shows the current system logic loaded on your device System Logic ADSL Logic Shows the current version of the ADSL logic loaded on your device Fields in the Software and Configura
359. plays a list of all clients that received an IP address from your device via DHCP You can allocate an IP address from a defined IP address pool to specific MAC ad dresses You can do this by selecting the Static Binding option in the list to convert a list entry as a fixed binding or you manually create a fixed IP MAC binding by configuring this in the New sub menu 15 Local Services Gigaset Communications GmbH C Note You can only create new static IP MAC bindings if IP address ranges were configured in Local Services gt DHCP Server gt DHCP Pool 15 4 3 1 New Choose the New button to set up new IP MAC bindings The menu Local Services gt DHCP Server gt IP MAC Binding gt New consists of the fol lowing fields Fields in the Basic Parameters menu Field Description Description Enter the name of the host to which the MAC Address the IP Address is to be bound A character string of up to 256 characters is possible IP Address Enter the IP address to be assigned to the MAC address spe cified in MAC Address is to be assigned MAC Address Enter the MAC address to which the IP address specified in IP Address is to be assigned 15 4 4 DHCP Relay Settings If your device for the local network does not distribute any IP addresses to the clients by DHCP it can still forward the DHCP requests on behalf of the local network to a remote DHCP server The DHCP server then assigns the your device an IP address from its pool
360. ption Possible values e Ignore default value The type of service is ignored e DSCP Binary Value Differentiated Services Code Point according to RFC 3260 is used to signal the priority of IP packets indicated in binary format 6 bit DSCP Decimal Value Differentiated Services Code Point according to RFC 3260 is used to signal the priority of IP packets indicated in decimal format DSCP Hexadecimal Value Differentiated Services Code Point according to RFC 3260 is used to signal the priority of IP packets indicated in hexadecimal format e TOS Binary Value The TOS value is specified in binary format e g 00111111 e TOS Decimal Value The TOS value is specified in decim al format e g 63 e TOS Hexadecimal Value The TOS value is specified in hexadecimal format e g 3F COS Filter 802 1p Layer 2 Enter the service class of the IP packets Class of Service CoS Possible values are whole numbers between 0 and 7 The default value is Ignore 10 4 2 Rule Chains Rules for IP filters are configured in the Rule Chains menu These can be created separ ately or incorporated in rule chains In the Networking gt Access Rules gt Rule Chains menu all created filter rules are listed 10 4 2 1 Edit or New Choose the E icon to edit existing entries To configure access lists select the New but ton The Networking gt Access Rules gt Rule Chains gt New menu consists of the following 10 Networ
361. quality is used if possible e Low Bandwidth The codecs are sorted by required band width If possible the codec with the lowest bandwidth re quirement is used e High Bandwidth The codecs are sorted by required band width If possible the codec with the highest bandwidth re quirement is used Only for Codec Proposal Sequence not default ISDN codec with US characteristic G 711 uLaw passes audio signals in the range of 300 3500 Hz and samples them at the rate of 8 000 samples per second At 64 kbit s bit rate the mean opinion score MOS is 4 4 This au dio codec uses plaw quantization Only for Codec Proposal Sequence not default ISDN codec with EU characteristic G 711 aLaw passes audio signals in the range of 300 3400 Hz and samples them at the rate of 8 000 samples per second At 64 kbit s bit rate the mean opinion score MOS is 4 4 This au Gigaset Communications GmbH 4 VoIP Field Description dio codec uses alaw quantization G 722 Only for Codec Proposal Sequence not default G 722 passes audio signals in the range of 50 7000 Hz and samples them at the rate of 16 000 samples per second At 64 kbit s bit rate the mean opinion score MOS is 4 5 G 729 Only for Codec Proposal Sequence not default G 729 passes audio signals in the range of 300 2400 Hz and samples them at the rate of 8 000 samples per second At 8 kbit s bit rate the mean opinion score MOS is 3 9 G 726 16 kbit s Only for Codec Proposal Se
362. quence not default G 726 16 kbit s passes audio signals in the range of 200 3400 Hz and samples them at the rate of 8 000 samples per second At 16 kbit s bit rate the mean opinion score MOS is 3 7 G 726 24 kbit s Only for Codec Proposal Sequence not default G 726 24 kbit s passes audio signals in the range of 200 3400 Hz and samples them at the rate of 8 000 samples per second At 24 kbit s bit rate the mean opinion score MOS is 3 8 G 726 32 kbit s Only for Codec Proposal Sequence not default G 726 32 kbit s passes audio signals in the range of 200 3400 Hz and samples them at the rate of 8 000 samples per second At 32 kbit s bit rate the mean opinion score MOS is 3 9 G 726 40 kbit s Only for Codec Proposal Sequence not default G 726 40 kbit s passes audio signals in the range of 200 3400 Hz and samples them at the rate of 8 000 samples per second At 40 kbit s bit rate the mean opinion score MOS is 4 2 DTMF Only for Codec Proposal Sequence not default 4 VoIP Gigaset Communications GmbH Field Description Select whether the DTMF Outband codec is to be used First the system attempts to use RFC 2833 If the remote terminal does not use this standard SIP Info is used The function is activated by selecting Enabled The function is enabled by default G 726 Codec settings Only for Codec Proposal Sequence not default Select the coding method for the G 726 codec Possible values Of JOG O RCS
363. quirements high level of security against attacks and general speed The partner s AES key length is used here If this has also selected the parameter AES akey length of 128 bits is used e AES 128 Rijndael has been nominated as AES due to its 13 VPN Gigaset Communications GmbH Field Description fast key setup low memory requirements high level of se curity against attacks and general speed Here it is used with a key length of 128 bits e AES 192 Rijndael has been nominated as AES due to its fast key setup low memory requirements high level of se curity against attacks and general speed Here it is used with a key length of 192 bits e AES 256 Rijndael has been nominated as AES due to its fast key setup low memory requirements high level of se curity against attacks and general speed Here it is used with a key length of 256 bits e Twofish Twofish was a final candidate for the AES Advanced Encryption Standard It is rated as just as secure as Rijndael AES but is slower e Blowfish Blowfish is a very secure and fast algorithm Twofish can be regarded as the successor to Blowfish e CAST CAST is also a very secure algorithm marginally slower than Blowfish but faster than 3DES DES DES is an older encryption algorithm which is rated as weak due to its small effective length of 56 bits Hash algorithms Authentication e MD5 default value MD5 Message Digest 5 is an older hash algorith
364. r Options menu Field Description Busy on busy Select whether the performance feature Busy on Busy shall be enabled for this user If a subscriber for whom multiple telephone numbers have been configured makes a call you can decide whether addi tional calls for this user shall be signalled If Busy on Busy is set for this user other callers get an Engaged signal if the user is calling on one of her numbers The function is activated by selecting Enabled The function is disabled by default 5 Numbering Gigaset Communications GmbH 5 2 1 2 Numbers In the menu Numbering gt User Settings gt Users gt Numbers internal numbers which are later assigned to the terminals can be entered Depending on the type one or more num bers can be assigned per terminal The Numbering gt User Settings gt Users gt Numbers menu consists of the following fields Fields in the Internal Numbers menu Field Description Internal Numbers Enter the internal numbers for the user and the description to be shown in the system telephone display Displayed De scription In addition select whether this internal number shall be displayed in the System Phonebook and whether the LED next to the corresponding function key Busy Lamp Field should light up The functions are activated by default Add new Internal Numbers with Add 5 2 1 3 Outgoing Signalisation In the Numbering gt User Settings gt Users gt Outgoing Signalisation menu s
365. r and rotating team calls there is the option for all team subscribers to be simultaneously called after a defined period 1 99 The Numbering gt Groups amp Teams gt Teams gt Variant menu consists of the following fields Fields in the Basic Settings menu Field Description Assignment You can assign several internal numbers to each team or an external number to each Define whether calls for a team shall be signalled to internal or external subscribers Possible values e External The entered external number is called e Internal default value The subscribers assigned to the selected number are called according to the defined sig nalling Internal Assignment Only if Assignment Internal Select the internal team subscribers With Add you add more internal numbers External Assignment Only if Assignment External Enter the number of the external subscriber Route and Charge As Only if Assignment External signment Charges for the call and assignment of an external connection occur via the selected internal subscriber Automatic call acceptance in the team Gigaset Communications GmbH 5 Numbering You want a caller to be accepted already at call signalling and not to hear the ringing tone That s no problem if you re using automatic call acceptance for team calls In this case the caller is automatically accepted by the system and hears an announcement or system music on hold During this time the c
366. r device as a syslog server so that defined system messages can be sent to suitable hosts in the LAN In this menu you define which messages are sent to which hosts and with which condi tions 17 External Reporting Gigaset Communications GmbH A list of all configured system log servers displayed in the External Reporting gt Syslog gt Syslog Servers menu 17 1 1 1 New Select the New button to set up additional syslog servers The menu External Reporting gt Syslog gt Syslog Servers gt New consists of the following fields Fields in the Basic Parameters menu Field Description IP Address Enter the IP address of the host to which syslog messages are passed Level Select the priority of the syslog messages that are to be sent to the host Possible values e Emergency highest priority e Alert O Critice SPE TAON e Warning e Notice e Information default value Debug lowest priority Syslog messages are only sent to the host if they have a high er or identical priority to that indicated i e at syslog level De bug all messages generated are forwarded to the host Facility Enter the syslog facility on the host This is only required if the Log Host is a Unix computer Possible values loca10 7 The default value is 1ocal0 Gigaset Communications GmbH 17 External Reporting Field Description Timestamp Select the format of the time stamp in the syslog Possible values e None default value
367. r routes to be maintained or routes with dif ferent metrics i e of differing priority to be specified However if the DHCP server sends static routes the settings configured here are not copied to the routing e Default Route Template per DHCP The routing in formation is taken entirely from the DHCP server Only ad vanced parameters can be additionally configured This route remains unchanged by other routes created for this interface and is copied to the routing table in parallel with them e Host Route Template per DHCP The settings received by DHCP are supplemented by routing information about a particular host e Network Route Template per DHCP The settings re ceived by DHCP are supplemented by routing information about a particular network 10 Networking Gigaset Communications GmbH Field Description Eg Note When the DHCP lease expires or when the device is re started the routes that consist from the combination of DHCP settings and those made here are initially deleted once more from the active routing If the DHCP is reconfigured they are re generated and re activated Interface Select the interface to be used for this route Route Class Select the type of Route Class Possible values e Standard Defines a route with the default parameters e Extended Select whether the route is to be defined with ex tended parameters If the function is active a route is created with extended routing parameters such
368. r their tasks Parts of the GUI that are not required are blocked 2 7 1 Access Profiles The menu System Management gt Configuration Access gt Access Profiles displays a list of all the access profiles that have been configured You can delete existing entries with the icon ia By default more than one access profile has already been created for the devices hybird 120 You can reset these to the default settings using the icon Fa and the icon fa 2 7 1 1 Edit or New Choose the E icon to edit existing entries Choose the New button to create additional access profiles To create an access profile you can use all the entries in the navigation bar of the GUI plus Save configuration and Switch to SNMP Browser You can create a maximum of 29 access profiles The menu System Management gt Configuration Access gt Access Profiles gt New con sists of the following fields Fields in the menu Basic Settings Field Description Description Enter a unique name for the access profile Level No The system automatically assigns a sequential number to the access profile This cannot be edited Fields in the menu Buttons Field Description Save configuration If you activate the button Save configuration the user is per mitted to save configurations C Note Note that the passwords in the saved file can be viewed in clear text Gigaset Communications GmbH 2 System Management Field Description Enable or disable Save co
369. rang m a a a A A to 335 15 6 1 Migger ace A a ied lee See ES de nee e a 335 15 6 2 ACUSA O Sees Dyas ty ey ee ae Oe Sah ay De 340 15 6 3 Options 2 2 ica we Bog oe hoe Oe ee Bae Bee st e AE 350 15 7 Surveillance eea te so at E ee Rl eG 350 15 7 1 HOSES 8 he eee teo de GO pes Bee DP Gas at hae ee BP aes 351 15 7 2 Interfaces ici Ae he ae Geek AO A Res 353 15 7 3 Ping Generator a o 354 15 8 UPAR i cc o ee aw A ge o 355 15 8 1 Interfaces a o aad adia a paad A ade 355 15 8 2 General 22 a en a aa a jer ea ag E E hese aA 356 15 9 HotSpot Gateway oo a a 357 15 9 1 HotSpot Gateway a ooo a a 358 15 9 2 Options 2 Grd a ea n rh enn de wich ts ah Bee wha 362 15 10 Wake On LAN 2 2 2 a 362 15 10 1 Wake On LAN Filter 2 ee ee 362 viii hybird 120 Gigaset Edition 15 10 2 WOL RUIGS es costa a Saar Sa Se Gea ica te at Ge a a a Ge 365 15 10 3 Interface Assignment 2 2 en 367 Chapter 16 Maintenance o o 0000402 ee 368 16 1 DIAgnostiCS c aa aa e at A 2 hee ae eos 368 16 1 1 Ping Test 2 o aa hte ER er e do Gah i Dae nerd 368 16 1 2 DNS Test i ion 2 4 bk a ee ee ee ws 368 16 1 3 Traceroute Test soa 00 054 ee ds 368 16 2 Software amp Configuration 2 369 16 2 1 OPHOS 3 2 458 A Gtk a 369 16 3 PhoneUPpddte i soo a a a a a a 374 16 3 1 Gigaset Phones son ese aoa soaa o a a 375 16 3 2 Firmware Files o s coi ae i a a a a a a 376 16 3 3
370. ration Static Enter the network address of the Drop In network Netmask Only for Network Configuration Static Enter the corresponding netmask Local IP Address Only for Network Configuration Static Enter the local IP address This IP address must be identical for all the Ethernet ports in a network DHCP Client on Inter Only for Network Configuration DHCP face Here you can select an Ethernet interface on your router which is to act as the DHCP client You need this setting for example if your provider s router is being used as the DHCP server You can choose from the interfaces available to your device however the interface must be a member of the drop in group ARP Lifetime Determines the time period for which the ARP entries will be held in the cache The default value is 3600 seconds DNS assignment via The gateway can modify DHCP packets which pass through DHCP the drop in group and identify itself as an available DNS server Possible values e Unchanged default value e Own IP Address Exclude from NAT Here you can take data traffic from NAT DMZ Use this function to for example ensure that certain web serv Field Description ers in a DMZ can be accessed The function is enabled with Enabled The function is disabled by default Interface Selection Select all the ports which are to be included in the Drop In group in the network Add new entries with Add hybird 120 Gigase
371. rcom Units You can connect a door intercom as an intercom adapter to an analogue connection of your system If a door intercom adapter is connected to your system you can speak with a visitor at the door from every authorised telephone You can assign particular telephones to each ring Gigaset Communications GmbH 8 Applications button These phones then ring if the ring button is pressed On analogue telephones the signal on the telephone matches the intercom call In place of the internal telephones an external telephone can also be configured as the call destination for the ring button Your door intercom can have up to 4 ring buttons The door opener can be pressed during an intercom call It is not possible activate the door opener if an intercom call is not taking place C Note All functions of the door intercom intercom adapter are controlled via the code numbers indicated in the intercom user s manual The system does not support the intercom with specific codes 8 7 1 Doorcom Units In the Applications gt Doorcom Units gt Doorcom Units menu select the internal ana logue connection FXS to which an intercom adapter shall be connected Then dial the internal number for the connection and optionally the codes for call acceptance 8 7 1 1 Edit or New Choose the H icon to edit existing entries Select the New button to create new entries The menu Applications gt Doorcom Units gt Doorcom Units gt New consists of th
372. red in the list Example CN VPNServer DC mydomain DC com c DE Gigaset Communications GmbH 2 System Management Field Description Common Name Only for Custom disabled Enter the name according to CA E mail Only for Custom disabled Enter the e mail address according to CA Organizational Unit Only for Custom disabled Enter the organisational unit according to CA Organization Only for Custom disabled Enter the organisation according to CA Locality Only for Custom disabled Enter the location according to CA State Province Only for Custom disabled Enter the state province according to CA Country Only for Custom disabled Enter the country according to CA The menu Advanced Settings consists of the following fields Fields in the Subject Alternative Names menu Field Description 1 2 3 For each entry define the type of name and enter additional subject names Possible values None default value No additional name is entered e TP An IP address is entered DNS A DNS name is entered e E mail An e mail address is entered e URI A uniform resource identifier is entered 2 System Management Gigaset Communications GmbH Field Description e DN A distinguished name DN name is entered e RID A registered identity RID is entered Fields in the Options menu Field Description Autosave Mode Select whether your device automatically stores the various
373. response packets within the existing connection are allowed In the NAT Configuration gt Specify original traffic menu you can configure for which data traffic NAT is to be used Fields in the menu Specify original traffic Field Description Service Action Protocol Not for Type of traffic outgoing Source NAT and NAT method full cone restricted cone Or port restricted cone Select one of the preconfigured services Possible values e User defined default value e lt service name gt Only for Type of traffic excluding Without NAT Select which data packets are to be excluded by NAT Possible values e off default value All the data packets that match the fol lowing parameters that are to be configured protocol source IP address network mask destination IP address netmask etc are excluded by NAT e Do not exclude All the data packets that do not match the following parameters that are to be configured protocol source IP address network mask destination IP address netmask etc are excluded by NAT Only for certain services Not for Type of traffic outgoing Source NAT and NAT method full cone restricted cone Or port restricted cone In this case UDP is automatically defined Field Description Select a protocol According to the selected Service different protocols are available Possible values e Any default value e AH e Chaos O EMI O TNCIM2
374. ridge Group When selecting New Bridge Group a new bridge group is automatically created after you click the OK button Configuration Inter Select the interface via which the configuration is to be carried face out Possible values e Select one default value Ex works setting The right configuration interface must be selected from the other op tions e Ignore No interface is defined as configuration interface e lt Interface name gt Select the interface to be used for configuration If this interface is in a bridge group it is as signed the group s IP address when it is taken out of the group 2 System Management Gigaset Communications GmbH 2 4 1 1 Add Choose the Add button to edit the mode of PPP interfaces The System Management gt Interface Mode Bridge Groups gt Interfaces gt Add menu consists of the following fields Fields in the Interfaces menu Field Description Interface Select the interface whose status should be changed 2 5 Administrative Access In this menu you can configure the administrative access to the device 2 5 1 Access In the System Management gt Administrative Access gt Access menu a list of all IP capable interfaces is displayed For an Ethernet interface you can select the access parameters Telnet SSH HTTP HT TPS Ping SNMP and for the ISDN interfaces ISDN Login The menu Advanced Settings consists of the following fields Fields in the menu Advanced Settings Fi
375. roup together the interfaces of your device This makes it easier to configure firewall rules 14 2 1 1 New Choose the New button to set up new interface groups The menu Firewall gt Interfaces gt Groups gt New consists of the following fields Fields in the Basic Parameters menu Field Description Description Enter the desired description of the interface group Members Select the members of the group from the available interfaces To do this activate the field in the Selection column 14 3 Addresses 14 3 1 Address List A list of all configured addresses is displayed in the Firewall gt Addresses gt Address List menu 14 3 1 1 New Choose the New button to create additional addresses hybird 120 Gigaset Edition 14 Firewall Gigaset Communications GmbH The menu Firewall gt Addresses gt Address List gt New consists of the following fields Fields in the Basic Parameters menu Field Description Description Enter the desired description of the address Address Type Select the type of address you want to specify Possible values e Address Subnet default value Enter an IP address with subnet mask e Address Range Enter an IP address range with a start and end address Address Subnet Only for Address Type Address Subnet Enter the IP address of the host or a network address and the related netmask The default value is 0 0 0 0 Address Range Only for Address Type Address Range
376. rrent connection is ended e Ignore the call waiting connection Call waiting automatically ends after 30 seconds and the caller hears a busy signal Analogue terminals The call waiting option can be individually configured for every subscriber Allowing call waiting or not can be set via configuration or via a code number in operations Analogue terminals get the system call waiting tone The number of the call waiting party can be shown in the analogue telephone display if it features the corresponding perform ance feature CLIP off Hook CLIP off Hook is disabled for analogue terminals in the ba sic setting but may be enabled via configuration Call waiting can only occur simultaneously in the system for a limited number of analogue connections If call waiting is already operating with this maximum number of call waiting tones on analogue connections additional call waiting callers will get the busy tone If you hear the call waiting tone during a call you can take that call and transfer the ongo ing call An operating procedure allows transfer of the ongoing call and acceptance of the call waiting The following conditions apply here e Every dialled number is accepted by the system e After the operation procedure the subscriber and the call waiting subscriber are imme diately connected to each other no acknowledge tones 5 Numbering Gigaset Communications GmbH Transfer to one s own number is possible then call waitin
377. s Possible values for Condition Settings in Condition Type Weekday Monday default value Sunday Possible values for Condition Settings in Condition Type 15 Local Services Gigaset Communications GmbH Field Description Periods e Daily The initiator becomes active daily default value e Monday Friday The initiator becomes active daily from Monday to Friday e Monday Saturday The initiator becomes active daily from Monday to Saturday e Saturday Sunday The initiator becomes active on Sat urdays and Sundays Possible values for Condition Settings in Condition Type Day of Month TARSAN Start Time Enter the time from which the initiator is to be activated Activa tion is carried on the next scheduling interval the default value of this interval is 55 seconds Stop Time Enter the time from which the initiator is to be deactivated De activation is carried on the next scheduling interval If you do not enter a Stop Time or set a Stop Time Start Time the initiator is activated and deactivated after 10 seconds 15 6 2 Actions In the Local Services gt Scheduling gt Actions menu is displayed a list of all operations to be initiated by events or event chains configured in Local Services gt Scheduling gt Trig ger 15 6 2 1 New Choose the New button to configure additional operations The menu Local Services gt Scheduling gt Actions gt New consists of the following fields Fields
378. s The language can be changed on the start login page at any time The menu Advanced Settings consists of the following fields Fields in the menu Advanced Settings Gigaset Communications GmbH 15 Local Services Field Description Ticket Type Select the ticket type Possible values e Voucher Only the user name must be entered Define a de fault password in the input field e Username Password default value User name and pass word must be entered Allowed HotSpot Cli ent Here you can define which type of users can log in to the Hot spot Possible values e A11 All clients are approved e DHCP Client Prevents users who have not received an IP address from DHCP from logging in Login Frameset Enable or disable the login window The login window on the HTML homepage consists of two frames When the function is enabled the login form displays on the left hand side When the function is disabled only the website with informa tion advertising and or links to freely accessible websites is displayed The function is enabled by default Pop Up window for status indication Specify whether the device uses pop up windows to display the status The function is enabled by default Default Idle Timeout Enable or disable the Default Idle Timeout If a hotspot user does not trigger any data traffic for a configurable length of time they are logged out of the hotspot The function is enabled by
379. s 116 375 Gigaset Phones 116 Global Rerouting 9 9 Global Settings 316 Global Settings 4 Global CLIP no Screening Number 62 77 GRE 299 GRE Tunnels 299 GRE Window Adaption 297 GRE Window Size 297 Group Description 31 220 Group ID 351 Groups 105 309 310 313 H Hashing Algorithms 26 Hello Intervall 285 High Priority Class 203 Home Number 84 Host 321 Host for multiple locations 362 HostName 324 Hosts 351 HotSpot Gateway 358 HotSpot Gateway 357 395 HTTP 24 HTTPS 24 323 HTTPS Server 323 HTTPS TCP Port 323 IGMP 225 IGMP Proxy 227 IGMP State Limit 226 IGMP State Limit 227 IGMP Status 227 Ignore Certificate Request Payloads 281 IKE Phase 1 393 IKE Phase 1 SAs 391 Gigaset Communications GmbH Immediately 111 Import Export 154 Include certificates and keys 370 Incoming Distribution 112 Incoming ISDN Number 296 Incoming Phone Number 264 Index Variables 336 340 Info Message UUS1 170 Inhibited number 136 Int No 157 157 Interconnect external calls 6 Interface 24 24 126 127 157 157 165 169 184 186 192 192 195 206 219 226 250 306 318 321 324 329 340 353 356 359 367 395 395 Interface Action 353 Interface Mode 180 318 Interface Status 336 Interface Traffic Condition 336 Interface Description 23 Interface Assignment 219 367 Interface Connection Information Link 3 Interface Location 131 Interface is UPnP controlled 356
380. s GmbH 13 VPN If for an IPSec peer you have set IP Address Assignment IKE Config Mode Server you must define the IP pools here from which the IP addresses are assigned 13 1 5 1 Edit or New Choose the New button to set up new IP address pools Choose the Fay icon to edit exist ing entries The menu VPN gt IPSec gt IP Pools gt New consists of the following fields Fields in the menu Basic Parameters Field Description IP Pool Name Enter any description to uniquely identify the IP pool IP Address Range Enter the first first field and last second field IP address of the IP address pool DNS Server Primary Enter the IP address of the DNS server that is to be used preferably by clients who draw an address from this pool Secondary Optionally enter the IP address of an alternative DNS server 13 1 6 Options The menu VPN gt IPSec gt Options consists of the following fields Fields in the Global Options menu Field Description Enable IPSec Select whether you want to activate IPSec The function is enabled with Enabled The function is active as soon as an IPSec Peer is configured Delete complete IPSec If you click the icon delete the complete IPSec configura configuration tion of your device This cancels all settings made during the IPSec configuration Once the configuration is deleted you can start with a com 13 VPN Gigaset Communications GmbH Field Description pletely new IPSec configura
381. s can be assigned to individual performance features in two different ways Every user employing a voice application with this connection always hears the corres ponding voice announcement or music from the start A newly arrived user hears the voice announcement or music from the start The number of users who can simultan eously use such a voice application is limited to 28 Gigaset Communications GmbH 8 Applications Please note that externally played music or voice application music are free of third party copyrights GEMA free Files in other formats must be converted into the company specif ic Wave format before being saved in the system En Note Please note that Wave files must be available in the following format e Bit rate 128 kbps e Sampling size 16 bits Channels 1 mono e Sampling rate 8 kHz e Audio format PCM 8 3 1 Wave Files In the Applications gt Voice Applications gt Wave Files menu you can configure your announcement melody files and volume You also have the option to play back voicemail messages or download these to your PC To save a message click on the icon The download dialog then opens To listen to a message click on the g icon 8 3 1 1 Edit Choose the icon to edit existing entries Select 3 to change the entry MoH internal 1and MoH internal 2 are files specified in the system and can thus not be deleted The Applications gt Voice Applications gt Wave Files gt Edit menu consis
382. s disabled by default Only activate this option if you have Internet access with a flat rate charge Connection Idle Only if Always on is disabled Timeout Enter the idle time in seconds for static short hold The static short hold setting determines how many seconds should pass between sending the last traffic data packet and clearing the connection Possible values are 0 to 3600 seconds 0 deactivates the short hold The default value is 300 Example 10 for FTP transmission 20 for LAN to LAN trans mission 90 for Internet connections Fields in the IP Mode and Routes menu Field Description IP Address Mode Select whether your device is to be assigned a static IP ad dress or whether it should be assigned this dynamically Possible values e Get IP Address default value Your device is dynamic ally assigned an IP address Gigaset Communications GmbH 12 WAN Field Description e Static You enter a static IP address Default Route Select whether the route to this connection partner is to be defined as the default route The function is enabled with Enabled The function is enabled by default Create NAT Policy Specify whether Network Address Translation NAT is to be activated The function is enabled with Enabled The function is enabled by default Local IP Address Only if IP Address Mode Static Enter the static IP address of the connection partner Route Entries Only if IP Address Mode
383. s that the rules for the SIF are gen erally applied globally i e not restricted to one interface In principle the same filter criteria are applied to the data traffic as those used in NAT and IPAL e Source and destination address of the packet with an associated netmask e Service preconfigured e g Echo FTP HTTP e Protocol e Port number s To illustrate the differences in packet filtering a list of the individual security instances and their method of operation is given below NAT Gigaset Communications GmbH 14 Firewall One of the basic functions of NAT is the translation of the local IP addresses of your LAN into the global IP addresses you are assigned by your ISP and vice versa All connections initiated externally are first blocked i e every packet your device cannot assign to an ex isting connection is rejected This means that a connection can only be set up from inside to outside Without explicit permission NAT rejects every access from the WAN to the LAN IP Access Lists Here packets are allowed or rejected exclusively on the basis of the criteria listed above i e the state of the connection is not considered except for Services TCP SIF The SIF sorts out all packets that are not explicitly or implicitly allowed The result can be a deny in which case no error message is sent to the sender of the rejected packet or a reject where the sender is informed of the packet rejection The incomi
384. s to 9 LAN Gigaset Communications GmbH Field Description allocate their clients IP addresses dynamically If your provider has assigned you a MAC address enter this here DHCP Hostname Only for Address Mode DHCP Enter the host name requested by the provider The maximum length of the entry is 45 characters DHCP Broadcast Flag Only for Address Mode DHCP Choose whether or not the BROADCAST bit is set in the DH CP requests for your device Some DHCP servers that assign IP addresses by UNICAST do not respond to DHCP requests with the set BROADCAST bit In this case it is necessary to send DHCP requests in which this bit is not set In this case disable this option The function is activated by selecting Enabled The function is enabled by default Proxy ARP Select whether your device is to respond to ARP requests from its own LAN on behalf of defined remote terminals The function is activated by selecting Enabled The function is disabled by default TCP MSS Clamping Select whether your device is to apply MSS Clamping To pre vent IP packets fragmenting the MSS Maximum Segment Size is automatically decreased by the device to the value set here The function is activated by selecting Enabled The function is disabled by default Once enabled the default value 1350 is entered in the input field Gigaset Communications GmbH 9 LAN 9 2 VLAN By implementing VLAN segmentation in accordance with 802 1Q you
385. sages menu a list of all internally stored system messages is displayed Above the table you will find the configured vales for the Maximum Number of Syslog Entries and Maximum Message Level of Syslog Entries fields These values can be changed in the System Management gt Global Settings gt System menu Values in the System Messages list No Displays the serial number of the system message Date Displays the date of the record Time Displays the time of the record Level Displays the hierarchy level of the message Subsystem Displays which subsystem of the device generated the mes sage Message Displays the message text 18 3 IPSec Gigaset Communications GmbH 18 Monitoring 18 3 1 IPSec Tunnels A list of all configured IPSec tunnel providers is displayed in the Monitoring gt IPSec gt IPSec Tunnels menu Values in the IPSec Tunnels list Field Description Description Displays the name of the IPSec tunnel Remote IP Displays the IP address of the remote IPSec Peers Remote Networks Displays the currently negotiated subnets of the remote termin al Security Algorithm Displays the encryption algorithm of the IPSec tunnel Status Displays the operating status of the IPSec tunnel Action Enables you to change the status of the IPSec tunnel as dis played Deiails Opens a detailed statistics window You change the status of the IPSec tunnel by clicking the t button or the button in the Action column By click
386. scription Mail Exchanger MX Enter the full host name of a mail server to which e mails are to be forwarded if the host currently configured is not to receive mail Ask your provider about this forwarding service and make sure e mails can be received from the host entered as MX Wildcard Select whether forwarding of all subdomains of the Host Name is to be enabled for the current IP address of the Interface advanced name resolution The function is activated by selecting Enabled 15 Local Services Gigaset Communications GmbH Field Description The function is disabled by default 15 3 2 DynDNS Provider A list of all configured DynDNS providers is displayed in the Local Services gt DynDNS Client gt DynDNS Provider menu 15 3 2 1 New Choose the New button to set up new DynDNS providers The menu Local Services gt DynDNS Client gt DynDNS Provider gt New consists of the following fields Fields in the Basic Parameters menu Field Description Provider Name Enter a name for this entry Server Enter the host name or IP address of the server on which the provider s DynDNS service runs Update Path Enter the path on the provider s server that contains the script for managing the IP address of your device Ask your provider for the path to be used Port Enter the port at which your device is to reach your provider s server Ask your provider for the relevant port The default value is 80 Protocol Select o
387. se of Idle your device only responds to the ARP request the connection is not set up until someone actually wants to use the route e Up only Your device responds to an ARP request only if the status of the connection to the L2TP partner is Up active i e a connection already exists to the L2TP part ner DNS Negotiation Select whether your device receives IP addresses for Primary DNS Server und Secondary DNS Server and WINS Server Primary and Secondary from the L2TP partner or sends these to the L2TP partner The function is enabled with Enabled The function is enabled by default 13 2 3 Options The menu VPN gt L2TP gt Options consists of the following fields Gigaset Communications GmbH 13 VPN Fields in the Global Options menu Field Description UDP Destination Port Enter the port to be monitored by the LNS on incoming L2TP tunnel connections Available values are all whole numbers from 1 to 65535 the default value is 1701 as specified in RFC 2661 UDP Source Port Se Select whether the LNS should only use the monitored port lection UDP Destination Port as the local source port for the L2TP connection The function is enabled with Fixed The function is disabled by default 13 3 PPTP The Point to Point Tunnelling Protocol PPTP can be used to set up an encrypted PPTP tunnel to provide security for data traffic over an existing IP connection First a connection to an ISP Internet Service Provider
388. set Communications GmbH 8 Applications Values in the list Voice Mail Boxes Field Description Internal Number Displays the number of the individual subscriber for which the voicemail box is configured User Displays the name of the individual subscriber for which the voicemail box is configured Language Displays the language of the announcement text on the voice mail box Default means that the centrally set language defined for the entire voicemail system in the Applications gt Voice Mail System gt General menu is used Notification Indicates whether the subscriber is informed of missed calls Active Variant Indicates the current status of the voicemail box In the Of ficeor Out of Office License Allocation Indicates whether a licence is currently assigned to a voicemail box S Note The number of configured voicemail boxes may exceed the number of existing licences However you must make sure that the number of currently used voicemail boxes is covered by the number of licences 8 9 1 1 Edit or New Choose the FA icon to edit existing entries Select the New button to create new entries The menu Applications gt Voice Mail System gt Voice Mail Boxes gt New consists of the following fields Fields in the menu Basic Setup Field Description Internal Number Select the internal number of the subscriber for which you wish to set up a voicemail box You may choose among the num 8 Applications Gigaset
389. sible values Gigaset Communications GmbH 5 Numbering Field Description o FIIS gt e MOH Internal 1 e MOH Internal 2 e MoH Wave 1 to 8 The menu Advanced Settings consists of the following fields Fields in the Rerouting Functions menu Field Description Rerouting on no re Select whether and if so to which team an incoming call sponse should be redirected on no reply Possible values None lt Team gt Also enter the time after which the call should be redirected Further Rerouting Select whether and if so to which redirect option an incoming call shall be switched Possible values e off No other redirect options are used e Immediately The incoming call is immediately rerouted to the redirect function selected in Immediately e On Busy The incoming call is rerouted to the redirect func tion selected in On Busy Immediately Only if Further Rerouting Immediately Select the redirect function for immediate redirect Configure redirect functions in Applications gt Rerouting gt Rerouting Functions On Busy Only if Further Rerouting On Busy Select the redirect function for redirect on engaged Configure redirect functions in Applications gt Rerouting gt Rerouting Functions 5 Numbering Gigaset Communications GmbH Field Description Busy starting with Only if Further Rerouting On Busy Select from which number of subscribers the team is con sidered engaged 5 3 1 3 Log on Log
390. sible values are 0 to 65535 The default value is 443 Local Certificate Select a certificate that you want to use for the HTTPS connec tion Possible values e Internal default value Select this option if you want to use the certificate built into the device e lt Certificate name gt Under System Management gt Certificates gt Certificate List select entered certificate 15 Local Services Gigaset Communications GmbH 15 3 DynDNS Client The use of dynamic IP addresses has the disadvantage that a host in the network can no longer be found once its IP address has changed DynDNS ensures that your device can still be reached after a change to the IP address The following configuration steps are necessary e Registration of a host name at a DynDNS provider e Configuration of your device Registration The registration of a host name means that you define an individual user name for the DynDNS service e g dyn_client The service providers offer various domain names for this so that a unique host name results for your device e g dyn_client provider com The DynDNS provider relieves you of the task of answer ing all DNS requests concerning the host dyn_client provider com with the dynam ic IP address of your device To ensure that the provider always knows the current IP address of your device your device contacts the provider when setting up a new connection and propagates its present IP address 15 3 1 Dyn
391. sion number range comprises the direct dial in numbers for the PBX connection If you ve requested several point to point connec tions the number of extensions can be expanded or you receive another PBX number with your own extension number range With a point to point connection external calls are signalled to the subscriber whose as signed internal number corresponds to the dialled extension number You configure the internal numbers to be reached directly via direct dial in of the extension numbers as In ternal Number in the menu Numbering gt User Settings gt User gt Add gt Trunk Numbers gt Internal Numbers Example You have a point to point connection with the PBX number 1234 and extension numbers from 0 to 30 A call under 1234 22 is normally signalled at the internal sub scriber with call number 22 However if you enter extension number 22 in this list you can define that calls under 1234 22 are signalled at the internal subscriber by call num ber 321 External subscriber numbers at point to multipoint connection For a point to multipoint connection you can request up to 10 numbers MSN multiple subscriber number per ISDN connection These MSNs are the external subscriber num bers for your ISDN connections Definition of the internal number occurs under Number ing gt User Settings gt User gt Add gt Trunk Numbers 5 1 2 1 Edit or New Choose the pl icon to edit existing entries Choose the New button to create new
392. source Netmask network Layer 4 Protocol Select a protocol Possible values ICMP IGMP TCP UDP GRE ESP AH OSPF PIM L2TP Any The default value is Any Source Port Only for Layer 4 Protocol TCP or UDP Enter the source port First select the port number range Possible values e Any default value The route is valid for all port numbers e Single Enables the entry of a port number e Range Enables the entry of a range of port numbers e Privileged Entry of privileged port numbers 0 1023 10 Networking Gigaset Communications GmbH Field Description e Server Entry of server port numbers 5000 32767 e Clients 1 Entry of client port numbers 1024 4999 e Clients 2 Entry of client port numbers 32768 65535 e Not privileged Entry of unprivileged port numbers 1024 65535 Enter the appropriate values for the individual port or start port of a range in Port and for a range the end port in to Port Destination Port Only for Layer 4 Protocol TCP or UDP Enter the destination port First select the port number range Possible values e Any default value The route is valid for all port numbers e Single Enables the entry of a port number e Range Enables the entry of a range of port numbers e Privileged Entry of privileged port numbers 0 1023 e Server Entry of server port numbers 5000 32767 e Clients 1 Entry of client port numbers 1024 4999 e Clients 2
393. splayed When you enable the Use Subject Name from certificate op tion the first alternative subject name indicated in the certific ate is used or if none is specified the subject name of the cer tificate is used Note If you use certificates for authentication and your certific ate contains alternative subject names see Certificates on page 41 you must make sure your device selects the first al ternative subject name by default Make sure you and your peer both use the same name i e that your local ID and the peer ID your partner configures for you are identical Alive Check During communication between two IPSec peers one of the peers may become unavail able e g due to routing problems or a reboot However this can only be detected when the end of the lifetime of the security connection is reached Up until this point the data packets are lost These are various methods of performing an alive check to prevent this happening In the Alive Check field you can specify whether a method should be used to check the availability of a peer Two methods are available Heartbeats and Dead Peer Detection The menu Advanced Settings consists of the following fields Fields in the Advanced Settings menu Gigaset Communications GmbH 13 VPN Field Description Alive Check Only for Phase 1 IKE Parameters Select the method to be used to check the functionality of the IPSec connection In addition to the default method Dead P
394. ss to Phone 6 Digit Numeric PIN menu Field Value Remote Access e g Select whether a remote access of your system is to be permit Follow me Room Mon ted itoring The function is activated with Enabled The function is disabled by default PIN2 Only if Remote Access e g Follow me Room Monitoring is enabled Enter the PIN2 The default value is 000000 2 System Management Gigaset Communications GmbH Field Value Through the 6 digit PIN2 you protect from external access remote access Fields in the SNMP Communities menu Field Value SNMP Read Com Enter the password for the user name read munity SNMP Write Com Enter the password for the user name write munity Field in the Global Password Options menu Field Value Show passwords and Define whether the passwords are to be displayed in clear text keys in clear text plain text The function is enabled with Show The function is disabled by default If you activate the function all passwords and keys in all menus are displayed and can be edited in plain text One exception is IPSec keys They can only be entered in plain text After pressing OK or calling the menu again they are dis played as asterisks 2 2 3 Date and Time You need the system time for tasks such as correct time stamps for system messages or accounting You have the following options for determining the system time local time ISDN Manual The system time can be updated via
395. ssigned to the individual interfaces and the gateway s behavior is defined for denying IP packets A list of all configured interface assignments is displayed in the Networking gt Access Rules gt Interface Assignment menu 10 4 3 1 Edit or New Choose the Fr icon to edit existing entries Choose the New button to configure additional assignments The Networking gt Access Rules gt Interface Assignment gt New menu consists of the following fields Fields in the Basic Parameters menu Field Description Interface Select the interface for which a configured rule chain is to be assigned Rule Chain Select a rule chain Silent Deny Define whether the sender is to be informed if an IP packet is denied e Enabled default value The sender is not informed e Disabled The sender receives an ICMP message Reporting Method Define whether a syslog message is to be generated if a pack et is denied Possible values No report No syslog message e Info default value A syslog message is generated with the protocol number source IP address and source port number e Dump A syslog message is generated with the contents of the first 64 bytes of the denied packet 10 Networking Gigaset Communications GmbH 10 5 Drop In Drop in mode allows you to split a network into smaller segments without having to di vide the IP network into subnets Several interfaces can be combined in a drop in group and assigned to a n
396. steps of the enrolment internally This is an advantage if enrol ment cannot be concluded immediately If the status has not been saved the incomplete registration cannot be completed As soon as the enrolment is completed and the certificate has been downloaded from the CA server it is automatically saved in the device configuration The function is enabled with Enabled The function is enabled by default 2 8 1 3 Import Choose the Import button to import certificates The menu System Management gt Certificates gt Certificate List gt Import consists of the following fields Fields in the Import menu Field Description External Filename Enter the file path and name of the certificate to be imported or use Browse to select it from the file browser Local Certificate De Enter a unique description for the certificate scription File Encoding Select the type of coding so that your device can decode the certificate Possible values e Auto default value Activates automatic code recognition If downloading the certificate in auto mode fails try with a cer tain type of encoding Gigaset Communications GmbH 2 System Management Field Description e Base64 e Binary Password You may need a password to obtain certificates for your keys Enter the password here 2 8 2 CRLs In the System Management gt Certificates gt CRLs menu a list of all CRLs Certification Revocation List is displayed If a key is no
397. swords and PIN s to prevent unauthorised ac cess to the device The System Management gt Global Settings gt Passwords menu consists of the follow ing fields Fields in the System Password menu Field Value System Admin Pass Enter the password for the user name admin word This password is also used with SNMPv3 for authentication MD5 and encryption DES Confirm Admin Pass Confirm the password by entering it again Gigaset Communications GmbH 2 System Management Field Value word PIN1 and PIN2 You can use various protection functions to prevent misuse of your system Your system settings protect you by means of a 4 digit PIN1 pin number Access from outside remote access is protected by a 6 character PIN2 PIN1 is a 4 digit pin number that allows you to protect system settings from unauthorised access PIN2 is a 6 digit pin number that prevents unauthorised external subscribers from being able to use your system These functions can only be used after entering a 6 digit PIN2 Various settings are protected by the system s PIN1 In the basic setting the PIN1 is set to none The following performance features are protected using PIN2 e Remote access for Follow me room monitoring Fields in the Configuration via Phone 4 Digit Numeric PIN menu Field Value PIN1 Enter PIN1 With the 4 digit PIN1 PIN number you protect your system settings through configuration via telephone Fields in the Remote Acce
398. sys tem menu of system telephones Possible values Deutschland default value Nederland e Great Britain e Belgi O Italia e Danmark e Espana e Sverige Norge e France ONPCmeUuga e Osterreich 2 System Management Gigaset Communications GmbH Field Value e Schweiz e esko e Slovenija Polska e Magyarorsz g e Ellada Display Language Select the language you require for the system menu The system provides the system telephones with a special menu the system menu with typical system functions The displays in the system menu may be in a variety of languages These language displays do not depend on the settings in the individual system telephones Possible values e Deutsch default value e English e Italian International Prefix Enter the country code Country Code You need this entry if e g you wish to automatically generate an international number under SIP Provider You dial as usu al the national prefix e g 05151 909999 and the system then automatically dials 495151 909999 If you fail to enter the country code you may misdial as the system will then dial 5151 909999 Without the entry Generate international phone number and International Prefix Country Code the full number plus the country code always has to be dialled in the case of SIP providers Note Not every SIP provider supports this setting Enter the national prefix and the area code for the lo
399. system which transmits data for customers and credit cards to a central location You can connect a data device which operates according to the X 31 transmission stand ard data transmission over the D channel to the system s internal ISDN connections These are for example checkout terminals cashpoints or customer card terminals For use of these performance features your network operator provides you TEI s Terminal Endpoint Identifier which you assign to individual connections when configur ing your system An additional addressing of these terminals occurs via these TE s En Note You can only use this performance feature if performance feature X 31 has been requested from the network operator and you operate a correspond ing terminal on this connection For information on operation please see the user s guide for your terminals 5 1 4 1 Edit or New Choose the Fay icon to edit existing entries Select the New button to set up new X 31 ap plications The Numbering gt Trunk Settings gt X 31 gt New menu consists of the following fields Fields in the Basic Settings menu Field Description Select Interface Select the external interface over which you access the net work operator providing you performance feature X 31 Terminal Endpoint Here select the TEI value TEI Terminal Endpoint Identifier Identifier TEI which you have received from your network operator An addi tional addressing of these terminals occ
400. system is to proceed when registering VoIP subscribers for whom no location has been defined Possible values e Registration for Private Networks Only default value The VoIP subscriber is only registered if located with in the private network e Forbidden The VoIP subscriber is never registered e Unrestricted Registration The VoIP subscriber is al ways registered 4 1 2 1 Edit or New Choose the 3 icon to edit existing entries Select the New button to create new entries The menu VolP gt Settings gt Locations gt New consists of the following fields Fields in the Basic Settings menu Field Description Description Enter the description of the entry Parent Location You can cascade the SIP locations as you wish Define here which SIP location that has been defined constitutes the high 4 VoIP Gigaset Communications GmbH Field Description level node for the SIP location to be configured here Type Select whether the location is to be defined through IP ad dresses DNS names or interfaces Possible values e Addresses default value The SIP location is defined via IP addresses or DNS names e Interfaces The SIP location is defined via the available interfaces Addresses Only for Type Addresses Enter the IP addresses of the devices at the SIP locations Click Add to configure new addresses Enter the IP address or DNS name that you want under IP Ad dress DNS Name Also enter the required Netm
401. t Interna1Select the internal sub scribers Use Add to add more internal numbers 8 9 Voice Mail System The voicemail system is an intelligent answering machine for those who use your hybird An individual voicemail box can be configured for each extension All subscribers can hear save or delete their messages from any telephone using a personal PIN code Subscribers can have themselves informed of incoming e mails Recorded messages can be automatically transferred to any e mail address General settings of the voicemail system are performed on your hybird Operation of the individual voicemail boxes occurs via telephone Every subscriber can use her individual voicemail box by transferring calls to her voice mail box Cz Note If you wish to use a voicemail box you ll need an installed SD card You may need load the required folder structure with the announcement texts on the SD card Choose in the Maintenance gt Software amp Configuration menu the option Import Voice Mail Wave Files 4 Caution Do not remove the SD card during any read or write access to avoid losing data or damaging the card Watch the relevant LED on the top of the device it will flicker during any read or write access 8 9 1 Voice Mail Boxes In the Applications gt Voice Mail System gt Voice Mail Boxes menu a list of the individu al voicemail boxes for specific subscribers is displayed insofar as voicemail boxes have been configured Giga
402. t Edition Gigaset Communications GmbH 11 Multicast Chapter 11 Multicast What is multicasting Many new communication technologies are based on communication from one sender to several recipients Therefore modern telecommunication systems such as voice over IP or video and audio streaming e g IPTV or Webradio focus on reducing data traffic e g by offering TriplePlay voice video data Multicast is a cost effective solution for effective use of bandwidth because the sender of the data packet which can be received by sever al recipients only needs to send the packet once The packet is sent to a virtual address defined as a multicast group Interested recipients log in to these groups Other areas of use One classic area in which multicast is used is for conferences audio video with several recipients The most well known are probably the MBone Multimedia Audio Tool VAT Video Conferencing Tool VIC and Whiteboard WB VAT can be used to hold audio conferences All subscribers are displayed in a window and the speaker s are indicated by a black box Other areas of use are of particular interest to companies Here multicast ing makes it possible to synchronise the databases of several servers which is valuable for multinationals or even companies with just a few locations Address range for multicast For IPv4 the IP addresses 224 0 0 0 to 239 255 255 255 224 0 0 0 4 are reserved for multicast in the class D network A
403. t an overview of all configured ter minals Values in the Overview list Field Description Description Displays the terminal description Phone Type Displays the telephone type Interface Location For ISDN system and analogue terminals displays the inter face at which you re connected to the system The configured location is displayed for IP terminals Internal Numbers Displays the configured internal number 7 Call Routing Gigaset Communications GmbH Chapter 7 Call Routing The functions for external calls and automatic route selections for external calls are defined in call routing 7 1 Outgoing Services In the Call Routing gt Outgoing Services menu you can configure the performance fea tures Direct Call Call Forwarding Dial Control and Priority Numbers 7 1 1 Direct Call In the Call Routing gt Outgoing Services gt Direct Call menu you configure numbers di alled directly without the subscriber on the phone having to dial a number him herself You wish to set up a telephone for which the connection to a specific number is estab lished without entering the number e g emergency telephone You are not at home However there is someone at home who needs to be able to reach you quickly and easily by telephone if necessary e g children or grandparents If you have set up the Direct Call function for one or more telephones the receiver of the corresponding telephone only needs to be lifted After a time
404. t want to miss a call With call forward ing to another number e g your mobile you can receive your calls even when you are not at your desk You can forward calls on your number to any call number It can occur Immediately On no reply or On Busy Call forwarding On no reply and On Busy can exist concurrently If you are not near your telephone for example the call is forwarded to another number e g your mobile phone after a short period If you are making a call at your desk other caller may receive the busy signal You can forward these callers e g to a colleague or the secretary by using call forwarding on busy Every internal subscriber to the system can forward her calls to another number Calls can be forwarded to internal subscriber numbers internal team numbers or external numbers When the number to which calls shall be forwarded is entered the system automatically checks whether it s an internal or external number In a team call forwarding can be set up for one subscriber in the team This call continues to be signalled to the other team subscribers Call forwarding to an internal or external subscriber is performed in the system Call forwarding to an internal number is performed in the system If an internal call to an external number is to be forwarded forwarding also occurs in the system Here the con nection is on the bundle cleared for the subscriber doing the setup If call forwarding oc curs via an ISDN connection
405. t whether Back Route Verify is to be activated for the interface The function is enabled with Enabled By default the function is deactivated for all interfaces 10 2 NAT Network Address Translation NAT is a function on your device for defined conversion of source and destination addresses of IP packets If NAT is activated IP connections are still only allowed by default in one direction outgoing forward protective function Ex ceptions to the rule can be configured in NAT Configuration on page 194 10 2 1 NAT Interfaces A list of all NAT interfaces is displayed in the Networking gt NAT gt NAT Interfaces menu For every NAT interface the NAT active Loopback active Silent Deny and PPTP Passthrough can be selected In addition Port forwardings displays how many port forwarding rules were configured for this interface Options in the menu NAT Interfaces 10 Networking Gigaset Communications GmbH Field Description NAT active Select whether NAT is to be activated for the interface The function is disabled by default Loopback active The NAT loopback function also enables network address translation for connectors whereby NAT is not activated This is often used in order to interpret queries from the LAN as if they were coming from the WAN You can use this to test the server services The function is disabled by default Silent Deny Select whether IP packets are to be silently denied by NAT If this fun
406. telephones the URL of the provisioning server if the telephones are to be provi sioned automatically The URL then needs to take the form http lt IP address of the provisioning serv er gt eg prov e Vendor Group Vendor Specific Information This enables you to send the client any manufacturer specific information in any text string Gigaset Communications GmbH 15 Local Services Field Description Several entries are possible Add additional entries with the Add button Edit In the Local Services gt DHCP Server gt DHCP Configuration gt Advanced Settings menu you can edit an entry in the DHCP Options field if Option Vendor Group is se lected Choose the 3 icon to edit an existing entry In popup menu you configure manufacture spe cific settings in the DHCP server for specific telephones Fields in the Basic Parameters menu Field Description Select vendor Your device does not currently use this parameter Here you can select for which manufacturer specific values shall be transmitted for the DHCP server Possible values e Siemens default value e Other Provisioning Server Your device does not currently use this parameter code 3 Enter which manufacturer value shall be transmitted For the setting Select vendor Siemens the default value sdlp is displayed You can complete the IP address of the desired server 15 4 3 IP MAC Binding The Local Services gt DHCP Server gt IP MAC Binding menu dis
407. tem tele phone from the system phone book Access from system phone option E mail Address Enter the e mail address for the user Fields in the Class of Service menu Field Description Standard Select the authorisation class CoS Class of Service Defini tion of the authorisation class and creation of new authorisation classes occurs under Numbering gt User Settings gt Class of Services Only selection occurs in this setting Possible values e Default CoS default value e Not allowed No class of service e lt Authorisation class gt Optional Select an optional authorisation class This CoS is required for Gigaset Communications GmbH 5 Numbering Field Description the calendar settings Definition of the authorisation class and creation of new authorisation classes occurs under Numbering gt User Settings gt Class of Services Only selec tion occurs in this setting Possible values e Default CoS default value e Not allowed No class of service e lt Authorisation class gt Night Select the authorisation class for night operation This CoS is required for the calendar settings Definition of the authorisa tion class and creation of new authorisation classes occurs un der Numbering gt User Settings gt Class of Services Only se lection occurs in this setting Possible values e Default CoS default value Not allowed No class of service e lt Authorisation class gt Fields in the Furthe
408. ter the system name of your device This is also used as the PPP host name A character string of up to 255 characters is possible The device type is entered as the default value Location Enter the location of your device Contact Enter the relevant contact person Here you can enter the e Gigaset Communications GmbH 2 System Management Field Value mail address of the system administrator for example A character string of up to 255 characters is possible Maximum Number of Enter the maximum number of syslog messages that are Syslog Entries stored internally in the device Possible values are 0 to 1000 The default value is 50 You can display the stored messages in Monitoring gt Internal Log Maximum Message Select the priority of system messages above which a log Level of Syslog should be created Entries System messages are only recorded internally if they have a higher or identical priority to that indicated i e all messages generated are recorded at syslog level Debug Possible values Emergency Only messages with emergency priority are re corded e Alert Messages with emergency and alert priority are re corded e Critical Messages with emergency alert and critical pri ority are recorded e Error Messages with emergency alert critical and error priority are recorded e Warning Messages with emergency alert critical error and warning priority are recorded e Notice Messages with
409. th Add e Remote IP Address IP address of the destination host or network e Netmask Netmask for Remote IP Address If no entry is made your device uses a default netmask e Metric The lower the value the higher the priority of the route range of values 0 15 The default value is 7 The menu Advanced Settings consists of the following fields Fields in the Advanced Settings menu Field Description Block after connection Enter the wait time in seconds before the device should try failure for again after an attempt to set up a connection has failed The default value is 60 Maximum Number of Enter the number of unsuccessful attempts to setup a connec 12 WAN Gigaset Communications GmbH Field Description Dialup Retries tion before the interface is blocked Possible values are 0 to 100 The default value is 5 Authentication Select the authentication protocol for this Internet connection Select the authentication specified by your provider Possible values PAP default value Only run PAP PPP Password Authentic ation Protocol the password is transferred unencrypted e CHAP Only run CHAP PPP Challenge Handshake Authen tication Protocol as per RFC 1994 password is transferred encrypted e PAP CHAP Primarily run CHAP otherwise PAP e MS CHAPv1 Only run MS CHAP version 1 PPP Microsoft Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol PAP CHAP MS CHAP Primarily run CHAP on denial then the authe
410. the address IP address or valid DNS name of the mail server to be used for sending the mails The entry is limited to 40 characters SMTP Authentication Authentication expected by the SMTP server Possible values None default value The server accepts and send emails without further authentication ESMTP The server only accepts e mails if the router logs in with the correct user name and password e SMTP after POP The server requires that e mails are called via POP3 by the sending IP with the correct POP3 user name and password before sending an e mail User Name Only if SMTP Authentication ESMTP or SMTP after POP Enter the user name for the POP3 or SMTP server Password Only if SMTP Authentication ESMTP or SMTP after POP Enter the password of this user POP3 Server Only if SMTP Authentication SMTP after POP Enter the address of the server from which the e mails are to be retrieved POP3 Timeout Only if SMTP Authentication SMTP after POP Enter how long the router must wait after the POP3 call before it is forced to send the alert mail The default value is 600 seconds 17 External Reporting Gigaset Communications GmbH 17 4 SNMP SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol is a protocol from the IP protocol family for transporting management information about network components Every SNMP management system contains an MIB SNMP can be used to configure control and administrate various networ
411. the current TACACS server is to be used for login authen tication to your device Server IP Address Enter the IP address of the TACACS server that is to be re quested for login authentication TACACS Secret Enter the password to be used to authenticate and if applic able encrypt data exchange between the TACACS server and the network access server your device The maximum length of the entry is 32 characters Priority Assign a priority to the current TACACS server The server with the lowest value is the one used first for TACACS login authentication If no response is given or access is denied only if Policy Non authoritative the entry with the next highest priority is used The available values are 0 to 9 the default value is 0 Entry active Select whether this server is to be used for login authentica tion The function is activated by selecting Enabled The function is enabled by default 2 System Management Gigaset Communications GmbH The menu Advanced Settings consists of the following fields Fields in the Advanced Settings menu Field Description Policy Select the interpretation of the TACACS response Possible values e Non authoritative default value The TACACS serv ers are queried in order of their priority see Priority until a positive response is received or a negative response has been received from an authoritative server e Authoritative A negative response to a request is ac
412. the operation to separate registration authorities if applicable When a certificate is downloaded automatically i e if CA Certificate Download is selected all the certificates needed for the operation are loaded automatically If all the necessary certificates are already available in the system these can also be se lected manually Select the Certificate Request button to request or import more certificates The menu System Management gt Certificates gt Certificate List gt Certificate Request consists of the following fields Fields in the Certificate Request menu Field Description Certificate Request Enter a unique description for the certificate Description Mode Select the way in which you want to request the certificate Possible settings e Manual default value Your device generates a PKCS 10 for the key This file can then be uploaded directly in the browser or copied in the o menu using the View details field This file must be provided to the CA and the received certificate must then be imported manually to your device e SCEP The key is requested from a CA using the Simple Certificate Enrolment Protocol Generate Private Key Only for Mode Manual Select an algorithm for key creation RSA default value and DSA are available Gigaset Communications GmbH 2 System Management Field Description Also select the length of the key to be created Possible values 512 768 1024 1536 2048
413. tion You can only delete the configuration if Enable IPSec not ac tivated IPSec Debug Level Select the priority of the syslog messages of the IPSec subsys tem to be recorded internally Possible values e Emergency highest priority e Alert O Crneneel e Error e Warning e Notice e Information e Debug default value lowest priority Syslog messages are only recorded internally if they have a higher or identical priority to that indicated i e all messages generated are recorded at syslog level debug The Advanced Settings menu is for adapting certain functions and features to the spe cial requirements of your environment i e mostly interoperability flags are set The default values are globally valid and enable your system to work correctly to other bintec elmeg devices so that you only need to change these values if the remote terminal is a third party product or you know special settings are necessary These may be needed for ex ample if the remote end operates with older IPSec implementations The menu Advanced Settings consists of the following fields Fields in the Advanced Settings menu Field Description IPSec over TCP Determine whether IPSec over TCP is to be used IPSec over TCP is based on NCP pathfinder technology This technology insures that data traffic IKE ESP AH between peers is integrated into a pseudo HTTPS session The function is enabled with Enabled Gigaset Communications G
414. tion Options menu Gigaset Communications GmbH 16 Maintenance Field Description Action Select the action you wish to execute After each task a window is displayed showing the other steps that are required Possible values e No Action default value e Export configuration The configuration file Current File Name in Flash is transferred to your local host If you click the Go button a dialog box is displayed in which you can select the storage location on your PC and enter the de sired file name e Import configuration Under Filename select a config uration file you want to import Please note Click Go to first load the file under the name boot in the flash memory for the device You must restart the device to enable it Please note The files to be imported must be in CSV format e Copy configuration The configuration file in the Source File Name field is saved as Destination File Name e Delete configuration The configuration in the Select file field is deleted e Rename configuration The configuration file in the Se lect file field is renamed to New File Name e Restore backup configuration Only if under Save configuration with the setting Save configuration and back up previous boot configuration the current configuration was saved as boot configuration and the previ ous boot configuration was also archived You can load back the archived boot configuration e Delete software firmware The file i
415. tions and for voice connections over Voice over IP 2 8 1 Certificate List A list of all existing certificates is displayed in the System Management gt Certificates gt Certificate List menu 2 8 1 1 Edit Click the ray icon to display the content of the selected object key certificate or request The certificates and keys themselves cannot be changed but a few external attributes can be changed depending on the type of the selected entry The System Management gt Certificates gt Certificate List gt menu consists of the fol lowing fields Fields in the Edit parameters menu Field Description Description Shows the name of the certificate key or request Certificate is CA Certi Mark the certificate as a certificate from a trustworthy certifica ficate tion authority CA Certificates issued by this CA are accepted during authentica tion Gigaset Communications GmbH 2 System Management Field Description The function is enabled with True The function is disabled by default Certificate Revocation Only for Certificate is CA Certificate True List CRL Checking Define the extent to which certificate revocation lists CRLs are to be included in the validation of certificates issued by the owner of this certificate Possible settings e Disabled No CRLs check e Always CRLs are always checked O mly E a ORL Di siecralouicion Ioilimic LS present default value A check is only carried out
416. ts of the follow ing fields Fields in the Basic Settings menu Field Description Description Enter a description for the Wave file Select file Click Browse and select the Wave file to be loaded into the system through the Explorer window Volume Select the volume at which the Wave file shall be played by de fault Select 0 to play the file at a predefined default volume 8 Applications Gigaset Communications GmbH Field Description You can gradually diminish the volume using the negative val ues and increase it with the positive ones Possible values e 5 4 e 3 e 2 1 e 0 default value e 1 O 2 O P3 8 4 System Phonebook In the Applications gt System Phonebook menu you can enter and administer numbers in the system phone book The employees in your company must phone many customers This is where the system phone book comes in You need not enter the customer s number but can extract the name via the system telephone display and dial Customer names and telephone num bers can be centrally administered by an employee If a customer whose number has been entered in the phone book calls his her name appears in the system telephone dis play The system features an integrated phone book in which you can save phone book entries of up to 24 digits numbers and up to 20 character names text When creating a telephone book entry a Speed Dial Number code is assigned to each entry Authorised tel
417. tus e Interface Traffic The operations configured and as signed in Actions are triggered if the data traffic on the spe cified interfaces falls below or exceed the defined value e Ping Test the operations configured and assigned in Ac tions are triggered if the defined IP address is accessible or not accessible e Certificate Lifetime Operations configured and as Gigaset Communications GmbH 15 Local Services Field Description signed in Actions are initiated when the defined period of validity is reached Monitored Variable Only for Event Type M7B SNMP Select the MIB variable whose defined value is to be con figured as initiator First select the System in which the MIB variable is saved then the MIB Table and finally the MIB Vari able itself Only the MIB tables and MIB variables present in the respective area are displayed Compare Condition Only for Event Type M7B SNMP Select whether the MIB variable Greater default value Equal Less Not Equal must have the value given in Com pare Value or must lie within Range to initiate the operation Compare Value Only for Event Type M7B SNMP Enter the value of the MIB variable Index Variables Only for Event Type M7B SNMP Where required select MIB variables to uniquely identify a spe cific data set in the MIB Table e g ConnTf Index The unique identification of a particular table entry is derived from the com bination of Index Variable usually an index
418. u consists of the following fields Fields in the Basic Settings menu Field Description Internal Number Select the internal number for which the parallel call perform ance feature is to be set up External Number Under New Number enter the external telephone number to which a call should be signalled in parallel If a mobile number and a call number are configured for personal use under Users gt Basic Settings gt External Numbers these are dis played in Configured Home Number or Configured Mobile Number and can be selected Parallel Ringing Select whether this parallel call entry is to be enabled The function is activated by selecting Enabled The function is disabled by default 5 3 Groups Teams In this menu you configure your system s teams 5 3 1 Teams In the Numbering gt Groups amp Teams gt Teams menu you configure you system s teams Teams are groups of people working together to realise an objective In practice this means that all people within a team can be reached under the same subscriber number for external and internal calls In the PABX each team of telephones terminals can thus be assigned a specific subscriber number to guarantee accessibility to internal and ex ternal calls Individual structures of companies can be mapped by teams Thus depart ments such as Service Sales or Development can be called from inside or outside in a selective manner via team numbers Within a team the call can
419. ue You can now make an announcement from your tele phone to notify your colleague that the call is waiting Using a code for the open hold for enquiry the colleague can take the call on any telephone If a call waiting in the queue is not taken by a subscriber within the time entered here the initiating subscriber is called back or given a call waiting Possible values are 10 to 600 The default value is 30 Gigaset Communications GmbH 2 System Management 2 2 5 System Licences This chapter shows the software licenses enabled ex works The options for editing new entries and restore are not usually required Possible values for Status Licence Meaning OK Subsystem is activated Not OK Subsystem is not activated Not supported You have entered a licence for a subsystem your system does not support The System Licence ID is also displayed above the list 2 2 5 1 Edit or New Choose the Fay icon to edit existing entries Choose the New button to enter more li cences The menu System Management gt Global Settings gt System Licences gt New consists of the following fields Fields in the Basic Settings menu Field Value Licence Serial Number Enter the licence serial number you received when you bought the licence Licence Key Enter the licence key you received by e mail 2 3 Access Codes In your day to day work you have employed codes to use particular features and you wish to use them again with your new syst
420. ue is 5060 A 5 digit sequence is possible Transport Protocol Select the transport protocol for the connection Possible values Gigaset Communications GmbH 4 VoIP Field Description e UDP default value O IEP Fields in the Further Settings menu Field Description From Domain Number of allowed simultaneous Calls Location Codec Profiles Enter the SIP provider s From Domain It is used after the O as sender data in the SIP header of the SIP data packages Select the maximum number of calls that shall be simultan eously possible Please also note the settings for bandwidth management here Possible values e International default value An unlimited number of simultaneous calls is possible o dl A Og 4 5 O 10 Select the location of the SIP server Locations are defined in the VolP gt Settings gt Locations menu Possible values e Any Location default value The server is not operated at any defined location e lt Location Name gt Select the codec profile for this SIP server Codec profiles are defined in the VolP gt Settings gt Codec Profiles menu Possible values e System Default default value The server is operated with a codec profile predefined in the system e lt Codec profile name gt 4 VoIP Gigaset Communications GmbH Field Description Dial End Monitoring Select the time after dialling the last digit of a call number Time after which the system b
421. uiring a password and enter it into the entry field The function is disabled by default Overwrite similar certi ficate Only where Command Type Certificate Management and Action Import certificate Select whether to overwrite a certificate already present on the your device with the new one The function is disabled by default Write certificate in oar configuration Only where Command Type Certificate Management and Action Import certificate Select whether to integrate the certificate in a configuration file and if so select the desired configuration file The function is disabled by default Certificate Request Description Only where Command Type Certificate Management and Action SCEP Enter a description under which the SCEP certificate on your device is to be saved URL SCEP Server URL Only where Command Type Certificate Management and Action SCEP Enter the URL of the SCEP server e g ht tp scep bintec elmeg com 8080 scep scep dll1 Your CA administrator can provide you with the necessary data Gigaset Communications GmbH 15 Local Services Field Description Subject Name Only where Command Type Certificate Management and Action SCEP Enter a subject name with attributes Example CN VPNServer DC mydomain DC com c DE CA Name Only where Command Type Certificate Management and Action SCEP Enter the name of the CA certificate of the certification author it
422. ular host is correctly resolved The Output field displays the DSN test messages The ping test is launched by entering the domain name to be tested in DNS Address and clicking the Go button 16 1 3 Traceroute Test You use the traceroute test to display the route to a particular address IP address or do main name if this can be reached The Output field displays the traceroute test mes sages The ping test is launched by entering the IP address to be tested in Traceroute Address and clicking the Go button hybird 120 Gigaset Edition Gigaset Communications GmbH 16 Maintenance 16 2 Software amp Configuration You can use this menu to manage the software version of your device your configuration files and the language of the GUI 16 2 1 Options Your device contains the version of the system software available at the time of produc tion More recent versions may have since been released You may therefore need to carry out a software update Every new system software includes new features better performance and any necessary bugfixes from the previous version You can find the current system software at www gigasetpro com The current documentation is also available here N Important If you want to update your software make sure you consider the corres ponding release notes These describe the changes implemented in the new system software The result of an interrupted update e g power failure during the update cou
423. ultaneous on No Reply Rotating or linear is set for the team call After defined times have run out all team subscribers can be called in parallel simultaneously Example A precondition is that the sum of forwarding times is larger than the time parallel after time There are 4 subscribers to a team The forwarding time for each subscriber is 10 seconds 40 seconds in total The time parallel after time is set to 38 seconds Every subscriber will be called If a subscriber logs out of the team or is engaged forwarding time is only 30 seconds after which the parallel after time call is no longer made e Even Distribution Longest Free Even distribution corresponds to Sig nallingRotating and insures that all team subscribers receive the same number of calls For every subscriber who has ended a call a Wrap up Time 0 999 seconds is set up for the team subscriber during which she receives no more calls Calls received by the subscriber on his number rather than via the team and self initiated calls are not included in the even distribution calculation Even distribution begins with the subscriber who hasn t received calls for the longest time on restart with the first subscriber entered in the subscriber list A subscriber who has logged out of the team code number or function key is no longer taken into account for the even distribution After a system 5 Numbering Gigaset Communications GmbH power failure the existing Even distribut
424. umber with the entry in the system phone book or with the user s call number entries Mobile Number and Home Number e Number screening and PIN Dialling release occurs after matching the entered number with the entry in the sys tem phone book or with the user s call number entries Mo bile Number and Home Number AND PIN entry e PIN Dialling release occurs after PIN entry e Number screening or PIN Dialling release occurs after matching the entered number with the entry in the system phone book or with the user s call number entries Mobile Number and Home Number OR PIN entry Only for Authorization Number screening and PIN PIN Number screening or PIN The system checks the caller s authorisation for Call Through then activates a simulated external dialling tone for the call Au thorisation is granted if the caller has entered the correct 6 digit PIN Select the internal subscriber via which Call Through is to oc cur One of the system s telephone numbers is defined in the configuration for Call Through An external caller using this Gigaset Communications GmbH 5 Numbering Field Description telephone number first hears the system s attention tone 5 4 2 Misdial Routing In the menu Numbering gt Call Distribution gt Misdial Routing for every external connec tion you define the subscriber or the team to which the call shall go in any of the following cases e an incoming call has a wrong or truncated number e
425. unction is activated by selecting Enabled The function is enabled by default ISDN Synchronisation When an external device e g GSM gateway is connected to an external point to point ISDN access in the system the ex ternal device s signal can disturb the synchronisation in the ISDN signal Only if such a disturbance occurs should you switch off the layer 1 synchronisation The function is activated by selecting Enabled The function is enabled by default 3 2 2 ISDN Internal You configure your system s internal ISDN interfaces in the Physical Interfaces gt ISDN Ports gt ISDN Internal menu Internal ISDN connections are always point to multipoint connections When connecting terminals to an internal ISDN connection please note that not every ISDN terminal sold be retailers is able to use the features provided by the system via your key interface The Physical Interfaces gt ISDN Ports gt ISDN Internal menu consists of the following fields 3 Physical Interfaces Gigaset Communications GmbH Fields in the ISDN Internal menu Field Description Name Shows the name of the ISDN interface Possible values e S U 4 wire S e Displays the port on the module to which the ISDN con nection is connected Example S U 2 The interface is in Port 2 and is used as an S connector Usage Shows the function of the ISDN interface Possible values e Upn Interface for CAPI terminals e Upn Interface for UPN terminals
426. unting by setting the checkmark In the IP Accounting column you do not need to click each entry indi vidually Using the options Select all or Deselect all you can enable or disable the IP ac counting function for all interfaces simultaneously 17 2 2 Options In this menu you configure general settings for IP Accounting In the External Reporting gt IP Accounting gt Options menu you can define the Log Format of the IP accounting messages The messages can contain character strings in any order sequences separated by a slash e g t or n or defined tags Possible format tags Format tags for IP Accounting messages Field Description d Date of the session start in the format DD MM YY t Time of the session start in the format HH MM SS a Duration of the session in seconds C Protocol i Source IP Address Sor Source Port f Source interface index l Destination IP Address R Destination Port F Destination interface index p Packets sent 0 Octets sent P Packets received 0 Octets received S Serial number for accounting message Vo By default the following format instructions are entered in the Log Format field INET sdsttatcsi r tf gt 31 5R 3F3p303P30 s Gigaset Communications GmbH 17 External Reporting 17 3 Alert Service It was previously possible to send syslog messages from the router to any syslog host Depending on the configuration e mail alerts are sent to the administrator as soo
427. ur rence of the event until the device is restarted The default value is 60 seconds MIB SNMP Variable to add edit Only if Command Type MIB SNMP Select the MIB table in which the MIB variable whose value 15 Local Services Gigaset Communications GmbH Field Description shall be changed is saved First select the System then the MIB Table Only the MIB tables present in the respective area are displayed Command Mode Only if Command Type MIB SNMP Select how the MIB entry is to be manipulated Possible settings e Change existing entry default value An existing entry shall be modified e Create new MIB entry Anew entry shall be created Index Variables Only if Command Type MIB SNMP Where required select MIB variables to uniquely identify a spe cific data set in MIB Table e g ConnTf Index The unique identification of a particular table entry is derived from the com bination of Index Variable usually an index variable which is flagged with and Index Value Use Index Variables to create more entries with Add Trigger Status Only if Command Type MIB SNMP Select what status the event must have in order to modify the MIB variable as defined Possible values e Active default value The value of the MIB variable is modified if the initiator is active e Inactive The value of the MIB variable is modified if the initiator is inactive e Both The value of the MIB variable is different
428. ur device is requested to do so by the connection partner Only makes sense for CLID e Windows Server Mode Callback optional like Windows Server Mode with the option of termination This setting should be avoided for security reasons The Microsoft client also has the option of aborting callback and maintaining the initial connection to your device without callback This only applies if no fixed outgoing number has been configured for the connection partner This is done by closing the dialog box that appears with Cancel Fields in the Bandwith on Demand Options menu Field Description Channel Bundling Select whether channel bundling is to be used for ISDN con nections with the connection partner and if so what type Your device supports dynamic and static channel bundling for dialup connections Only one B channel is initially opened when a connection is set up Dynamic channel bundling means that your device connects other ISDN B channels to increase the throughput for connections if this is required e g for large data rates If the amount of data traffic drops the additional B channels are closed again In static channel bundling you spe cify right from the start how many B channels your device is to use regardless of the transferred data rate Possible values e None default value No channel bundling only one B channel is ever available for connections Gigaset Communications GmbH 12 WAN Field Description
429. urs via the TEl s Possible values are 00 to 63 The default value is 00 Gigaset Communications GmbH 5 Numbering Field Description Internal Assignment Select the internal ISDN interface to which your data device which operates according to the X 31 transmission standard data transmission over the D channel is connected 5 2 User Settings In this menu you configure and administer your system s users The users are organised into authorisation classes to which the desired external lines are assigned and which may use performance features according to request The user assigned to an authorisation class receives an internal number and specific authorisations A default authorisation class Default CoS is preset ex works to which new users are automatically assigned After it s been defined in User Settings which functions and authorisations a user or sev eral users have access to authorisation of user settings is assigned to a terminal in menu Terminals In this way its possible to create settings for several terminals via an author isation class e g a user setting Boss a user setting Department Head and a user set ting Clerk Now all that s left to do is assign the corresponding terminals to one of these Class of Service 5 2 1 Users In the Numbering gt User Settings gt Users you configure the users of your system their class and assign them internal and external numbers You see an overview of the users that ha
430. ut look for example The phone book data stored in your device is exported to a text file The Applications gt System Phonebook gt Import Export menu consists of the following fields Fields in the Basic Settings menu Field Description Action Select the desired action Possible values e Export default value You can export the names saved in Applications gt System Phonebook gt Entries into a text file specifying phone number speed dial call through e Import You can import a text file in the following format The file imported must consist of individual rows in the follow ing format name phone number speed dial call through 1 enabled 2 disabled Example Name Phone Number Speeddial Number Call Through Hans 123456 1 1 Klaus 234567 2 2 Gigaset Communications GmbH 8 Applications Field Description Max 345678 3 1 Separator Only for Action Import and Default File Format not enabled Enter the separator type in the import file Possible values e Comma default value e Semicolon Space e Tabulator Select file Only for Action Import select the file to be imported You also have the option to import a CSV file If the data record consists of more than one column you have the option to generate two address book entries from the data record for the import e g one for business and one private entry To do this specify the data to be used as the name and phone number in an additional
431. uter as the LAN IP address Metric Only for IP Address Assignment Static or IKE Config Mode Client and Default Route Enabled Select the priority of the route The lower the value the higher the priority of the route Value range from 0 to 15 The default value is 1 Route Entries Only for IP Address Assignment Static or IKE Config Mode Client Define routing entries for this connection partner e Remote IP Address IP address of the destination host or LAN e Netmask Netmask for Remote IP Address e Metric The lower the value the higher the priority of the route possible values 0 15 The default value is 1 Fields in the menu Additional Traffic Filter Gigaset Communications GmbH 13 VPN Field Description Additional Traffic Filter Only for Internet Key Exchange IKEv1 Use Add to create a new filter Additional data traffic filters bintec elmeg Gateways support two different methods for establishing IPSec connec tions e a method based on policies and e a method based on routing The policy based method uses data traffic filters to negotiate the IPSec phase 2 SAs This enables the filtering of the IP packets to be very fine grained down to protocol and port level The routing based method offers various advantages over the policy based method e g NAT PAT within a tunnel IPSec in combination with routing protocols and the creation of VPN backup scenarios With the routing based method the co
432. values PAP CHAP MS CHAP default value Primarily run CHAP on denial the authentication protocol required by the PPTP part ner MSCHAP version 1 or 2 possible e PAP Only run PAP PPP Password Authentication Protocol the password is transferred unencrypted e CHAP Only run CHAP PPP Challenge Handshake Authen tication Protocol as per RFC 1994 password is transferred encrypted Gigaset Communications GmbH 13 VPN Field Description e PAP CHAP Primarily run CHAP otherwise PAP e MS CHAPv1 Only run MS CHAP version 1 PPP Microsoft Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol e MS CHAPv2 Run MS CHAP version 2 only e None Some providers use no authentication In this case select this option Encryption If necessary select the type of encryption that should be used for data traffic to the L2TP partner This is only possible if STAC or MS STAC compression is not activated for the con nection If Encryption is set the remote terminal must also support it otherwise a connection cannot be set up Possible values e None MPP encryption is not used e Enabled default value MPP encryption V2 with 128 bit is used to RFC 3078 e Windows compatible MPP encryption V2 with 128 bit is used as compatible with Microsoft and Cisco LCP Alive Check Select whether the availability of the remote terminal is to be checked by sending LCP echo requests or replies This is re commended for leased lines PPTP and
433. ve been created The entries in the Name column are sorted alphabetically Click the column title of any other column to sort entries in ascending or descending order Choose the ray icon to edit existing entries Select the New button in order to create new users 5 2 1 1 Basic Settings Enter basic user information in the Numbering gt User Settings gt Users gt Basic Settings menu The Numbering gt User Settings gt Users gt Basic Settings menu consists of the following fields Fields in the Basic Settings menu 5 Numbering Gigaset Communications GmbH Field Description Name Enter the name of the user This name is displayed in the phone book if you have entered a number and cleared it for the phone book under Mobile Num ber Home Number The name is displayed with the codes M for mobile communication and H for home number in the sys tem telephone display Description Enter additional user information Fields in the External Numbers menu Field Description Mobile Number Enter a number under which the user can be reached via mo bile phone Also select whether this number is to be shown in the system telephone display so that it can be dialled on the system telephone from the system phone book Access from system phone option Home Number Enter a number under which the user can be reached privately Also select whether this number is to be shown in the system telephone display so that it can be dialled on the sys
434. which in turn sends this to the client in the local network The menu Local Services gt DHCP Server gt DHCP Relay Settings consists of the follow ing fields Fields in the Basic Parameters menu Field Description Primary DHCP Server Enter the IP address of a server to which BootP or DHCP re quests are to be forwarded Gigaset Communications GmbH 15 Local Services Field Description Secondary DHCP Enter the IP address of an alternative BootP or DHCP server Server 15 5 CAPI Server You can use the CAPI Server function to assign user names and passwords to users of the CAPI applications on your device This makes sure that only authorised users can re ceive incoming calls and make outgoing calls via CAPI The CAPI service allows connection of incoming and outgoing data and voice calls to communications applications on hosts in the LAN that access the Remote CAPI interface of your device This enables for example hosts connected to your device to receive and send faxes Es Note All incoming calls to the CAPI are offered to all registered and eavesdrop ping CAPI applications in the LAN In the ex works state a user with the user name default and no password is entered for the CAPI subsystem Once you ve created your intended users with password you should delete the default user without password 15 5 1 User A list of all configured CAPI users is displayed in the Local Services gt CAPI Server gt User menu
435. wn pass word the first time they log in To do this the option Save con figuration needs to be enabled in the menu Access Profiles If this option is not enabled a warning message displays Enable or disable User must change password The function is enabled with Enabled The function is disabled by default Access Level Use Add to assign at least one access profile to the user Se lecting Read only specifies that the user can view the para meters of the access profile but not change them Selecting Read only is only possible if the option Switch to SNMP Browser in the menu Access Profiles is not enabled If the option Switch to SNMP Browser is enabled a warning message displays because the user can switch to the SNMP browser view access the parameters and make any changes they like The option Read only is not available in the SNMP browser view If intersecting access profiles are assigned to a user read and write have a higher priority than Read only Buttons cannot be set to the setting Read only 2 8 Certificates An asymmetric cryptosystem is used to encrypt data to be transported in a network to generate or check digital signatures and the authenticate users A key pair consisting of a public key and a private key is used to encrypt and decrypt the data For encryption the sender requires the public key of the recipient The recipient decrypts the data using his private key To ensure that the public key is the real
436. xecuted Possible values are 1 to 99 The default value is 15 Gigaset Communications GmbH 2 System Management Field Description Direct Call Enter the time after which the configured number will be dialled when the receiver is lifted You wish to set up a telephone for which the connection to a specific number is established without entering the number e g emergency telephone You are not at home However there is someone at home who needs to be able to reach you quickly and easily by telephone if necessary e g children or grandparents If you have set up the Direct Call function for one or more telephones the receiver of the corresponding tele phone only needs to be lifted After a time period without fur ther entries set in configuration the system automatically dials the configured direct call number If you do not dial within the specified period from picking up the receiver automatic dialling is initiated Possible values are 1 to 30 The default value is 5 External Door Connec If an external telephone requests a door intercom call here you tions can set the time after which this call is forcefully terminated Possible values e infinite e 60 seconds e 120 seconds e 180 seconds default value e 240 seconds e 300 seconds Fields in the Advanced Settings menu Field Value Explicit Call Transfer Enter the time after which the initiating subscriber is to be called back or hear call waiting if
437. xtension all members of the called team or call center are logged off e all members of the called c all center are in post processing 5 4 2 1 Edit Choose the E icon to edit existing entries The Numbering gt Call Distribution gt Misdial Routing gt g menu consists of the follow ing fields Fields in the Basic Settings menu Field Description Trunk Displays the external connection for which redirect for wrong dialling is configured Select the type of rerouting Rerouting to Number e None No redirect here the caller gets a busy tone e Global Settings Redirect occurs as entered in System Management gt Global Settings gt System gt Rerouting to Number e lt Internal number of a user or team gt The call is redirected to this user or team 6 Terminals Gigaset Communications GmbH Chapter 6 Terminals 6 1 Gigaset Phones In this menu you perform assignment of configured internal numbers to the terminals and set additional functions according to terminal type The system telephone end devices are listed alphabetically in the Description column Click the column title of any other column to sort entries in ascending or descending order 6 1 1 Gigaset Phones In the Terminals gt Gigaset Phones gt Gigaset Phones menu you assign the configured internal numbers to the connected devices Any devices that are connected are automatically detected and listed in the lower part of the overview Choose the H
438. y CA from which you wish to request your certificate e g cawindows Your CA administrator can provide you with the necessary data Password Only where Command Type Certificate Management and Action SCEP To obtain certificates you may need a password from the certi fication authority Enter the password you received from the certification authority here Key Size Only where Command Type Certificate Management and Action SCEP Select the length of the key to be created Possible values are 1024 default value 2048 and 4096 Autosave Mode Only where Command Type Certificate Management and Action SCEP Select whether your device automatically stores the various steps of the enrolment internally This is an advantage if enrol ment cannot be concluded immediately If the status has not been saved the incomplete registration cannot be completed As soon as the enrolment is completed and the certificate has been downloaded from the CA server it is automatically saved in the device configuration The function is enabled by default Use CRL Only where Command Type Certificate Management and Action SCEP 15 Local Services Gigaset Communications GmbH Field Description Define the extent to which certificate revocation lists CRLs are to be included in the validation of certificates issued by the owner of this certificate Possible values e Auto default value In case there is an entry for a CDP CRL

Manual hybird 120 Gigaset Edition

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents